Emdg-C10028-00-4aus - Siprotec 5 - Us

SIPROTEC 5 for Every Application and Requirement
SIPROTEC 5 – Devices
Protection, Automation and Monitoring
Catalog SIPROTEC 5.01 · Edition 4
siemens.com/siprotec
Overview of documentation
Catalogs Manuals Software
SIPROTEC 5 Device Hardware Operating

catalog manuals manual manual
SIPROTEC 5/DIGSI 5
Tutorial
Online help DIGSI 5

Selection Guide Online help devices
for SIPROTEC and
Communication Product Engineering
Reyrolle protocol manuals information Guide
Visio-Uebersicht-us.pdf
Overview of Documentation for the SIPROTEC 5 System
SIPROTEC 5 catalog Product information

The catalog describes the system features and the devices The Product information includes general information about
of SIPROTEC 5. device installation, technical data, limiting values for input and
output modules, and conditions when preparing for operation.
Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle This document is provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device.
The selection guide offers an overview of the device series
Engineering Guide
of the Siemens protection devies, and a device selection table.
The Engineering Guide describes the essential steps when engi-
Device manuals neering with DIGSI 5. In addition, the Engineering Guide shows
Each Device manual describes the functions and applications of you how to load a planned configuration to a SIPROTEC 5 device
a specific SIPROTEC 5 device. The printed manual and the online and update the functionality of the SIPROTEC 5 device.
help for the device have the same informational structure.
DIGSI 5 online help
Hardware manual The DIGSI 5 online help contains a help package for DIGSI 5 and
The Hardware manual describes the hardware building blocks CFC. The help package for DIGSI 5 includes a description of the
and device combinations of the SIPROTEC 5 device family. basic operation of software, the DIGSI principles and editors.
The help package for CFC includes an introduction to CFC pro-
Operating manual gramming, basic examples of working with CFC, and a reference
chapter with all the CFC blocks available for the SIPROTEC 5
The Operating manual describes the basic principles and range.
procedures for operating and assembling the devices of the
SIPROTEC 5 range. SIPROTEC 5 / DIGSI 5 Tutorial
Communication protocol manual The tutorial on the DVD contains brief information about
important product features, more detailed information about the
The Communication protocol manual contains a description of individual technical areas, as well as operating sequences with
the protocols for communication within the SIPROTEC 5 device tasks based on practical operation and a brief explanation.
family and to higher-level network control centers.
2 SIPROTEC 5 · Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring · Siemens Catalog · Edition 4

Content
SIPROTEC 5 SIPROTEC 5 1
Devices Protection, Introduction 1.1
Automation and Innovation Highlights 1.2
Monitoring SIPROTEC 5 Devices and Fields of Application 2
Device Types 2.1
Catalog SIPROTEC 5.01 - Edition 4 Relay Selection Guide 2.2
Application Examples 2.3

Invalid:
Edition 3 Feeder and Overcurrent Protection 2.4
Line Protection 2.5
Distance Protection 2.6
Line Differential Protection 2.7
Differential and Distance Protection 2.8
Circuit-Breaker Management 2.9
Overcurrent Protection as Backup Protection for Line Protec-

2.10
tion
Transformer Differential Protection 2.11
Motor Protection 2.12
Generator Protection 2.13
Busbar Protection 2.14
Bay Controllers 2.15
Fault Recorder 2.16
SIPROTEC 5 System 3
Functional Integration 3.1
Protection 3.2
Control 3.3
Automation 3.4
The products and systems described in this catalog are Monitoring 3.5
manufactured and sold according to a certified manage-
ment system (acc. to ISO 9001, ISO 14001 and BS Data Acquisition and Recording 3.6
OHSAS 18001).
Communication 3.7
Safety and Security Concept 3.8
SIPROTEC 5 ⋅ Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring ⋅ Catalog SIPROTEC 5.01 - Edition 4 3
Content
3.9 Test
3.10 Engineering
3.11 Hardware
4 Appendix
4.1 DIGSI 5 – Variants and system requirements
4.2 Spare parts and accessories
4.3 Connection diagrams
4.4 Dimension drawings
4.5 Grouping of measured values
4.6 Technical data
4 SIPROTEC 5 ⋅ Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring ⋅ Siemens SIPROTEC 5.01 - Edition 4
Content
Editorial
Editorial
SIPROTEC has been a recognized brand leader in digital protec-
tion and bay units on the energy market for decades The
Siemens high-performance SIPROTEC devices cover the entire
power spectrum and can be implemented in a wide range of
fields – from power generation to extra-high voltage transmis-
sion and distribution network applications.
"Smart automation for grids" is the Siemens response to the
present and future challenges to achieve a reliable and efficient
energy supply. SIPROTEC 5 is an active component of the
energy-efficient smart grid and an important building block in
the complex distributed energy supply systems and networks
solutions.
The next generation of SIPROTEC devices, SIPROTEC 5, is based
on the proven properties of SIPROTEC 4 to provide you with a
new, modern platform of hardware and software. This platform
offers an excellent solution to the challenges associated with
evolving grid structures and workflows. The quality, reliability
and proven functions of the former system have been
[E_CC_SIP5_GD_SS_LED, 1, --_--]
preserved. Innovative approaches including holistic workflow,
safety and security, and network stability monitoring (PMU func-
tionality) have been added.
The pioneering system architecture puts you in full control of
switchgear communications. A powerful, reliable communica-
tion infrastructure, combined with the flexible engineering
capabilities serves as the basis for handling distributed, decen-
tralized system structures. For you, "Designed to communicate"
in SIPROTEC 5 means: Communication is the central component
of the system architecture to provide the flexibility, safety and
security needed now and in future, automated distributed
network solutions.
With SIPROTEC 5, you are using a new generation of intelligent,
digital multifunction bay units. The new operating tool DIGSI 5
gives you the individual support you want – it handles your
specific workflow requirements, from system design to device
selection and testing, covering the entire device lifecycle. The
new tool offers cost savings over the entire lifecycle without
compromising safety or system availability.
[E_CC_SIP5_PAS_Gruppe, 1, --_--] With the new SIPROTEC 5 generation, you are well equipped to
meet the growing economic and availability demands imposed
on your networks. The philosophy of SIPROTEC 5 is reflected in
the modularity and flexibility of its hardware and software
components. Perfectly tailored fit – the custom fit for your
switchgear and requirements for the application and standardi-
zation of power automation.
Ingo Erkens
General Manager
Energy Management
Digital Grid
Automation Products
[E_CC_Close_up_Laptop_USB_ISO2, 1, --_--]
SIPROTEC 5 ⋅ Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring ⋅ Catalog SIPROTEC 5.01 - Edition 4 5
SIPROTEC 5
Introduction – Solutions for the power systems of today and the future
Solutions for the power systems of today and the future How can you benefit from this experience?
SIPROTEC has been established on the energy market for • Proven and complete applications
decades as a powerful and complete system family of digital
1.1
protection relays and bay units from Siemens. SIPROTEC protec- • Optimum cooperation of the components in the system
tion devices from Siemens can be used consistently throughout • Highest quality of hardware and functionality
all applications in medium and high voltage. With SIPROTEC,
operators have their plants firmly and safely under control, and • Excellent operator friendliness of devices and tools
have the basis to implement cost-effective solutions for all tasks
in modern, intelligent and "smart" power systems. Users can • Easy data exchange between applications
combine the units of the individual SIPROTEC device series at • Excellent consistency of product and system
will for solving a variety of tasks – SIPROTEC stands for
continuity, openness and future-proof design. • Reduced complexity due to simple operation
As the innovation driver and trendsetter in the field of power • Siemens as a reliable, worldwide operating party.
system protection for 100 years, Siemens helps you to design
your power systems in an intelligent, ecological, reliable and Information about the SIPROTEC 4 and SIPROTEC Compact
efficient way, and to operate them economically. As a pioneer, product families can be found in the related catalogs or at:
Siemens has decisively influenced the development of digital www.siemens.com/siprotec
power system protection (Figure 1.1/2). The first application
went into operation in Würzburg, Germany, in 1977. Consistent
integration of protection and control functions for all SIPROTEC
devices was the innovation step in the 90s. After the release of
the IEC 61850 communication standard in 2004, Siemens was
the first manufacturer worldwide to put a system with this
communication standard into operation. More than 500,000
Siemens devices with IEC 61850 are in operation throughout
the world.
Many users have approved SIPROTEC protection devices for use
in their power systems. The devices have also been certified by
independent test institutes and universities (KEMA, EPRI, LOYD,
UR Laboratories).
[SIP_Schutz_Gruppe, 1, --_--]
Figure 1.1/1 SIPROTEC family
1.1/1 SIPROTEC 5 ⋅ Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring ⋅ Siemens SIPROTEC 5.01 - Edition 4
SIPROTEC 5
Introduction – Solutions for the power systems of today and the future
1.1
[SIPROTEC5 Historie_dt, 1, en_US]
Figure 1.1/2 SIPROTEC – pioneer for generations
SIPROTEC 5 ⋅ Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring ⋅ Catalog SIPROTEC 5.01 - Edition 4 1.1/2
SIPROTEC 5
Introduction – The new benchmark for protection, automation and monitoring
The new benchmark for protection, automation and

monitoring
The SIPROTEC 5 series is based on long-term field experience of
1.1
the SIPROTEC device series and has specifically been designed
for the new requirements of modern power systems. For this
purpose, SIPROTEC 5 is equipped with extensive functionalities
and device types. With the integrated and consistent engi-
neering tool DIGSI 5, a solution has also been provided for the
increasingly complex processes, from design through engi-
neering up to test and operation.
Thanks to the high degree of modularity of hardware and soft-
ware, the functionality of the device types can be tailored to the
requested application and adjusted to the ever changing
requirements throughout the entire lifecycle.
In addition to the reliable and selective protection and the
complete automation function, SIPROTEC 5 offers an extensive
database for operating and monitoring modern power systems.
Synchrophasors (PMU), network quality data and extensive
equipment data are included in the increments of the function-
ality.
• Powerful protection functions ensure the safety of equipment
[SIP5_Gruppe, 1, --_--]
and staff Figure 1.1/3 SIPROTEC 5 – Modular hardware
• Individually configurable devices save money on the initial

investment and on spare parts storage, maintenance, expan-
sion and adaptation of your plant
• Arc protection, detection of transient ground faults, and
process bus can easily be integrated and retrofitted
• Purposeful and easy handling of devices and software thanks
to a user-friendly design
• Increased reliability and quality of the engineering process
• Consistent implementation of high safety and security mecha-
nisms
• Powerful communication components ensure safe and effec-
tive solutions
• Full compatibility between IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2
• Integrated switch for low-cost and redundant optical and elec-
trical Ethernet rings
• Redundancy protocols RSTP, PRP and HSR for maximum availa- [E_CC_SIP5_19Zoll_KomMod, 1, --_--]
bility Figure 1.1/4 SIPROTEC 5 - Modular process connection

• Efficient operating concepts due to flexible engineering of
IEC 61850 Edition 2
• Comprehensive database to monitor modern power systems
• Optimal smart automation platform for your power systems
based on integrated synchrophasor measurement units (PMU)
and Power Quality functions.
SIPROTEC 5
Innovation Highlights – Holistic workflow
With SIPROTEC 5, Siemens is writing another chapter in the Perfectly tailored fit
successful history of protection technology, representing the
Individually configurable devices provide you with cost-effective
5th digital generation and over 100 years of experience in
solutions that match your needs precisely throughout the entire
protection. SIPROTEC 5 represents the next logical step in this
lifecycle. SIPROTEC 5 sets new standards in cost savings and
development. With SIPROTEC 5, we have combined a function-
availability with its innovative modular and flexible hardware,
ality that has been proven and refined over years with a high- 1.2
software and communication. SIPROTEC 5 provides a perfectly
performance and flexible new platform, extended with trendset-
tailored fit for your switchgear and applications that is
ting innovations for present and future demands.
unequaled by any other system.
Holistic workflow
Perfectly tailored fit in SIPROTEC 5 means:
End-to-end engineering from system design to operation makes
your work easier throughout the entire process.
• Modular system design in hardware, functionality and
communication ensures the perfect fit to your needs
The highlight of SIPROTEC 5 is the greater-than-ever emphasis
on daily ease of operation. SIPROTEC 5 provides holistic support
• Functional integration of a wide range of applications, such as
protection, control, measurement, power quality or fault
along all the steps in the workflow, allowing for system view recording
management and configuration down to the details of indi-
vidual devices, saving time and cost without compromising • The same expansion and communication modules for all
quality (Figure 1.2/1). devices in the family
Holistic workflow in SIPROTEC 5 means: • Innovative terminal technology ensures easy assembly and
interchangeability at the highest possible degree of safety
• Integrated, consistent system and device engineering – from • Identical functions throughout the entire system family mean
the single line of the plant all the way to device parameteriza-
fewer training requirements and increased safety. Example:
tion
Identical automatic reclosing (AREC) for the line protection
• Simple, intuitive graphical linking of primary and secondary devices 7SD8, 7SA8, 7SL8
equipment
• Functions can be edited to be customized individually for your
• Supplied application templates for the most frequently used specific requirements
applications
• Innovations are made available to all devices at the same time
• Manufacturer-independent tool for easy system engineering and can easily be retrofitted as needed via libraries
• Open interfaces for seamless integration into your process Perfectly tailored fit in SIPROTEC 5 means for you: Individually
environment configurable devices save money on initial investment, spare
parts storage, maintenance, extension and adaptation of your
• Integrated tools for testing during engineering, commis- system.
sioning, and for simulating operational scenarios, such as
system incidents or switching operations.
[Innovationsschwerpunkte, 1, --_--]
Figure 1.2/2 SIPROTEC 5 - innovation highlights
Designed to communicate
The trendsetting system architecture places communication
firmly under your control. Powerful, flexible, and above all reli-
able communication is the prerequisite for distributed and
[Holistic workflow, 1, en_US] decentralized system topologies, such as Smart Grids. In the
system architecture of SIPROTEC 5, we have attached immense
Figure 1.2/1 End-to-end tools – from design to operation
importance to communication, and we have gone to excep-
tional lengths to ensure that you are ideally equipped for the
Holistic workflow in SIPROTEC 5 means for you: communication demands of today and the future.
An end-to-end tool from system design to operation – even Designed to communicate in SIPROTEC 5 means:
across department boundaries – saves time, assures data
security and transparency throughout the entire lifecycle of your • Adaptation to the topology of your communication structure
plant using parameters (ring, star, network, etc.)
• Scalable redundancy in hardware and software (protocols to
match your requirements)
SIPROTEC 5
Innovation Highlights – Safety and security inside
• Multiple communication channels to various higher-level • Encryption along the entire communication route between
systems DIGSI 5 and device, in accordance with the recommendations
of industry standards and best practices
• Pluggable and upgradeable communication modules
• Automatic logging of access attempts and safety-critical oper-
• Hardware modules decoupled from the currently used ations on the devices and systems.
1.2 communication protocol
Smart Automation for Grids
• 2 independent Ethernet protocols in one module
Climate change and dwindling fossil fuels are forcing a total re-
• Extensive routines for test connections, functions and oper- evaluation of the energy supply industry, from generation to
ating workflows distribution and consumption. This is having fundamental
• Expansion module for process-bus communication effects on the structure and operation of the power systems.
Designed to communicate in SIPROTEC 5 means for you: Smart automation, the intelligent power automation system, is
Communication as an integral component of the system archi- a major real-time component designed to preserve the stability
tecture provides you with the flexibility and safeguards you of these power systems and at the same time conserve energy
need in densely networked systems today and in the future. and reduce costs.
With SIPROTEC 5 and the unique spectrum of integrated func-
tionality, you have the optimum smart automation platform for
your smart power systems.
Smart Automation for Grids in SIPROTEC 5 means:
• Open, scalable architecture for IT integration and new func-
tions
• "Smart functions", for example for network operation, analysis
of faults or power quality (power system monitoring, power
control unit, fault location)
• Integrated automation with optimized logic blocks based on
the IEC 61131-3 standard
• High-precision acquisition and processing of process values
and transmission to other components in Smart Grid
[SIP5_Kommunikationsschnittst, 1, --_--]
• Protection, automation and monitoring in Smart Grid.
Figure 1.2/3 SIPROTEC 5 device with extensive communication inter-
faces SIPROTEC 5 devices have specifically been designed to meet the
requirements of the modern grid, secure the future and offer
the necessary automation platform.
Safety and security inside
The elements that connect the five mentioned innovation high-
Multilayer safety mechanisms in all links of the system safety
lights are IEC 61850 Edition 2 and its thoroughly designed, user-
chain provide you with the highest possible level of safety and
oriented implementation in SIPROTEC 5.
availability. Safety for humans and the plant, and maximum
availability, are the top priorities. As the plant systems become
more open and complex, conventional safety mechanisms are
no longer adequate. For this reason, a safety concept has been
integrated in the SIPROTEC 5 device architecture that is
designed to address and implement these multilayer aspects in a
holistic approach.
Safety and security inside in SIPROTEC 5 means:
• Proven functions to protect plants and personnel, continu-
ously developed over five generations.
• Long-lasting, rugged hardware (housings, modules, plugs)
and a sophisticated layout of the entire electronics for highest
resilience against voltage, EMC, climate and mechanical stress
• Sophisticated self-monitoring routines identify and report
device faults immediately and reliably [Systemkomponente, 1, --_--]
• Conformity with the stringent Cyber Security requirements in Figure 1.2/4 SIPROTEC 5 as a system component of the smart grid
accordance with the industry standards and regulations, such
as the BDEW Whitepaper and NERC CIP IEC 61850 – Simply usable
Siemens, the pioneer of IEC 61850, makes the full potential of
this global standard easily usable for you.
SIPROTEC 5
Innovation Highlights – IEC 61850 – Simply usable
The IEC 61850 standard is more than just a substation automa- "IEC 61850 – Simply usable" in SIPROTEC 5 means:
tion protocol. It comprehensively defines data types, functions
and communication in station networks. In Edition 2, the influ-
• A stand-alone IEC 61850 system configurator allows
IEC 61850 configuration of SIPROTEC 5, SIPROTEC 4 and
ence of the standard is extended to more domains and applica-
devices from other vendors
tions of the energy supply industry.
Siemens was actively involved in the process of standardization
• Full compatibility with Editions 1 and 2 1.2
from Edition 1 to Edition 2, and with the largest number of • Open interfaces to IEC 61850 guarantee manufacturer-inde-
completed installations in the world, our experience as a manu- pendent system configuration and interoperability
facturer in the field is unsurpassed. Jointly with key customers,
we designed its implementation in SIPROTEC 5, paying close
• Conversion of the complexity of the IEC 61850 data model
into your familiar user language
attention to interoperability, flexibility and compatibility
between Editions 1 and 2. • Flexible object modeling, degrees of freedom in object
addressing and flexible communication services ensure the
Besides the standard protocol IEC 61850, SIPROTEC 5 also highest possible degree of interoperability and effective
supports other protocols, such as IEC 60870-5-103, IEC exchange and expansion concepts
60870-5-104, DNP 3 (serial or TCP) or Modbus TCP.
• Handling optimization based on many projects and close
cooperation with customers from all fields of application
• Protection settings via IEC 61850
• Using several communication modules in Edition 2
The implementation of IEC 61850 Edition 2 unleashes the full
potential of this standard by optimally supporting your opera-
tional needs and simplifying handling.
[IEC61850 Symbol, 1, --_--]
SIPROTEC 5
Innovation Highlights – IEC 61850 – Simply usable
1.2
[IEC61850 Edition 2 Certificate Level A, 1, --_--]
Figure 1.2/5 First IEC 61850 certificate Edition 2 worldwide
www.siemens.com/siprotec
SIPROTEC 5 Devices and Fields of

Application
SIPROTEC 5 Devices and Fields of Application
Chapter
Device Types 2.1
Relay Selection Guide 2.2
2 Application Examples 2.3
Feeder and Overcurrent Protection 2.4
Line Protection 2.5
Distance Protection 2.6
Line Differential Protection 2.7
Differential and Distance Protection 2.8
Circuit-Breaker Management 2.9
Overcurrent Protection as Backup Protection 2.10

for Line Protection
Transformer Differential Protection 2.11
Motor Protection 2.12
Generator Protection 2.13
Busbar Protection 2.14
Bay Controllers 2.15
Fault Recorder 2.16
2/1 SIPROTEC 5 ⋅ Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring ⋅ Siemens SIPROTEC 5.01 - Edition 4
Device Types
2.1
[dw_sip5_anwendung, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.1/1 Fields of application of the SIPROTEC 5 devices
The graphic gives an overview of the utilization of SIPROTEC 5

devices in the power system. With renewable energy producers,
in particular, there is power infeed into the grid at all voltage
levels. Protected objects are busbars, overhead lines or cables,
and transformers. These objects have the corresponding protec-
tion device allocated.
Device Types
A short five-digit code permits easy identification of the
SIPROTEC 5 devices. The first digit (6 or 7) stands for digital
technology. The two letters describe the functionality, and the
last two digits identify typical properties. Further details can be
found in the catalog section of the related device description.
Definition of the device types by their designation
[dw_device_typ, 1, en_US]
Device Types
Main function Device types

Overcurrent protection
Overcurrent protection with PMU1) and control 7SJ82, 7SJ85
Line protection
Distance protection with PMU1) and control 7SA82, 7SA86, 7SA87
Line differential protection with PMU1) and control 7SD82, 7SD86, 7SD87
Combined line differential and distance protection with PMU1) and control 7SL82, 7SL86, 7SL87
Circuit-breaker management device with PMU1) and control 7VK87
2.1
Overcurrent protection for lines with PMU1) 7SJ86
Transformer protection
Transformer protection with PMU1), control and monitoring 7UT82, 7UT85, 7UT86, 7UT87
Motor protection
Motor protection with PMU1) and control 7SK82, 7SK85
Generator protection
Generator protection 7UM85
Busbar protection
Central busbar protection 7SS85
Bay controllers
Bay controllers for control/interlocking tasks with PMU1), monitoring and protec- 6MD85, 6MD86
tion functions1)
Fault recorders
Fault recorders, fault recorders with power quality recordings and fault 7KE85
recorders with PMU
Table 2.1/1 Available device types in the SIPROTEC 5 system

(1) optional
Relay Selection Guide
2.2
6MD85
6MD86
7SA82
7SA86
7SA87
7KE85
ANSI Functions Abbr.
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection functions for 1-pole tripping 1-pole ■
Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
21/21N Distance protection Z<, V/∠(V,I) ■ ■ ■
21T Impedance protection for transformers Z< ■ ■ ■
87L Line differential protection for 2 line ends ΔI
87L Line differential protection for 3 to 6 line ends (dependent ΔI
2.2 on Significant properties)
14 Locked rotor protection I> + n<
24 Overexcitation protection V/f
25 Synchrocheck, synchronizing function Sync ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
27 Undervoltage protection: "3-phase" or "pos.seq. V1" or V< ■ ■ ■
"universal Vx"
27 Undervoltage protection: "3-phase" or "universal Vx" V< ■ ■
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection Q>/V< ■ ■ ■
32, 37 Power protection active/reactive power P<>, Q<> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
32R Reverse power protection - P<
37 Undercurrent I< ■ ■ ■
38 Temperature Supervision θ> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
40 Underexcitation protection 1/xd
46 Negative sequence overcurrent protection I2> ■ ■
46 Unbalanced-load protection (thermal) I2² t>
46 Negative sequence overcurrent protection with direction I2>, ∠(V2,I2) ■ ■ ■
47 Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence system V2> ■ ■ ■
47 Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence- / positive- V2/V1>
sequence system
47 Overvoltage protection: "neg.-seq. V2" or "neg.-seq. V2 / V2>; V2/V1>
pos.-seq.V1"
48 Starting-time supervision for motors I²start
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
49 Thermal overload protection for RLC filter elements of a θ, I²t
capacitor bank
49H Hot spot calculation θh, I²t
49R Thermal overload protection, rotor θR
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
50HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent protection I>>> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault SOTF ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, 1-phase IN> ■ ■ ■
50Ns/ 51Ns Sensitive ground-current protection for systems with reso- INs> ■ ■ ■
nant or isolated neutral
Intermittent ground fault protection Iie> ■ ■ ■
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection for RLC filter elements of a capa- I>
citor bank
50GN Shaft current protection INs>
50/27 Inadvertent energization protection I>, V<reset
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole CBFP ■ ■ ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 1-/3-pole CBFP ■
50RS Circuit-breaker restrike protection CBRS ■ ■
50EF End fault protection
50L Load-jam protection I>L
51V Voltage dependent overcurrent protection t=f(I,V) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
7UM85
7UT82
7UT85
7UT86
7UT87
7SD82
7SD86
7SD87
7VK87
7SK82
7SK85
7SS85
7SL82
7SL86
7SL87
7SJ82
7SJ85
7SJ86
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2.2
■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■
■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
6MD85
6MD86
7SA82
7SA86
7SA87
7KE85
Peak overvoltage protection, 3-phase, for capacitors V> cap.
59, 59N Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "zero seq. V0" or V> ■ ■ ■
"pos.seq. V1" or "universal Vx"
59 Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "pos.seq. V1" or V> ■ ■
"universal Vx"
59N, 67Ns Stator ground fault protection (undirectional, directional) V0>, ∠(V0,I0)
27TH, 59TH, 59THD Stator ground fault protection with 3rd harmonics V03.H<, V03.H>;
ΔV03.H
2.2 60C Current-unbalance protection for capacitor banks Iunbal>
64S Stator ground fault protection 100% (20-Hz) RSG<
64F, frated Rotor ground fault protection (IRG>, fn) IRG>
64F, frated Rotor ground fault protection (RRG>, fn) RRG<
66 Restart inhibit for motors I²t
67 Directional overcurrent protection, phases I>, ∠(V,I) ■ ■ ■
67N Directional overcurrent protection for ground faults in IN>, ∠(V,I) ■ ■ ■
grounded systems
67N Directional overcurrent protection, ground IN>, ∠(V,I)
67Ns Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems with reso- ■ ■ ■
nant or isolated neutral incl. a) 3I0>, b) V0>, c) Cos-/
SinPhi, d) Transient fct., e) Phi(V,I), f) admittance
Directional intermittent ground fault protection Iie dir> ■ ■ ■
68 Power-swing blocking ΔZ/Δt ■ ■ ■
74TC Trip circuit supervision TCS ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
78 Out-of-step protection ΔZ/Δt ■ ■ ■
79 Automatic reclosing, 3-pole AR ■ ■ ■
79 Automatic reclosing, 1-/3-pole AR ■
81 Frequency protection: "f>" or "f<" or "df/dt" f>,<; df/dt>,< ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
85/21 Teleprotection for distance protection ■ ■ ■
85/27 Weak or no infeed: Echo and Tripping WI ■ ■ ■
85/67N Teleprotection for directional ground fault protection ■ ■ ■
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87B Busbar differential protection ΔI
Cross stabilization
Bay
87T Transformer differential protection ΔI
87T Transformer differential protection for phase angle regula- ΔI
ting transformer (single core)
87T Transformer differential protection for phase angle regula- ΔI
ting transformer (two core)
87T Transformer differential protection for special transfor- ΔI
mers
87T Node Differential protection (Node protection for Autotrans- ΔI Node
former)
87N T Restricted ground-fault protection ΔIN ■ ■ ■
87M Motor differential protection ΔI
87G Generator differential protection ΔI
87C Differential protection, capacitor bank ΔI
87V Voltage differential protection, capacitor bank ΔV
87L/ 87T Option for line differential protection: including power ΔI
transformer
Option for line differential protection:charging-current ΔI
compensation
Broken-wire detection for differential protection
7UM85
7UT82
7UT85
7UT86
7UT87
7SD82
7SD86
7SD87
7VK87
7SK82
7SK85
7SS85
7SL82
7SL86
7SL87
7SJ82
7SJ85
7SJ86
■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■
■
■ ■ 2.2
■
■
■
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
6MD85
6MD86
7SA82
7SA86
7SA87
7KE85
87 STUB STUB Differential protection (for one-and-half circuit- ■ ■
breaker applications)
90V Automatic voltage control for 2 winding transformer ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
90V Automatic voltage control for 3 winding transformer ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
90V Automatic voltage control for grid coupling transformer ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
FL Fault locator, single-ended measurement FL-one ■ ■ ■
PMU Synchrophasor measurement (1 PMU can be used for max. PMU ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
8 voltages and 8 currents)
2.2
AFD Arc-protection (only with plug-in module ARC-CD-3FO) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Measured values, standard ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, Avg ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Switching statistic counters ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Circuit breaker wear monitoring ΣIx, I²t, 2P ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC (Standard, Control) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Switching sequences function ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Inrush current detection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
External trip initiation ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Monitoring and supervision ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection interface, serial ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Circuit Breaker ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Disconnector ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
FSR Fast-scan recorder FSR ■
SSR Slow-scan recorder SSR ■
CR Continuous recorder CR ■
TR Trend recorder TR ■
PQR Power Quality recordings (functionalities) PQR ■
Sequence of events recorder SOE ■
ExTrFct Extended trigger functions ExTrFct ■
Region France: Overload protection for lines and cables ■ ■ ■
'PSL-PSC'
Region France: Overcurrent protection 'MAXI-L' ■ ■ ■
Region France: Net decoupling protection 'PDA' ■ ■ ■
Region France: Overload protection for transformers ■ ■ ■
Transformer Side 7UT85
7UM85
7UT82
7UT85
7UT86
7UT87
7SD82
7SD86
7SD87
7VK87
7SK82
7SK85
7SS85
7SL82
7SL86
7SL87
7SJ82
7SJ85
7SJ86
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2.2
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■
■
2.2
Application Examples – Medium voltage
Medium-voltage applications for all system grounding types Fast fault clearance in double-feed lines (closed) rings
2.3
[dw_Mittelspg-02, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/3 Fast fault clearance in double-feed lines (closed) rings
[dw_Mittelspg-01_Var3, 1, en_US] Properties

Figure 2.3/1 Medium-voltage applications for all system grounding • Directional DMT/IDMTL protection without grading times
types
• Fast fault clearance
Properties • Low-cost due to integrated protection interface
• Reliable detection of transients and static ground faults • Monitored data exchange
• Cost saving due to integrated transient function • Adaptable to different communication infrastructures.
• Directional and non-directional protection and control func- Central control of multiple feeders and dedicated protection
tions
• Acquisition and transmission of PMU variables possible
Protection and control of several feeders with one device
[dw_zentrale-Steuerung, 2, en_US]
[dw_Mittelspg-03, 2, en_US] Figure 2.3/4 Central control of multiple feeders and dedicated protec-
tion
Figure 2.3/2 Protection and control of several feeders with one device
Properties
Properties
• Protection for each bay
• Reduced investment with one device for several feeders
• Central control for multiple feeders
• Easy parameterization
• High availability because backup protection functions can be
• Shorter commissioning times activated in the controllers.
• Protecting up to 7 feeders with a single device reduces costs
Application Examples – Motor protection
Induction motor: protection and control Motor protection and easier differential protection
2.3
[dw_Motor-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/5 Induction motor: protection and control

Properties Figure 2.3/7 Protection and control of several feeders with one device
• Reduced investment due to protection and control in one

device Properties
• Thermal motor protection functions for reliable motor moni- • Differential protection function provides high responsivity and
toring short tripping time
• Thermal motor protection functions with direct connection of • Integration of the differential protection function in a sepa-
temperature sensors. rate function group reduces costs.
Motor protection with differential protection Differential motor protection with Korndorfer starter
Figure 2.3/6 Motor protection with differential protection
Properties
[dw_Motordiff-mit-starter, 3, en_US]
• Autonomous differential protection functions
Figure 2.3/8 Differential motor protection with Korndorfer starter
• High sensitivity and short tripping times due to differential
protection function.
• Separate acquisition and monitoring of the current trans-
formers.
Application Examples – Motor protection
Properties
• Capturing, monitoring and controlling all circuit breakers
• Differential protection function also available during startup.
2.3
Application Examples – Transformer protection
Two-winding transformer Autotransformer bank
2.3
[dw_Trafo1, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/9 Two-winding transformer

Properties Figure 2.3/11 Autotransformer bank

• Clear assignment of the functions to the primary element
• Reduced investment due to integration of the differential and
• Reduced investment. node protection function in one unit (87 and 87 Node)
• Simple parameterization • High sensitivity with single line to ground faults.
• Reduced wiring and faster commissioning. Protection and backup protection solution for 3-winding
transformers
Two-winding transformer with 2 incoming feeders (e.g.
double circuit-breaker switchgear) protection
Figure 2.3/10 Two-winding transformer with 2 incoming feeders (e.g.

double circuit-breaker switchgear) protection
Properties
• Separate acquisition, monitoring and control of all circuit
breakers
• High sensitivity with single line to ground-fault differential
protection
• Cost savings due to 87T and 87T N in one unit.
Figure 2.3/12 Protection and backup protection solution for 3-winding

transformers
Application Examples – Transformer protection
Properties
• Free design of the protection and backup protection concept
• Inclusion of line protection devices
• Increased availability.
Three-winding transformer with differential protection 87T
and distance protection 21
2.3
[dw_kat-three-wind_7ut86, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/13 Three-winding transformer with differential protection

87T and distance protection 21
Properties
• Integrated backup protection function for the power system
• Easy engineering
• Increased flexibility for different plant versions
Application Examples – Generator protection
Unit connection of a small-power generator Unit connection of a medium-power generator
2.3
[dw_appl-01_simplified, 1, en_US]
[dw_simplified_appl-03, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/14 Unit connection of a small-power generator
Figure 2.3/15 Unit connection of a medium-power generator
Properties
Properties
• All functions in one device keep investments low
• Basic hardware (1/3 x 19")
• Preconfigured with the "Generator basis" application template
• Preconfigured with the "Generator unit connection basis"
application template
• Stator ground-fault protection protects 100% of the stator
winding by evaluating the residual voltage via the funda-
mental component and the 3rd harmonic (59N, 27TH)
• Differential protection via generator transformer with func-
tion 87T
Unit connection of a generator of medium to high power Unit connection of a generator with auxiliary transformer
2.3
[dw_simplified_appl-04, 1, en_US]
[dw_simplified_appl-04_2, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/16 Unit connection of a generator of medium to high power Figure 2.3/17 Unit connection of a generator with auxiliary transformer
Properties Properties
• All functions in one device keep investments low • All functions in one device keep investments low
• Minimum hardware (2/3 x 19") • Minimum hardware (2/3 x 19")
• Preconfigured with the "Generator unit connection enhanced" • Modification of the "Generator unit connection enhanced"
application template application template
• Stand-alone differential protection for generator (87G) and • Stand-alone differential protection via generator (87G) and
generator transformer (87T) generator transformer (87T)
• Real 100% stator ground-fault protection by coupled 20-Hz • Implementation of the transformer differential protection as
voltage teed feeder differential protection
• Stator ground-fault protection possible at plant standstill • Real 100% stator ground-fault protection for coupling a 20-Hz
voltage
• Synchrocheck release by the device during manual synchroni-
zation • Stator ground-fault protection possible at standstill
• Redundancy by device doubling • Synchrocheck release by the device during manual synchroni-
zation
• Redundancy by device doubling
Busbar connection of a generator High-power generator with protection as sub-packet
2.3
[dw_simplified_appl-02_2, 2, en_US] [dw_simplified_appl-04_3, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/18 Busbar connection of a generator Figure 2.3/19 High-power generator with protection as sub-packet
Properties Properties
• All functions in one device keep investments low • The delivery includes generator, excitation and generator
protection of a plant in unit connection for a steam turbine
• Preconfigured with the "Generator busbar connection" appli-
cation template • Minimum hardware (2/3 x 19")
• Stand-alone differential protection for the generator (87G) • Modification of the "Generator unit connection enhanced"
application template
• Directional stator ground-fault protection (67Ns)
• Sensitive reverse-power protection by connection to a sepa-
• Redundancy by device doubling rate instrument transformer
• Separate protection for the excitation transformer
• Synchrocheck release by the device during manual synchroni-
zation
• Redundancy by device doubling
Application Examples – Line protection
Protection and control separate Distance protection of two parallel lines with one device
[dw_LS-parallel, 2, en_US]
2.3
Figure 2.3/22 Distance protection of two parallel lines with one device
Properties
• Low-cost due to protection of both lines in one device
• Stable due to consideration of the influences of the parallel
[dw_LS-getrennt, 1, en_US] line for the distance protection function.
Figure 2.3/20 Protection and control separate Self-restoring multi-end configurations
Properties
• Clear assignment of protection and control in separate devices
• Less external components by detection and selection of
busbar voltage in the device
• High reliability due to backup protection functions in the
6MD8 bay controller
• High availability due to emergency control in the 7SL8 protec-
tion device.
Low-cost protection and device redundancy
[dw_Diff-Schutz-Ringschaltung, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/23 Self-restoring multi-end configurations
Properties
• High availability because differential protection is also active
[dw_LS-guenstige-variante, 1, en_US]
when a communication link fails
Figure 2.3/21 Low-cost protection and device redundancy • Self-restoring due to automatic switchover from ring to chain
topology
Properties • High ease of maintenance because single line ends can be
taken out of the differential protection configuration for
• High availability due to protection and device redundancy commissioning and servicing.
• Low-cost because only 2 devices required for 2 lines
• Reliable because of parallel processing of the protection func-
tions in the devices.
Application Examples – Line protection
Impedance protection for the low-voltage side of a

transformer
2.3
[dw_z-prot-transf-lv-side_7sa86_090115, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/24 Impedance protection
Properties
• The impedance protection for transformers (ANSI 21T)
permits effective backup protection with zones that reach in
the transformer
• A second impedance protection device can be used in the
same function group to protect the busbar at the low-voltage
side with reverse interlocking (85-21 RI)
• The impedance protection also provides the imperative
backup protection for the medium voltage feeders with highly
sensitive defect detection and stability under a heavy load.
Dual breaker applications
[dw_dual-breaker-applications_7sa86_090115, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/25 Dual Breaker Applications
Properties
• With separate measurement of the CT current from both
breakers a stub protection is possible
• Separate measurement of CT currents improves stability
during heavy through fault current flowing from one bus to
the other when both breakers are closed.
Application Examples – Breaker-and-a-half layout
Modular and distributed protection and control solution Low-cost device and protective redundancy in breaker-and-
a-half arrangements
2.3
[dw_kostenguenstige-geraete, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/27 Low-cost device and protective redundancy in breaker-

and-a-half arrangements
[dw_ein-einhalb-LS, 1, en_US] Properties

Figure 2.3/26 Modular and distributed protection and control solution • Unambiguous allocation of the main protection function (line
differential protection 87) to one line in one device (Main 1)
Properties
• The distance-protection function (21) is implemented in the
• Clarity due to clear assignment of protection and control protection device of the other line by a second "line" function
group
• High availability due to protection redundancy (Main 1 and
Main 2) • High availability and safety by device and protection redun-
dancy
• Simple reliable central control of the entire diameter
• Low costs due to protecting and controlling a complete diam-
• Reliable due to emergency control in every line in the protec- eter with only two devices.
tion device
• Reduced wiring due to integrated voltage selection
• System-wide diameter bus based on IEC 61850
– electrically isolated data exchange
– reduced wiring
– easy expansion.
Application Examples – Capacitor banks
Protection of a capacitor bank in an H connection Properties

• Optimum protection of complex banks and filter circuits with
flexible hardware and a flexible function design
• Low costs due to the integration of all necessary functions in
one device for up to seven 3-phase measuring points
• Generation of current sum and current difference at the
current interface of the protection function group "3-phase
V/I"
• Detection of current and voltage signals up to the 50th
harmonic with a high accuracy for protection and operational
measured values.
2.3
[dw_CapBank_SLE_vereinfacht, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/28 Protection of a capacitor bank in an H connection
Properties
• Precisely adapted due to dedicated function group and appli-
cation-specific protection function, such as peak overvoltage
protection (ANSI 59C) and sensitive currentunbalance protec-
tion (ANSI 60C)
• Low cost due to integration of all required functions into one
device.
Protection of an MSCDN capacitor bank(MSCDN = Mechani-
cally Switched Circuit breaker with Damping Network)
[dw_mscdn-app-temp_7sj85_090115, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/29 Protection of an MSCDN capacitor bank
Application Examples – Busbar protection
Double busbar feeder with busbar coupler
2.3
[dw_Verbindungen-Feld-Koppl, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/30 Double busbar feeder with busbar coupler
Properties
• Central busbar protection
• Summary of all primary components of a bay in the "Bay
Proxy"
• One device for up to 20 measuring points
• Flexible adaptation to the topology (up to 4 busbar sections
and 4 busbar couplers configurable)
• Integrated disconnector image
• Comfortable graphical project engineering with DIGSI 5.
Application Examples – Power system monitoring and PMU
Grid monitoring and PMU
2.3
[dw_netzmonitor-mit-pmu, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/31 Principle of distributed phasor measurement
Properties
• Each SIPROTEC 5 device can be equipped or retrofi tted with
the PMU function
• Online and offline evaluation of the PMU data in the moni-
toring system, SIGUARD PDP.
Feeder and Overcurrent Protection

Feeder and Overcurrent Protection – SIPROTEC 7SJ82, 7SJ85
2.4
[dw_7SJ_anwendung, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7SJ82, 7SJ85 Essential differentiating characteristics

The main protection functions of the SIPROTEC 5 overcurrent 7SJ82 Different hardware quantity structures for binary inputs and
outputs are available in the 1/3 base module
protection devices are based on the overcurrent protection prin-
ciple. Although they primarily protect feeders and lines in the 7SJ85 Flexible configuration of the hardware quantity structure for
analog inputs, binary inputs and outputs, measuring trans-
distribution system, they can also be used in a high-voltage
ducers and communication due to expandability with 1/6
power system without any problems. The hardware quantity expansion modules
structure, which can flexibly be extended, permits several
feeders to be protected with one device. Due to the large
number of available functions and the great flexibility, the
device is suitable for a multitude of additional protection and
monitoring applications. Specifically for utilization as backup
and emergency protection for line protection, we recommend
using the SIPROTEC 7SJ86. The large number of automatic func-
tions permits the device to be used in all fields of energy supply.
The devices contain all important auxiliary functions that are
necessary today for safe network operation. This includes func-
tions for protection, control, measurement and monitoring. The
large number of communication interfaces and communication
protocols satisfies the requirements of communication-based
selective protection, as well as automated operation.
Commissioning and maintenance work can be completed safely,
quickly and thus cost-effectively with high-performance test
functions. Their modular structure permits SIPROTEC 5 devices
always to be adapted flexibly to the individual requirements.
Features
The difference between the two device models SIPROTEC 7SJ82
and SIPROTEC 7SJ85 is in the configurability of their hardware
quantity structure.
Feeder and Overcurrent Protection – SIPROTEC 7SJ82
Description
The SIPROTEC 7SJ82 overcurrent protection has specifically been
designed for a cost-effective and compact protection of feeders
and lines in medium-voltage and high-voltage systems. With its
flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC
7SJ82 offers future-oriented system solutions with high invest-
ment security and low operating costs.
Main function Feeder and overcurrent protection for all

voltage levels
Inputs and outputs 4 current transformers, 4 voltage transformers
(optional), 11 or 23 binary inputs, 9 or
16 binary outputs, or
8 current transformers, 7 binary inputs,
7 binary outputs
Hardware flexibility Different hardware quantity structures for 2.4
binary inputs and outputs are available in the [SIP5_7xx82_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
1/3 base module. Adding 1/6 expansion
modules is not possible; available with large or Figure 2.4/2 SIPROTEC 7SJ82
small display.
Housing width 1/3 × 19" • Protection functions for capacitor banks, such as overcurrent,
overload, current unbalance, peak overvoltage, or differential
Benefits protection
• Compact and low-cost overcurrent protection • Reactive power-undervoltage protection (QU protection)
• Safety due to powerful protection functions • Control, synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection,
circuit-breaker failure protection
• Data security and transparency over the entire lifecycle of the • Circuit-breaker failure protection
plant save time and money
• Purposeful and easy handling of devices and software thanks • Circuit-breaker reignition monitoring
• Graphical logic editor to create powerful automation func-
• Increased reliability and quality of the engineering process tions in the device
• Consistent implementation of high safety and security mecha- • Recognition of current and voltage signals up to the 50th
nisms harmonic with high accuracy for selected protection functions
(such as peak overvoltage protection for capacitors) and
• Powerful communication components ensure safe and effec- operational measured values
tive solutions
• Single line representation in small or large display
• Integrated electrical Ethernet RJ45 for DIGSI 5 and IEC 61850
• High investment security and low operating costs due to (reporting and GOOSE)
future-oriented system solution.
Functions
• Two optional pluggable communication modules, usable for
different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850,
DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus TCP, DNP3 (serial
required. and TCP))
• Directional and non-directional overcurrent protection with • Serial protection data communication via optical fibers, two-
additional functions wire connections and communication networks (IEEE C37.94,
and others), including automatic switchover between ring
• Optimized tripping times due to directional comparison and and chain topology.
protection data communication
• Detection of static, intermittent and transient ground faults • Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
(fleeting contact function) in arc-suppression-coil-ground and • Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White-
isolated power systems paper requirements
• Arc protection • Whitepaper Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) for synchro-
phasor measured values and IEEE C37.118 protocol
• Overvoltage and undervoltage protection
• Time synchronization with IEEE 1588
• Frequency protection and frequency change protection for
load shedding applications • Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s
at 8 kHz or 320 s at 2 kHz)
• Power protection, configurable as active or reactive power
protection • Auxiliary functions for easy tests and commissioning.
Applications Directional overcurrent protection – grounded system

• Detection and selective 3-pole tripping of short circuits in • Overcurrent protection (directional and non-directional) for
electrical equipment of star networks, lines with infeed at one phases and ground
or two ends, parallel lines and open or closed ring systems of
all voltage levels
• Transformer inrush current detection
• Detection of ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil- • Measuring voltage failure supervision.
ground power systems in star, ring, or meshed arrangement Directional overcurrent protection – resonant-grounded /
• Backup protection for differential protection devices of all isolated system
kind for lines, transformers, generators, motors, and busbars
• Overcurrent protection (directional and non-directional) for
• Protection and monitoring of simple capacitor banks phases
• Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) • Sensitive directional ground fault detection for static ground
faults
• Reverse-power protection • Sensitive directional ground fault detection for transient and
2.4 • Load shedding applications static ground faults („transient“ function)
• Automatic switchover • Transformer inrush current detection

Application templates • Measuring voltage failure supervision.
Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for standard appli- Capacitor bank: H connection
cations. They comprise all basic configurations and default • Overcurrent protection for phase and ground
settings.
The following application templates are available:
• Current-unbalance protection for capacitor banks
Non-directional overcurrent protection • Peak overvoltage protection
• Overcurrent protection (non-directional) for phases and • Overload protection
ground
• Undercurrent protection.
• Transformer inrush current detection
[dw_DwDOCP07, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.4/3 Application example: Principle of directional comparison protection for power line runs with infeed at two ends
Application examples tives of the protection interface are IEC 61850 GOOSE or, via
Directional comparison protection via protection interface pilot wires for signal transfer, with an auxiliary voltage loop.
for power line runs with infeed at two ends Figure 2.4/4 shows the functional scope and the basic configu-
Using the direction determination of the directional overcurrent ration of a SIPROTEC 7SJ82 for this application. The "Directional
protection, you can implement directional comparison protec- V /inverse time-overcurrent protection – grounded system"
tion for power line runs with infeed at two ends. Directional application template is used as the basis. In addition, the device
comparison protection is used for the selective isolation of a must obviously be equipped with a communication module for
faulty line section (subsections of closed rings, for example). protection communication. The protection communication func-
Sections are isolated in fast time, that is, they do not suffer the tion group is created automatically when the module is config-
disadvantage of long grading times. This technique requires that ured. The "Communication mapping" editor in DIGSI 5 is used to
directional information can be exchanged between the indi- determine the information that must be transferred to the oppo-
vidual protection stations. This information exchange can, for site end and received from the opposite end. The received infor-
example, be implemented via a protection interface. Alterna- mation can directly be combined with the binary input signals of
the directional overcurrent protection. Additional logic with a

CFC chart is not necessary.
2.4
[dw_7SJ82_mit WirkKom, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.4/4 Application example: Directional comparison protection for power line runs with infeed at two ends and protection communication
Functions, application templates
ANSI Functions Abbr. Template
Available
1 2 3 4 5
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

24 Overexcitation protection V/f ■
25 Synchrocheck, synchronizing function Sync ■
27 Undervoltage protection: "3-phase" or "pos.seq. V< ■
V1" or "universal Vx"
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protec- Q>/V< ■
tion
32, 37 Power protection active/reactive power P<>, Q<> ■
32R Reverse power protection - P< ■
37 Undercurrent I< ■ ■
2.4 38 Temperature Supervision θ> ■
46 Unbalanced-load protection (thermal) I2² t> ■
46 Negative sequence overcurrent protection with I2>, ∠(V2,I2) ■
direction
47 Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence V2> ■
system
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■ ■
49 Thermal overload protection for RLC filter θ, I²t ■
elements of a capacitor bank
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
50HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent protection I>>> ■
Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault SOTF ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, 1-phase IN> ■
50Ns/ 51Ns Sensitive ground-current protection for systems INs> ■
with resonant or isolated neutral
Intermittent ground fault protection Iie> ■
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection for RLC filter elements of a I> ■
capacitor bank
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole CBFP ■
50RS Circuit-breaker restrike protection CBRS ■
51V Voltage dependent overcurrent protection t=f(I,V) ■
Peak overvoltage protection, 3-phase, for capaci- V> cap. ■ ■
tors
59, 59N Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "zero seq. V> ■
V0" or "pos.seq. V1" or "universal Vx"
60C Current-unbalance protection for capacitor banks Iunbal> ■ ■
67N Directional overcurrent protection, ground IN>, ∠(V,I) ■ ■
67Ns Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems ■ ■
with resonant or isolated neutral incl. a) 3I0>, b)
V0>, c) Cos-/SinPhi, d) Transient fct., e) Phi(V,I), f)
admittance
Directional intermittent ground fault protection Iie dir> ■
74TC Trip circuit supervision TCS ■
79 Automatic reclosing, 3-pole AR ■
81 Frequency protection: "f>" or "f<" or "df/dt" f>,<; df/dt>,< ■
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87N T Restricted ground-fault protection ΔIN ■
87C Differential protection, capacitor bank ΔI ■
Available
1 2 3 4 5
90V Automatic voltage control for 2 winding trans- ■

former
FL Fault locator, single-ended measurement FL-one ■
PMU Synchrophasor measurement (1 PMU can be used PMU ■
for max. 8 voltages and 8 currents)
AFD Arc-protection (only with plug-in module ARC- ■
CD-3FO)
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, Avg ■
Switching statistic counters ■
Circuit breaker wear monitoring ΣIx, I²t, 2P ■
CFC (Standard, Control) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2.4
CFC arithmetic ■
Switching sequences function ■
External trip initiation ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection interface, serial ■
Circuit Breaker ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Function-points class: 0 0 30 50 100
The configuration and function points for your application can be ascertained in the SIPROTEC 5 order configurator under: www.siemens.com/siprotec
Table 2.4/1 SIPROTEC 7SJ82 - Functions and application templates

1 Non-directional OC (4*I)
2 Non-directional OC (4*I, 4*V)
3 Directional OC - grounded system
4 Directional OC - resonant-grounded / isol. system
5 Capacitor bank: H-bridge
Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SJ82

U1 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I
Housing width 1/3 x 19”
11 binary inputs,
9 binary outputs (1 life contact, 8 standard)
4 current transformer inputs
Contains the modules: Base module with PS101 and IO101
U2 1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I
23 binary inputs,
16 binary outputs (1 life contact, 15 standard),
2.4 4 current transformer inputs

Contains the modules: Base module with PS101, IO101 and IO110
U3 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V
11 binary inputs,
4 voltage transformer inputs
U4 1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V
23 binary inputs,
4 current transformer inputs,
Contains the modules: Base module with PS101, IO102 and IO110
U5 1/3, 7 BI, 7 BO, 8 I
7 binary inputs,
Table 2.4/2 Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SJ82
The technical data of the devices can be found in the manual

Description
The SIPROTEC 7SJ85 overcurrent protection has been designed
specifically for the protection of feeders and lines. Due to its
modular structure and flexibility and the powerful engineering
tool DIGSI 5, SIPROTEC 7SJ85 offers future-oriented system solu-
tions with high investment security and low operating costs.
Main function Feeder and overcurrent protection for all

voltage levels
Inputs and outputs 5 predefined standard variants with 4 current
transformers, 4 voltage transformers, 11 to
59 binary inputs, 9 to 33 binary outputs
Hardware flexibility I/O quantity structure that can flexibly be
adapted and expanded within the scope of the
modular SIPROTEC 5 system. 1/6 expansion
modules can be added, available with large,
small or without display 2.4
Housing width 1/3 × 19" to 2/1 × 19"
[SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
Functions Figure 2.4/5 SIPROTEC 7SJ85

DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as
required. • Two optional pluggable communication modules, usable for
• Directional and non-directional overcurrent protection with IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus TCP, DNP3 (serial
additional functions
and TCP))
• Protection of up to 9 feeders with up to 40 analog inputs
• Serial protection data communication via optical fibers, two-
• Optimized tripping times due to directional comparison and wire connections and communication networks (IEEE C37.94,
protection data communication and others), including automatic switchover between ring
and chain topology.
• Detection of static and transient ground faults (fleeting
contact function) in arc-suppression-coil-ground and isolated • Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
power systems
• Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White-
• Arc protection paper requirements
• Overvoltage and undervoltage protection • Phasor measurement unit (PMU) for synchrophasor measured
values and IEEE C37.118 protocol
protection • Time synchronization with IEEE 1588
• Frequency protection and frequency change protection for • Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s
load shedding applications at 8 kHz or 320 s at 2 kHz)
• Protection functions for capacitor banks, such as overcurrent, • Auxiliary functions for easy tests and commissioning.
overload, current unbalance, peak overvoltage, or differential
protection Applications
• Reactive power-undervoltage protection (QU protection) • Detection and selective 3-pole tripping of short circuits in
electrical equipment of star networks, lines with infeed at one
• Recognition of current and voltage signals up to the 50th or two ends, parallel lines and open or closed ring systems of
harmonic with high accuracy for selected protection functions all voltage levels
(such as peak overvoltage protection for capacitors) and
operational measured values.
• Backup protection for differential protection devices of all
• Control, synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection • Protection and monitoring of capacitor banks
• Circuit-breaker failure protection • Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
• Circuit-breaker reignition monitoring • Reverse-power protection
• Graphical logic editor to create powerful automation func- • Load shedding applications
tions in the device
• Single line representation in small or large display • Automatic switchover
(reporting and GOOSE)
Application templates • Peak overvoltage protection

Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applica- • Overload protection
tions. They comprise all basic configurations and default
settings. • Undercurrent protection.
The following application templates are available: Capacitor bank: MSCDN
Non-directional overcurrent protection • Overcurrent protection for phase and ground
• Overcurrent protection (non-directional) for phases and • Current-unbalance protection for capacitor banks
ground
• Transformer inrush current detection • Differential protection for capacitor
Directional overcurrent protection – grounded system • Peak overvoltage protection
• Overcurrent protection (directional and non-directional) for • Overload protection
phases and ground
• Undercurrent protection.
2.4 • Transformer inrush current detection
Application examples
• Measuring voltage failure supervision Direction comparison protection via protection data inter-
Directional overcurrent protection – resonant-grounded / face for lines supplied from two sides
isolated system Direction comparison protection can be realized with the help of
• Overcurrent protection (directional and non-directional) for direction determination of the directional overcurrent protection
phases in the case of lines which are supplied from two sides. The direc-
tion comparison protection is designed to selectively isolate a
• Sensitive directional ground fault detection for static ground faulty line section (e.g., sections of rings) in high speed, i.e. no
faults
long graded times will slow down the tripping process. The
• Sensitive directional ground fault detection for transient and precondition of this procedure is that direction information can
static ground faults („transient“ function) be exchanged between the individual protective relays. This
• Transformer inrush current detection information exchange can be realized via an protection data
interface, for instance. Alternatives to the protection data inter-
• Measuring voltage failure supervision. face are IEC 61850 GOOSE or pilot wires for signal transmission
with an additional voltage loop.
Capacitor bank: H connection + 1 x RLC
• Time-overcurrent protection for phases and ground
• Capacitor bank unbalance protection
[dw_DwDOCP07, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.4/6 Application example: Principle of the direction comparison protection of doubly fed line sections
The SIPROTEC 7SJ82 application example(Figure 2.4/4) shows

the functions and the basic configuration for this application.
2.4
[dw_7SJ85_mit DoppelSS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.4/7 Application example: Overcurrent protection 7SJ85 at a double busbar feeder
Protection and control at a double busbar function library. Operational measured values and energy
metered values are calculated in the "Voltage-current 3ph" func-
In the Figure 2.4/7, a double busbar feeder is protected and
tion group. They are available for output on the display, transfer
additionally controlled by a SIPROTEC 7SJ85. This example is
to the substation automation technology, and processing in the
based on the application template "Directional V/inverse time-
CFC. A switching sequence stored in the CFC that is activated via
overcurrent protection - grounded power system". In addition to
a function key starts an automatically executing busbar switch-
the application template, the functions Circuit-breaker failure
over process.
protection, Automatic reclosing and Synchrocheck in the circuit-
breaker function group are needed and configured. These func-
tions can easily be added via "drag and drop" from the DIGSI 5
Protection of a capacitor bank • Overload protection (ANSI 49) for protection of the bank from
thermal overload
Figure 2.4/8 shows protection of a capacitor bank in an H
connection. For this application, the device has special functions • Very sensitive current-unbalance protection (ANSI 60C) for
for the protection of capacitor banks. Thanks to the modularity detecting the failure of a single capacitor element, as a moni-
and performance of SIPROTEC 5, the complete application can toring and protection function; manual and automatic
be protected by one device. comparison in the bay. The automatic comparison permits
consideration of dynamic unbalances, e.g. caused by temper-
Properties:
ature influences
• Short-circuit protection (ANSI 50, 50N) for phase and ground • Undercurrent protection (ANSI 37) for tripping the local circuit
faults
breaker when the incoming feeder is disconnected; and there-
• Peak voltage protection (ANSI 59C), for protection of the fore protection from hazardous energization of the nondis-
dielectric of the bank from harmful peak voltages, in partic- charged bank, e.g. in phase opposition
ular, caused by harmonics; consideration of harmonics up to
the 50th order, the peak voltage being calculated from the • Circuit-breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF).
current by integration
2.4
[dw_CapBank_SLE_Normal, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.4/8 Protection of a capacitor bank in H connection
2.4
[dw_CapBank_MSCDN, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.4/9 Application example: MSCDN capacitor bank
Protection of an MSCDN capacitor bank (MSCDN = Mechani- Properties:

cally Switched Capacitor with Damping Network)
• Capturing up to seven 3-phase measuring points
In Figure 2.4/9, the SIPROTEC 7SJ85 protects the capacitor bank
in H connection and additionally the associated damping • Short-circuit protection (ANSI 50, 50N) for phase and ground
network. Thanks to the modular structure and performance of faults
SIPROTEC 5, the complete application can be protected with one • Peak overvoltage protection (ANSI 59C) to protect the dielec-
single device. tric medium of the bank against dangerous peak overvoltage,
in particular caused by the harmonic components with consid-
eration of up to the 50th harmonic component. The peak
voltage is calculated by integration of the current.
• Overload protection (ANSI 49) to protect the bank against

thermal overload
• Very sensitive current-unbalance protection (ANSI 60C) to
detect the outage of individual capacitor elements as moni-
toring and protection function. Manual and automatic adjust-
ment in the bay. Automatic adjustment permits dynamic
unbalances (caused by temperature influence, for example) to
be taken into account
• Differential protection (87C) over the entire capacitor bank to
protect against short circuits inside the entire installation
• Overload and overcurrent protection via the two resistors and
a simple differential protection that is to detect an outage of
one of the two resistors. For this purpose, current sum and
current difference are determined with the current measuring
points in the R branches, at the inputs of the V/I 3-phase func-
2.4 tion groups
• Undercurrent protection (ANSI 37) to trip the local circuit
breaker when the infeed is disconnected providing protection
against hazardous voltage at the non-discharged bank, for
example, in phase opposition
• Circuit-breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF).
Available
1 2 3 4 5 6
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
tion
37 Undercurrent I< ■ ■ ■ 2.4
38 Temperature Supervision θ> ■
46 Negative sequence overcurrent protection I2> ■ ■ ■
direction
system
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■ ■ ■
49 Thermal overload protection for RLC filter θ, I²t ■ ■
elements of a capacitor bank
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection for RLC filter elements of a I> ■
capacitor bank
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole CBFP ■ ■
Peak overvoltage protection, 3-phase, for capaci- V> cap. ■ ■ ■
tors
59, 59N Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "zero seq. V> ■ ■
60C Current-unbalance protection for capacitor banks Iunbal> ■ ■ ■
admittance
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87C Differential protection, capacitor bank ΔI ■ ■
Available
1 2 3 4 5 6
87V Voltage differential protection, capacitor bank ΔV ■

former
former
90V Automatic voltage control for grid coupling trans- ■
former
CD-3FO)
2.4
Measured values, standard ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC (Standard, Control) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Monitoring and supervision ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Circuit Breaker ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Function-points class: 0 0 30 50 100 300

1 Non-directional OC (4*I)
4 Directional OC - resonant-grounded / isol. system
5 Capacitor bank: H-bridge + 1*RLC
6 Capacitor bank: MSCDN
Standard variants

S1 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V
11 binary inputs,
9 binary outputs (1 life contact, 2 standard, 6 fast),
S2 1/2, 17 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V
17 binary inputs,
16 binary outputs (1 life contact, 9 standard, 6 fast), 2.4
Expansion modules IO206
S3 1/2, 27 BI, 17 BO, 4 I, 4 V
27 binary inputs,
S4 2/3, 43 BI, 25 BO, 4 I, 4 V
43 binary inputs,
Expansion modules 2x IO207
S5 5/6, 59 BI, 33 BO, 4 I, 4 V
59 binary inputs,
Expansion modules 3x IO207

2.4
Line Protection
Line Protection – SIPROTEC 7SA8, 7SD8, 7SL8, 7VK8, 7SJ86
2.5
[dw_LineProt_anwendung, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7SA8, 7SD8, 7SL8, 7VK8, 7SJ86 Definition of the device types by their designation
SIPROTEC 5 line protection devices protect overhead lines and
cables on all voltage levels with highest selectivity possible. The
large number of protective and automatic functions available
permits their utilization in all areas of line protection. The
devices contain all important auxiliary functions that are neces-
sary today for safe network operation. This includes control,
measurement and monitoring functions. The large number of
communication interfaces and communication protocols satis-
fies the requirements of communication-based selective protec-
7 XX YY
tion and of automated operation. Commissioning and mainte-
nance work can be completed safely, quickly and thus cost- Main protection
effectively with high-performance test functions. Their modular 7 SA Distance protection
structure permits SIPROTEC 5 line protection devices always to 7 SD Differential protection
be adapted flexibly to the individual requirements. 7 SL Distance and differential protection
Features 7 SJ Overcurrent protection
7 VK Circuit-breaker management
The device types are defined by their main protection functions
Essential differentiating characteristics
and by essential differentiating characteristics. For devices with
flexible configurability of the hardware quantity structure, you 7 82 • exclusively 3-pole tripping
can select various standard variants when ordering. Expanda- • two hardware variants available
bility through supplemental modules allows for individual adap- 7 86 • exclusively 3-pole tripping
tation to specific applications such as more analog channels for • hardware quantity structure flexibly configu-
breaker-and-a-half technology, or more binary contacts (see rable
"Overview of the standard variants"). 7 87 • 1-pole and 3-pole tripping
• hardware quantity structure flexibly configu-
rable
Type identification 7SA82 7SA86 7SA87 7SD82 7SD86 7SD87 7SL82 7SL86 7SL87 7VK87 7SJ86
Distance protection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Differential protection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Overcurrent protection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
for lines
Circuit-breaker manage- ■
ment
3-pole trip command ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
1-pole/3-pole trip ■ ■ ■ ■
command
Flexibly configurable ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
hardware
Table 2.5/1 Essential differentiating characteristics of the main protection types
2.5
2.5
Distance Protection – SIPROTEC 7SA82
Description
The SIPROTEC 7SA82 distance protection has been designed
particularly for the cost-optimized and compact protection of
lines in medium-voltage and high-voltage systems. With its flexi-
bility and the powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC
7SA82 offers future-oriented system solutions with high invest-
Main function Distance protection for medium-voltage and

high voltage applications
Tripping 3-pole, minimum tripping time: 19 ms
16 binary outputs
Hardware flexibility Different hardware quantity structures for
binary inputs and outputs are available in the
modules is not possible; available with large or
small display. [SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
Housing width 1/3 x 19"

Figure 2.6/1 SIPROTEC 7SA82 2.6
Benefits
• Compact and low-cost distance protection protection
• Safety due to powerful protection functions • Reactive power-undervoltage protection (QU protection)
• Data security and transparency over the entire lifecycle of the • Recognition of current and voltage signals up to the 50th
harmonic with a high accuracy for selected protection func-
tions (such as thermal overload protection) and operational
• Purposeful and easy handling of devices and software thanks measured values
• Control, synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection
• Consistent implementation of high safety and security mecha- tions in the device
nisms
• Powerful communication components ensure safe and effec-
tive solutions • Integrated electrical Ethernet RJ45 for DIGSI and IEC 61850
• Two optional pluggable communication modules, usable for
• High investment security and low operating costs due to different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850,
future-oriented system solution IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus TCP, DNP3 (serial
Functions and TCP))
DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as • Serial protection data communication via optical fibers, two-
required. wire connections and communication networks (IEEE C37.94,
• Minimum tripping time: 19 ms and chain topology.
• 6 independent measuring loops (6-system distance protec- • Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
tion)
• Several distance-protection functions can be selected: Classic, paper requirements
reactance method (RMD), impedance protection for trans-
formers • Phasor measurement unit (PMU) for synchrophasor measured
• Directional backup protection and various additional functions
• Time synchronization with IEEE 1588
• Detection of static, intermittent and transient ground faults
(fleeting contact function) in arc-suppression-coil-ground and • Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s
isolated power systems at 8 kHz or 320 s at 2 kHz)
• Adaptive power-swing blocking • Auxiliary functions for easy tests and commissioning.
• Detection of current-transformer saturation for fast tripping at
high accuracy
• Arc protection
Applications Application templates

• Detection and selective 3-pole tripping of short circuits in Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applica-
electrical equipment of star networks, lines with infeed at one tions. They comprise all basic configurations and default
or two ends, parallel lines and open or closed ring systems of settings.
all voltage levels
• Detection of ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil- • Basic
ground power systems in star, ring, or meshed arrangement
• Backup protection for differential protection devices of all • Distance protections for compensated/isolated systems with
kind for lines, transformers, generators, motors, and busbars AR
• Phasor measurement unit (PMU). • Distance protection with reactance method for overhead line
for grounded systems, with AR.
2.6
[dw_7SA82_Ltg, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.6/2 Application example: Distance protection for overhead line
Functions and application templates
Available
1 2 3
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole ■ ■ ■ ■

21/21N Distance protection Z<, V/∠ ■ ■ ■ ■
(V,I)
21T Impedance protection for transformers Z< ■
25 Synchrocheck, synchronizing function Sync ■ ■
tion
37 Undercurrent I< ■
direction
47 Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence V2> ■ 2.6
system
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> ■ ■ ■ ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> ■ ■ ■ ■
50HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent protection I>>> ■ ■ ■ ■
67 Directional overcurrent protection, phases I>, ∠(V,I) ■
67N Directional overcurrent protection for ground IN>, ∠(V,I) ■ ■
faults in grounded systems
admittance
68 Power-swing blocking ΔZ/Δt ■ ■
78 Out-of-step protection ΔZ/Δt ■
85/21 Teleprotection for distance protection ■ ■ ■ ■
85/27 Weak or no infeed: Echo and Tripping WI ■ ■ ■ ■
85/67N Teleprotection for directional ground fault protec- ■ ■ ■ ■
tion
86 Lockout ■
former
former
Available
1 2 3

former
FL Fault locator, single-ended measurement FL-one ■ ■ ■ ■
CD-3FO)
Measured values, standard ■ ■ ■ ■
Switching statistic counters ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC (Standard, Control) ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■
Inrush current detection ■
2.6 External trip initiation ■ ■ ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■ ■ ■ ■
Monitoring and supervision ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection interface, serial ■ ■ ■ ■
Circuit Breaker ■ ■ ■ ■
Disconnector ■
Region France: Overload protection for lines and ■
cables 'PSL-PSC'
Region France: Overcurrent protection 'MAXI-L' ■
Region France: Net decoupling protection 'PDA' ■
Region France: Overload protection for trans- ■
formers
Function-points class: 0 100 200
Table 2.6/1 SIPROTEC 7SA82 - Functions and application templates

1 DIS Basic
2 DIS, comp./isol. neutral point, with AR
3 DIS RMD overhead line, solid grounded neutral point
Description
The SIPROTEC 7SA86 distance protection has specifically been
designed for the protection of lines. Due to its modular structure
and flexibility and the powerful engineering tool DIGSI 5,
SIPROTEC 7SA86 offers future-oriented system solutions with
high investment security and low operating costs.
Main function Distance protection

Inputs and outputs 12 predefined standard variants with 4/4 or
8/8 current/voltage transformers, 5 to
Hardware quantity Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure within
structure the scope of the SIPROTEC 5 modular system
Housing width 1/3 × 19" to 2/1 × 19"
Functions
DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as [SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
required. Figure 2.6/3 SIPROTEC 7SA86 2.6

• Minimum tripping time: 9 ms
• 6 independent measuring loops (6-system distance protec- • Serial protection data communication via optical fibers, two-
wire connections and communication networks (IEEE C37.94,
tion) and others), including automatic switchover between ring
• Several distance-protection functions can be selected: Classic, and chain topology
formers
• Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
• Directional backup protection and various additional functions • Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White-
paper requirements
• Recognition of static, intermittent and transient ground faults • Phasor measurement unit (PMU) for synchrophasor measured
(fleeting contact function) in arc-suppression-coil-ground and values and IEEE C37.118 protocol
isolated power systems
• Time synchronization using IEEE 1588
• Adaptive power-swing blocking, out-of-step protection
• Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s
• Detection of current-transformer saturation for fast tripping at 8 kHz or 320 s at 2 kHz)
with high accuracy
• Auxiliary functions for simple tests and commissioning
• Arc protection
• Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure within the scope of
• Power protection, configurable as active or reactive power the SIPROTEC 5 modular system
protection
Applications
• Reactive power-undervoltage protection (QU protection)
• Detection and selective 3-pole tripping of short circuits in
• Detection of current and voltage signals up to the 50th electrical equipment of star networks, lines with infeed at one
harmonic with high accuracy for selected protection functions or two ends, parallel lines and open or closed ring systems of
(such as thermal overload protection) and operational meas- all voltage levels
ured values
• Detection of ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
• 3-pole automatic reclosing function ground power systems in star, ring, or meshed arrangement
• Control, synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection • Protection data communication over different distances and
physical media, such as optical fiber, two-wire connections,
• Graphical logic editor to create powerful automation func- and communication networks
tions in the device
• Backup protection for differential protection devices of all
• Single line representation in small or large display kind for lines, transformers, generators, motors, and busbars
• Integrated electrical Ethernet RJ45 for DIGSI 5 and IEC 61850 • Phasor measurement unit (PMU).
Application templates
• Up to 4 optional pluggable communication modules, usable
for different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850, Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applica-
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus TCP, DNP3 (serial tions. They comprise all basic configurations and default
and TCP)) settings.
The following application templates are available: • Distance protection for overhead line for grounded systems,
with AR for applications with breaker-and-a-half scheme
• Basis
• Distance protection with MHO distance zone characteristics
• Distance protection for overhead line for grounded systems for overhead line for grounded systems, with AR for applica-
with AR tions with breaker-and-a-half schemes.
• Distance protection with MHO distance zone characteristics
for overhead line for grounded systems, with AR
2.6
2.6
[dw_7SA86_1-5LS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.6/5 Application example: Distance protection for overhead line with breaker-and-a-half scheme
Available
1 2 3 4 5
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
21/21N Distance protection Z<, V/∠ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
(V,I)
25 Synchrocheck, synchronizing function Sync ■ ■ ■ ■
tion
2.6 direction
system
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
50HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent protection I>>> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole CBFP ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
67N Directional overcurrent protection for ground IN>, ∠(V,I) ■ ■ ■ ■
admittance
68 Power-swing blocking ΔZ/Δt ■ ■ ■ ■
79 Automatic reclosing, 3-pole AR ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
85/21 Teleprotection for distance protection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
85/27 Weak or no infeed: Echo and Tripping WI ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
85/67N Teleprotection for directional ground fault protec- ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
tion
86 Lockout ■
87 STUB STUB Differential protection (for one-and-half ■ ■ ■
circuit-breaker applications)
Available
1 2 3 4 5

former
former
former
FL Fault locator, single-ended measurement FL-one ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CD-3FO)
Switching statistic counters ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC (Standard, Control) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2.6
CFC arithmetic ■
External trip initiation ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection interface, serial ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Disconnector ■ ■ ■
cables 'PSL-PSC'
formers

1 DIS Basic
2 DIS, comp./isol. neutral point, with AR
4 DIS RMD overhead line, solid grounded neutral point, 1.5 CB
5 DIS Mho overhead line, solid grounded neutral point, 1.5 CB
Description
The SIPROTEC 7SA87 distance protection has specifically been
designed for the protection of lines. Due to its modular structure
and flexibility and the powerful engineering tool DIGSI 5,
SIPROTEC 7SA87 offers future-oriented system solutions with
Main function Distance protection

Tripping 1-pole and 3-pole, minimum tripping time:
9 ms
Hardware flexibility Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure within
the scope of the SIPROTEC 5 modular system
Housing width 1/3 × 19" to 2/1 × 19"
Functions
[SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
2.6 Figure 2.6/6 SIPROTEC 7SA87
required.
• Minimum tripping time: 9 ms • Serial protection data communication via optical fibers, two-
• 6 independent measuring loops (6-system distance protec- and others), including automatic switchover between ring
tion)
and chain topology
• Several distance-protection functions can be selected: Classic, • Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
formers • Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White-
• Directional backup protection and various additional functions paper requirements
• Recognition of static, intermittent and transient ground faults • Phasor measurement unit (PMU) for synchrophasor measured
(fleeting contact function) in arc-suppression-coil-ground and
isolated power systems • Time synchronization using IEEE 1588
• Adaptive power-swing blocking, out-of-step protection • Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s
• Detection of current-transformer saturation for fast tripping
with high accuracy • Auxiliary functions for simple tests and commissioning
• Arc protection • Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure within the scope of
the SIPROTEC 5 modular system
protection Applications
• Reactive power-undervoltage protection (QU protection) • Detection and selective 1-pole and 3-pole tripping of short
circuits in electrical equipment of star networks, lines with
• Detection of current and voltage signals up to the 50th infeed at one or two ends, parallel lines and open or closed
harmonic with high accuracy for selected protection functions ring systems of all voltage levels
(such as thermal overload protection) and operational meas-
ured values • Detection of ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
• 3-pole automatic reclosing function
• Protection data communication over different distances and
• Control, synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection physical media, such as optical fiber, two-wire connections,
and communication networks
tions in the device • Backup protection for differential protection devices of all
• Phasor measurement unit (PMU).
(reporting and GOOSE) Application templates
• Up to 4 optional pluggable communication modules, usable Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applica-
for different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850, tions. They comprise all basic configurations and default
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus TCP, DNP3 (serial settings.
and TCP))

• Basic distance protection
• Distance protection ractance method (RMD) for overhead line
for grounded systems, with AR
• Distance protection ractance method (RMD) for overhead line
for grounded systems, with AR for applications with breaker-
and-a-half schemes
2.6
2.6
[dw_7SA87_1-5LS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.6/8 Application example: Distance protection for overhead line with breaker-and-a-half scheme
Available
1 2 3

Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O ■ ■ ■ ■
(V,I)
25 Synchrocheck, synchronizing function Sync ■ ■ ■
tion
46 Negative sequence overcurrent protection with I2>, ∠(V2,I2) ■ 2.6
direction
system
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 1-/3-pole CBFP ■ ■ ■
67N Directional overcurrent protection for ground IN>, ∠(V,I) ■ ■ ■
67Ns Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems ■
admittance
79 Automatic reclosing, 1-/3-pole AR ■ ■ ■
tion
86 Lockout ■
87 STUB STUB Differential protection (for one-and-half ■ ■
Available
1 2 3

former
former
former
CD-3FO)
2.6 CFC (Standard, Control) ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■
External trip initiation ■ ■ ■ ■
Disconnector ■ ■
cables 'PSL-PSC'
formers

1 DIS Basic
3 DIS RMD overhead line, solid grounded neutral point, 1.5 CB
Line Differential Protection – SIPROTEC 7SD82
Description
The SIPROTEC 7SD82 line differential protection has been
designed particularly for the cost-optimized and compact
protection of lines in medium-voltage and high-voltage systems.
With its flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool,
SIPROTEC 7SD82 offers future-oriented system solutions with
Main function Differential protection for medium-voltage and

high voltage applications
16 binary outputs
Hardware flexibility Two different quantity structures for binary
inputs and outputs are available in the 1/3 base
module. Adding 1/6 expansion modules is not
[SIP5_7xx82_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
possible; housing width available with large or
small display. Figure 2.7/1 Line differential protection device SIPROTEC 7SD82
Housing width 1/3 × 19"
Benefits
• Detection of current and voltage signals up to the 50th 2.7
• Compact and low-cost line differential protection harmonic with high accuracy for selected protection functions
• Safety due to powerful protection functions ured values
• Data security and transparency over the entire lifecycle of the • Control, synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection
• Purposeful and simple operation of the devices and software • Graphical logic editor to create powerful automation func-
thanks to user-friendly design tions in the device
• Increased reliability and quality of the engineering process • Single line representation in small or large display
• Consistent implementation of high safety and security mecha- • Integrated electrical Ethernet RJ45 for DIGSI 5 and IEC 61850
nisms (reporting and GOOSE)
• Powerful communication components ensure safe and effec- • Two optional pluggable communication modules, usable for
tive solutions different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850,
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus TCP, DNP3 (serial
• Full compatibility between IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2 and TCP))
• High investment security and low operating costs due to • Serial protection data communication via optical fibers, two-
future-oriented system solution. wire connections and communication networks (IEEE C37.94,
Functions and others), including automatic switchover between ring
and chain topology.
required. • Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
• Minimum tripping time: 19 ms • Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White-
paper requirements
• Main protection function is differential protection with adap- • Phasor measurement unit (PMU) for synchrophasor measured
tive algorithm for maximum sensitivity and stability even with
the most different transformer errors, current-transformer
saturation and capacitive charging currents • Time synchronization using IEEE 1588
• Directional backup protection and various additional functions • Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s
• Recognition of static, intermittent and transient ground faults
(fleeting contact function) in arc-suppression-coil-ground and • Auxiliary functions for easy tests and commissioning.
Applications
• Detection of current-transformer saturation • Line protection for all voltage levels with 3-pole tripping
• Arc protection • Phase-selective protection of overhead lines and cables with
• Power protection, configurable as active or reactive power single-ended and multi-ended infeed of all lengths with up to
protection 6 line ends
• Transformers and compensating coils in the protection zone Application templates
• Detection of ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil- Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applica-
ground power systems in star, ring, or meshed arrangement tions. They comprise all basic configurations and default
settings.
• Serial protection data communication over different distances
and media, such as optical fiber, two-wire connections, and The following application templates are available:
communication networks • Basic differential protection
• Phasor measurement unit (PMU). • Differential protection for overhead line.
2.7
[dw_7SD82_Ltg, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.7/2 Application example: Line differential protection for overhead line
Available
1 2
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole ■ ■ ■

87L Line differential protection for 2 line ends ΔI ■ ■ ■
87L Line differential protection for 3 to 6 line ends ΔI ■ ■ ■
(dependent on Significant properties)
tion
direction
system
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■ ■ 2.7
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> ■ ■ ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> ■ ■ ■
50HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent protection I>>> ■ ■ ■
67N Directional overcurrent protection for ground IN>, ∠(V,I) ■
admittance
79 Automatic reclosing, 3-pole AR ■ ■
86 Lockout ■
87L/ 87T Option for line differential protection: including ΔI ■
power transformer
Option for line differential protection:charging- ΔI ■
current compensation
Broken-wire detection for differential protection ■
former
former
Available
1 2

former
CD-3FO)
Measured values, standard ■ ■ ■
Switching statistic counters ■ ■ ■
CFC (Standard, Control) ■ ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■
External trip initiation ■ ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■
2.7
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■ ■ ■
Monitoring and supervision ■ ■ ■
Protection interface, serial ■ ■ ■
Circuit Breaker ■ ■ ■
Disconnector ■
cables 'PSL-PSC'
formers
Function-points class: 0 150
Table 2.7/1 SIPROTEC 7SD82 - Functions and application templates

1 DIFF Basic
2 DIFF overhead line
Description
The SIPROTEC 7SD86 line differential protection has specifically
been designed for the protection of lines. With its modular
structure, flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool,
SIPROTEC 7SD86 offers future-oriented system solutions with
Main function Differential protection

Housing width 1/3 × 19" to 2/1 × 19"
Functions
DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as [SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
required. Figure 2.7/3 SIPROTEC 7SD86

• Minimum tripping time: 9 ms
• Main protection function is differential protection with adap- • Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR 2.7
tive algorithm for maximum sensitivity and stability even with • Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White-
the most different transformer errors, current-transformer paper requirements
saturation and capacitive charging currents
• Phasor measurement unit (PMU) for synchrophasor measured
• Directional backup protection and various additional functions values and IEEE C37.118 protocol
• Recognition of static, intermittent and transient ground faults • Time synchronization using IEEE 1588
isolated power systems • Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s
• Detection of current-transformer saturation • Auxiliary functions for simple tests and commissioning
• Arc protection • Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure
• Power protection, configurable as active or reactive power Applications
protection
• Reactive power-undervoltage protection (QU protection) • Line protection for all voltage levels with 3-pole tripping
• Detection of current and voltage signals up to the 50th • Phase-selective protection of overhead lines and cables with
harmonic with high accuracy for selected protection functions single-ended and multi-ended infeed of all lengths with up to
(such as thermal overload protection) and operational meas- 6 line ends
ured values • Also used in switchgear with breaker-and-a-half configuration
• 3-pole automatic reclosing function • Transformers and compensating coils in the protection zone
• Control, synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection • Detection of ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
tions in the device • Protection data communication over different distances and
• Single line representation in small or large display and communication networks
and TCP)) settings.
• Serial protection data communication via optical fibers, two- The following application templates are available:
and others), including automatic switchover between ring • Basic differential protection
and chain topology • Differential protection for overhead line
• Differential protection for overhead line with transformer in

the protection range
• Differential protection for overhead line, for applications with
breaker-and-a-half schemes.
2.7
2.7
[dw_7SD86_1-5LS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.7/5 Application example: Line differential protection for overhead line with breaker-and-a-half scheme
Available
1 2 3 4

87L Line differential protection for 2 line ends ΔI ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87L Line differential protection for 3 to 6 line ends ΔI ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
tion
direction
2.7 system
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■ ■ ■ ■
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
50HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent protection I>>> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole CBFP ■ ■ ■ ■
admittance
79 Automatic reclosing, 3-pole AR ■ ■ ■ ■
86 Lockout ■
87L/ 87T Option for line differential protection: including ΔI ■ ■
power transformer
former
Available
1 2 3 4

former
former
FL Fault locator, single-ended measurement FL-one ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CD-3FO)
Measured values, standard ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC (Standard, Control) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■
External trip initiation ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2.7
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Monitoring and supervision ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection interface, serial ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
cables 'PSL-PSC'
formers
Function-points class: 0 150 250 300

1 DIFF Basic
3 DIFF overhead line with transformer
4 DIFF overhead line, 1.5 CB
Description
The SIPROTEC 7SD87 differential protection is suitable for the
selective protection of overhead lines and cables with single-
ended and multi-ended infeed of all lengths with up to 6 ends.
Transformers and compensating coils in the protection range
are also possible. With its modular structure, flexibility and the
powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7SD87 offers
future-oriented system solutions with high investment security
and low operating costs.
Main function Differential protection

Tripping 1-pole and 3-pole, minimum tripping time:
9 ms
[SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
Housing width 1/3 × 19" to 2/1 × 19"
Figure 2.7/6 SIPROTEC 7SD87
Functions
2.7 DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as • Serial protection data communication via optical fibers, two-
required.
• Minimum tripping time: 9 ms and chain topology
• Main protection function is differential protection with adap- • Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
the most different transformer errors, current-transformer • Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White-
paper requirements
• Directional backup protection and various additional functions • Phasor measurement unit (PMU) for synchrophasor measured
• Recognition of static, intermittent and transient ground faults • Time synchronization using IEEE 1588
isolated power systems • Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s
• Detection of current-transformer saturation
• Arc protection
• Power protection, configurable as active or reactive power the SIPROTEC 5 modular system
protection
Applications
• Line protection for all voltage levels with 1-pole and 3-pole
• Detection of current and voltage signals up to the 50th tripping
harmonic with high accuracy for selected protection functions
• Phase-selective protection of overhead lines and cables with
single-ended and multi-ended infeed of all lengths with up to
ured values 6 line ends
• 1-/3-pole automatic reclosing function • Also used in switchgear with breaker-and-a-half configuration
• Control, synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection • Transformers and compensating coils in the protection range
are possible
tions in the device • Detection of ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
• Integrated electrical Ethernet RJ45 for DIGSI 5 and IEC 61850 • Protection data communication over different distances and
• Up to 4 optional pluggable communication modules, usable • Phasor measurement unit (PMU).
for different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850,
and TCP))
Application templates The following application templates are available:

Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applica- • Basic differential protection
tions. They comprise all basic confi gurations and default
settings. • Differential protection for overhead line
• Differential protection for overhead line, for applications with
2.7
2.7
[dw_7SD87_1-5LS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.7/8 Application example: Line differential protection for overhead line with breaker-and-a-half scheme
Available
1 2 3

87L Line differential protection for 2 line ends ΔI ■ ■ ■ ■
87L Line differential protection for 3 to 6 line ends ΔI ■ ■ ■ ■
tion
direction
47 Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence V2> ■ 2.7
system
admittance
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■
power transformer
former
Available
1 2 3

former
former
CD-3FO)
CFC arithmetic ■
Inrush current detection ■ ■ ■ ■
2.7 External trip initiation ■ ■ ■ ■
cables 'PSL-PSC'
formers

1 DIFF Basic
3 DIFF overhead line, 1.5 CB
Differential and Distance Protection – SIPROTEC 7SL82
Description
The combined SIPROTEC 7SL82 line differential and distance
protection has been designed particularly for the cost-optimized
and compact protection of lines in medium-voltage and high-
voltage systems. With its flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5
engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7SL82 offers future-oriented system
solutions with high investment security and low operating costs.
Main function Differential protection and distance protection

for medium-voltage and high voltage applica-
tions
16 binary outputs
modules is not possible; available with large or [SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
small display.
Figure 2.8/1 SIPROTEC 7SL82
Housing width 1/3 × 19"
Benefits • Adaptive power-swing blocking

• Compact and low-cost line differential and distance protection • Arc protection 2.8
• Safety due to powerful protection functions • Reactive power-undervoltage protection (QU protection)
• Data security and transparency over the entire lifecycle of the • Detection of current and voltage signals up to the 50th
plant save time and money harmonic with high accuracy for selected protection functions
• Purposeful and simple operation of the devices and software ured values
thanks to user-friendly design
• Increased reliability and quality of the engineering process • Control, synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection
• Consistent implementation of high safety and security mecha- • Graphical logic editor to create powerful automation func-
tions in the device
nisms
• Powerful communication components ensure safe and effec- • Single line representation in small or large display
tive solutions • Integrated electrical Ethernet RJ45 for DIGSI 5 and IEC 61850
• Full compatibility between IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2 (reporting and GOOSE)
• High investment security and low operating costs due to • Two optional pluggable communication modules, usable for
future-oriented system solution.
Functions and TCP))
DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as • Serial protection data communication via optical fibers, two-
required. wire connections and communication networks (IEEE C37.94,
• Main protection function is differential protection with adap- • Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
saturation and capacitive charging currents paper requirements
• Several distance-protection functions as backup protection or • Phasor measurement unit (PMU) for synchrophasor measured
2nd main protection for selection: Classic, reactance method values and IEEE C37.118 protocol
(RMD), impedance protection for transformers
• Time synchronization using IEEE 1588
• Recognition of static, intermittent and transient ground faults at 8 kHz or 320 s at 2 kHz)
• Auxiliary functions for easy tests and commissioning.
with high accuracy
Applications Application templates

• Line protection for all voltage levels with 3-pole tripping Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applica-
• Phase-selective protection of overhead lines and cables with settings.
6 line ends The following application templates are available:
• Transformers and compensating coils in the protection zone • Basic differential and distance protection
• Detection of ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil- • Differential and distance protection for overhead line in
ground power systems in star, ring, or meshed arrangement grounded systems.
• Protection data communication over different distances and

• Phasor measurement unit (PMU).
2.8
2.8
[dw_7SL82_Ltg, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.8/2 Application example: Combined line differential and distance protection for overhead line
Available
1 2

21/21N Distance protection Z<, V/∠ ■ ■ ■
(V,I)
87L Line differential protection for 2 line ends ΔI ■ ■ ■
87L Line differential protection for 3 to 6 line ends ΔI ■ ■ ■
tion
46 Negative sequence overcurrent protection I2> ■
direction
2.8 47 Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence V2> ■
system
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■ ■
50HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent protection I>>> ■ ■ ■
admittance
68 Power-swing blocking ΔZ/Δt ■ ■
85/21 Teleprotection for distance protection ■ ■ ■
85/27 Weak or no infeed: Echo and Tripping WI ■ ■ ■
85/67N Teleprotection for directional ground fault protec- ■ ■ ■
tion
86 Lockout ■
Available
1 2

power transformer
former
former
former
CD-3FO)
Switching statistic counters ■ ■ ■ 2.8
CFC arithmetic ■
Control ■ ■ ■
Protection interface, serial ■ ■ ■
Disconnector ■
cables 'PSL-PSC'
formers
Table 2.8/1 SIPROTEC 7SL82 - Functions and application templates

1 DIFF/DIS Basic
2 DIFF/DIS RMD overhead line, solid grounded neutral point
Description
protection has specifically been designed for the protection of
lines. With its modular structure, flexibility and the powerful
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7SL86 offers future-oriented
system solutions with high investment security and low oper-
ating costs.
Main function Differential and distance protection

Housing width 1/3 × 19" to 2/1 × 19"
Functions [SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as Figure 2.8/3 SIPROTEC 7SL86
required.
• Minimum tripping time: 9 ms • Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
• Main protection function is differential protection with adap- • Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White-
2.8 tive algorithm for maximum sensitivity and stability even with paper requirements
the most different transformer errors, current-transformer
saturation and capacitive charging currents • Phasor measurement unit (PMU) for synchrophasor measured
• Several distance-protection functions as backup protection or • Time synchronization using IEEE 1588
2nd main protection for selection: Classic, reactance method
(RMD), impedance protection for transformers • Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s
• Directional backup protection and various additional functions at 8 kHz or 320 s at 2 kHz)
• Adaptive power-swing blocking, out-of-step protection • Auxiliary functions for simple tests and commissioning
• Detection of current-transformer saturation for fast tripping • Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure within the scope of
with high accuracy
Applications
• Arc protection
• Line protection for all voltage levels with 3-pole tripping
• Detection of current and voltage signals up to the 50th single-ended and multi-ended infeed of all lengths with up to
6 line ends
ured values • Also used in switchgear with breaker-and-a-half configuration
• 3-pole automatic reclosing function • Transformers and compensating coils in the protection zone
• Control, synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection • Detection of ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
tions in the device • Protection data communication over different distances and
• Single line representation in small or large display and communication networks
and TCP)) settings.

and chain topology

• Basic
• Differential and distance protection with RMD for overhead
line in grounded systems
line in grounded systems, with AR for applications with
2.8
2.8
[dw_7SL86_1-5LS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.8/5 Application example: Combined line differential and distance protection for overhead line with breaker-and-a-half scheme
Available
1 2 3

(V,I)
tion
direction 2.8
system
59, 59N Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "zero seq. V> ■ ■ ■
admittance
tion
Available
1 2 3
86 Lockout ■
power transformer
former
former
former
CD-3FO)
2.8
CFC arithmetic ■
cables 'PSL-PSC'
formers

1 DIFF/DIS Basic
3 DIFF/DIS RMD overhead line, 1.5 CB
Description
protection has specifically been designed for the protection of
lines. With its modular structure, flexibility and the powerful
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7SL87 offers future-oriented
ating costs.
Main function Differential and distance protection

Tripping 1-pole and 3-pole, minimum tripping time: 9
ms
Housing width 1/3 × 19" to 2/1 × 19"
[SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
Functions
Figure 2.8/6 SIPROTEC 7SL87
required.
• Main protection function is differential protection with adap- • Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR 2.8
paper requirements
• Several distance-protection functions as backup protection or • Phasor measurement unit (PMU) for synchrophasor measured
2nd main protection for selection: Classic, reactance method
(RMD), impedance protection for transformers • Time synchronization using IEEE 1588
• Adaptive power-swing blocking, out-of-step protection
with high accuracy • Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure within the scope of
• Arc protection
Applications
• Line protection for all voltage levels with 1-pole and 3-pole
• Detection of current and voltage signals up to the 50th tripping
ured values 6 line ends
• 1-/3-pole automatic reclosing function • Also used in switchgear with breaker-and-a-half configuration
• Control, synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection • Transformers and compensating coils in the protection zone
• Graphical logic editor to create powerful automation func- • Detection of ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
tions in the device ground power systems in star, ring, or meshed arrangement
• Single line representation in small or large display • Protection data communication over different distances and
• Integrated electrical Ethernet RJ45 for DIGSI 5 and IEC 61850 and communication networks
• Up to 4 optional pluggable communication modules, usable • Phasor measurement unit (PMU).
and TCP)) Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applica-
• Serial protection data communication via optical fibers, two- settings.

• Basic differential and distance protection
line in grounded systems
line in grounded systems for applications with breaker-and-
ahalf schemes.
2.8
2.8
[dw_7SL87_1-5LS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.8/8 Application example: Combined line differential and distance protection for overhead line with breaker-and-a-half scheme
Available
1 2 3

(V,I)
tion
2.8 direction
system
admittance
tion
86 Lockout ■
Available
1 2 3

power transformer
former
former
former
CD-3FO)
2.8
CFC arithmetic ■
cables 'PSL-PSC'
formers

1 DIFF/DIS Basic
3 DIFF/DIS RMD overhead line, 1.5 CB
2.8
Circuit-Breaker Management – SIPROTEC 7VK87
Description
The SIPROTEC 7VK87 circuit-breaker management device has
specifically been designed for circuit-breaker management. With
its modular structure, flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5 engi-
neering tool, SIPROTEC 7VK87 offers future-oriented system
Main function Automatic reclosing, synchrocheck, circuit-

breaker failure protection
Tripping 1-pole and 3-pole or 3-pole
Housing width 1/3 × 19" to 2/1 × 19"
Functions [SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as Figure 2.9/1 Circuit-Breaker management device SIPROTEC 7VK87
required.
• Automatic reclosing function and synchrocheck for line • Phasor measurement unit (PMU) for synchrophasor measured
protection applications with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping values and IEEE C37.118 protocol
• Circuit-breaker failure protection for 1-pole and 3-pole trip- • Time synchronization using IEEE 1588
ping
• Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s 2.9
• Control, synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection at 8 kHz or 320 s at 2 kHz)
• Voltage controller for transformers • Auxiliary functions for simple tests and commissioning
• Arc protection • Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure within the scope of
• Voltage protection Applications
• Graphical logic editor to create powerful automation func- • Automatic reclosing after 1/3-pole tripping
tions in the device
• Single line representation in small or large display • Synchrocheck before reclosing
• Integrated electrical Ethernet RJ45 for DIGSI 5 and IEC 61850 • Circuit-breaker failure protection
(reporting and GOOSE) • Also used in switchgear with breaker-and-a-half configuration
• Up to 4 optional pluggable communication modules, usable • Backup overcurrent and voltage protection
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus TCP, DNP3 (serial • Protection data communication over different distances and
and TCP)) physical media, such as optical fiber, two-wire connections,
• Serial protection data communication via optical fibers, two- and communication networks
wire connections and communication networks (IEEE C37.94, • Phasor measurement unit (PMU).
and chain topology Application templates
• Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applica-
• Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White- settings.
paper requirements
The following application template is available:

• Basic circuit-breaker management device
2.9
[dw_7VK87_Ltg, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.9/2 Application example: Circuit-breaker management device
Available
1
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole ■ ■

Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O ■ ■
direction
system
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 1-/3-pole CBFP ■ ■
2.9
79 Automatic reclosing, 1-/3-pole AR ■ ■
86 Lockout ■
former
former
former
CD-3FO)
Measured values, standard ■ ■
Switching statistic counters ■ ■
CFC (Standard, Control) ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■
External trip initiation ■ ■
Control ■ ■
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■ ■
Monitoring and supervision ■ ■
Available
1

Circuit Breaker ■ ■
cables 'PSL-PSC'
formers
Function-points class: 0
Table 2.9/1 SIPROTEC 7VK87 - Functions and application templates

1 Basic (79 AR, 25 Sync., 50BF Breaker fail. prot.)
2.9
Overcurrent Protection as Backup Protection for Line Protection – SIPROTEC 7SJ86
Description
The SIPROTEC 7SJ86 overcurrent protection has specifically been
designed as backup or emergency protection for the line protec-
tion devices. With its modular structure, flexibility and the
powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7SJ86 offers
Main function Overcurrent protection (V/inverse time-over-

current protection)
Tripping 3-pole
Inputs and outputs 3 predefined standard variants with 4/4 current
transformers/voltage transformers, 11 to
Hardware flexibility Flexibly adjustable and expandable I/O quantity
structure within the scope of the SIPROTEC 5
modular system
Housing width 1/3 × 19" to 2/1 × 19"
[SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
Functions Figure 2.10/1 SIPROTEC 7SJ86

required. IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus TCP, DNP3 (serial
and TCP))
• Overcurrent protection as backup / emergency line protection • Serial protection data communication via optical fibers, two-
for all voltage levels with 3-pole tripping
• Optimized tripping times due to directional comparison and and others), including automatic switchover between ring
protection data communication and chain topology
• Recognition of static, intermittent and transient ground faults • Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR 2.10
isolated power systems • Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White-
paper requirements
• Arc protection
• Overvoltage and undervoltage protection values and IEEE C37.118 protocol
• Frequency protection and frequency change protection for • Time synchronization using IEEE 1588
load shedding applications
• Power protection, configurable as active or reactive power at 8 kHz or 320 s at 2 kHz)
protection
• Protection functions for capacitor banks, such as overcurrent,
overload, current unbalance, peak overvoltage, or differential • Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure within the scope of
protection the SIPROTEC 5 modular system
• Reactive power-undervoltage protection (QU protection) Applications
• Detection of current and voltage signals up to the 50th • Backup and emergency protection for line protection
• Detection and selective 3-pole tripping of short circuits in
electrical equipment of star networks, lines with infeed at one
ured values or two ends, parallel lines and open or closed ring systems of
• Control, synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection all voltage levels
• Circuit-breaker failure protection • Utilization in switchgear with breaker-and-a-half configuration

• Circuit-breaker reignition monitoring • Detection of ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
• Graphical logic editor to create powerful automation func- • Backup protection for differential protection devices of all
tions in the device
• Single line representation in small or large display • Protection and monitoring of capacitor banks
• Integrated electrical Ethernet RJ45 for DIGSI 5 and IEC 61850 • Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
• 4 optional pluggable communication modules, usable for • Reverse-power protection
Application templates Figure 2.10/2 shows an application example for directional

Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applica- protection for overhead line. The functional scope is based on
tions. They comprise all basic configurations and default the application template directional overcurrent protection. In
settings. addition the functions fault locator and automatic reclosing
were loaded from the DIGSI 5 library.
• SIPROTEC 7SJ86 non-directional overcurrent protection
• SIPROTEC 7SJ86 directional overcurrent protection
2.10
[dw_7SJ86_Ltg, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.10/2 Application example: directional overcurrent protection for overhead line
Available
1 2

Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O ■ ■ ■
tion
direction
system
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■
Intermittent ground fault protection Iie> ■ 2.10
67 Directional overcurrent protection, phases I>, ∠(V,I) ■ ■
admittance
85/67N Teleprotection for directional ground fault protec- ■
tion
86 Lockout ■ ■
former
former
former
Available
1 2

CD-3FO)
CFC arithmetic ■
Inrush current detection ■ ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■
Protection interface, serial ■ ■
cables 'PSL-PSC'
formers
2.10

Overcurrent Protection as Backup Protection for Line Protection – Line Protection
Standard variants
Standard variant for SIPROTEC 7SA82, 7SD82, 7SL82

Type 1 1/3,11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V
11 binary inputs,
4 current transformers
4 voltage transformers
Contains the modules: Base module with PS101 and IO101.
Type 2 1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V
23 binary inputs,
Contains the modules: Base module with PS101, IO101 and IO110.
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86, 7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87
Type 1 1/3, 7BI, 14BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
Housing width 1/3 × 19”
7 binary inputs,
16 LEDs
2.10
Type 2 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
11 binary inputs,
16 LEDs
Type 3 1/2, 13 BI, 21 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
13 binary inputs,
16 LEDs
Expansion module IO206.
Type 4 1/2, 19 BI, 30 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V

19 binary inputs,
16 LEDs
Type 5 1/2, 21 BI, 17 BO (4 P), 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
21 binary inputs,
16 LEDs
Type 6 1/2, 15 BI, 18 BO (4 HS), 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
15 binary inputs,
18 binary outputs (1 life contact, 5 standard, 8 fast, 4 high-speed),
2.10 16 LEDs
Type 7 1/2, 15 BI, 20 BO, 16 LED, 8 I, 8 V
15 binary inputs,
20 binary outputs (1 life contact, 5 standard, 14 fast)
16 LEDs
Type 8 2/3, 31 BI, 46 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
Housing width 2/3 × 19”,
31 binary inputs,
16 LEDs
Expansion modules IO205, IO205.
Type 9 2/3, 29 BI, 23 BO (4 P), 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V

31 binary inputs,
25 binary outputs (1 life contact, 10 standard, 6 fast, 8 power)
16 LEDs
27 binary inputs,
34 binary outputs (1 life contact, 21 standard, 8 fast, 4 high-speed)
16 LEDs
Type 11 2/3, 27 BI, 36 BO, 16 LED, 8 I, 8 V
27 binary inputs,
16 LEDs 2.10
Contains the modules: Base module with PS201 and IO208, expansion
modules IO202, IO205.
27 binary inputs,
33 binary outputs (1 life contact, 8 standard, 16 fast, 8 high-speed)
16 LEDs
modules IO208, IO209, IO209.
Type 1 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
11 binary inputs,
16 LEDs
Type 2 1/2, 17 BI, 16 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V

17 binary inputs,
16 LEDs
Expansion modules IO206.
Type 3 1/2, 23 BI, 25 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
23 binary inputs,
16 LEDs
Expansion modules IO205.
Table 2.10/2 Standard variants for line protection devices

2.10
Transformer Differential Protection

Transformer Differential Protection – SIPROTEC 7UT82, 7UT85, 7UT86, 7UT87
[dw_7UT_anwendung, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7UT82, 7UT85, 7UT86, 7UT87 Definition of the device types by their designation
2.11
SIPROTEC 5 transformer differential protection devices are multi-
functional devices whose main protection functions are based
on the differential protection principle. They protect different
types of transformers, such as two-winding, three-winding and
multi-winding transformers with different numbers of meas-
uring points and, besides standard power transformers, also
auto transformers.
The devices can be used in all voltage levels. The large number
of protection and automatic functions permits use in all fields of Essential differentiating characteristics
electric power supply. The devices contain all important auxiliary 7 UT 82 Two-winding transformer (2 sides and
functions that today are necessary for safe network operation. maximum 2 measuring points)
This includes control, measurement and monitoring functions. 7 UT 85 Two-winding transformer (2 sides and
The large number of communication interfaces and communica- maximum 5 measuring points; expandable to
tion protocols satisfies the requirements of communication- 3 sides)
based selective protection and of automated operation. 7 UT 86 Three-winding transformer (3 sides and
Commissioning and maintenance work can be completed safely, maximum 6 measuring points; expandable to
4 sides)
functions. Their modular structure permits SIPROTEC 5 trans- 7 UT 87 Multi-winding transformer (5 sides and
maximum 9 measuring points)
former differential protection devices always to be adapted flex-
ibly to the requirements.
For your order, you can select the devices from various standard
variants. Additional expansion modules permit the device to be
adapted to your specific application (see "Overview of the
Standard Variants").
Transformer Differential Protection – SIPROTEC 7UT82
Description
The SIPROTEC 7UT82 transformer differential protection has
been designed specifically for the protection of two-winding
transformers. It is the main protection for the transformer and
contains many other protection and monitoring functions. The
additional protection functions can also be used as backup
protection for protected downstream objects (such as cables,
line). In this process, you are also supported by the modular
expandability of the hardware. With its modular structure, flexi-
bility and the powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC
7UT82 offers future-oriented system solutions with high invest-
Main function 1 differential protection function (standard or

auto transformer) with additional stabilization;
up to 2 ground fault differential protection
functions
[SIP5_7xx82_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
Usable measuring 2 x 3-phase current measuring points, 2 x 1-
points phase current measuring points Figure 2.11/2 SIPROTEC5 7UT82 transformer differential protection
Inputs and outputs 1 predefined standard variant with 8 current (1/3 device = standard variant W1)
transformers, 7 binary inputs, 7 binary outputs
Hardware flexibility The 1/3 base module is available with the • Increased sensitivity with near-neutral-point ground faults
IO103 module, it is not possible to add through a separate ground fault differential protection
1/6 expansion modules, available with large
and small display
• Flexible adaptation to the transformer vector group
Housing width 1/3 × 19" • Controlling closing and overexcitation processes
Benefits
• Safe behavior in current-transformer saturation with different
degrees of saturation
• Compact and low-cost transformer differential protection • Adaptive adaptation of the operate curve to the transformer
tap position
• Safety due to powerful protection functions
• Arc protection 2.11
• Data security and transparency over the entire lifecycle of the
plant save time and money • Graphical logic editor to create powerful automation func-
tions in the device
• Purposeful and simple operation of the devices and software
thanks to user-friendly design • Single line representation in small or large display
• Increased reliability and quality of the engineering process • Integrated electrical Ethernet RJ45 for DIGSI 5 and IEC 61850
nisms • Up to 2 optional pluggable communication modules, usable
• Powerful communication components ensure safe and effec- IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus TCP, DNP3 (serial
tive solutions
and TCP))
• Highly available Ethernet communication due to integrated wire connections and communication networks (IEEE C37.94,
Ethernet redundancy protocols PRP and HSR and others), including automatic switchover between ring
Functions and chain topology
DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as • Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
required. • Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White-
• Transformer differential protection for two-winding trans- paper requirements
formers with versatile, additional protection functions • Time synchronization using IEEE 1588
• Transformer differential protection for phase-angle regulating • Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s
transformers of the single core type
• Universal usability of the permissible measuring points • Auxiliary functions for easy tests and commissioning.
• Applicable from average up to extra-high voltage
Applications
• Protection of standard power transformers, auto transformers Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for standard appli-
and motors
cations. They contain basic configurations and default settings.
These can be used directly or as a template for application-
related adaptation. The available measuring points make varied The Figure 2.11/3 shows the typical structure of an application
applications possible. Prior to ordering a device, please template, the measuring points used, the function groups used,
configure the application with DIGSI 5. Table "Functions and their internal interconnection, and the predefined functions.
application templates" shows the scope of functions of the The example shows the two-winding transformer with ground
device. Use the configurator to determine the necessary func- fault differential protection.
tion points.
Two-winding transformer basis
• Differential protection
• Overload protection, backup protection for the downstream
electrical power system
2.11
[dw_two-winding-temp_01, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.11/3 Application example: Protection of a Two-Winding Transformer
2.11
Figure 2.11/4 Application example: Protection of a two-winding transformer with ground fault differential protection
Two-winding transformer with restricted ground-fault protec-

tion (REF)
• Ground fault differential protection on the star side
• Circuit-breaker failure protection.
Available
1 2 3
49H Hot spot calculation θh, I²t ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> ■ ■
74TC Trip circuit supervision TCS ■ ■ ■ ■
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■
87T Transformer differential protection ΔI ■ ■ ■
87T Transformer differential protection for phase ΔI ■
angle regulating transformer (single core)
87T Node Differential protection (Node protection for Auto- ΔI Node ■
transformer)
87N T Restricted ground-fault protection ΔIN ■ ■
2.11 87M Motor differential protection ΔI ■ ■
87G Generator differential protection ΔI ■
CD-3FO)
CFC arithmetic ■
Disconnector ■
Table 2.11/1 SIPROTEC 7UT82 - Functions and application templates

1 Two winding transformer basic (87T)
2 Two winding transformer (87T, 50BF, 87N)
3 Motor DIFF (87M)
Description
been designed specifically for the protection of two-winding
transformers (2 sides). It is the main protection for the trans-
former and contains many other protection and monitoring
functions. The additional protection functions can also be used
as backup protection for protected downstream objects (such as
cables, line). In this process, you are also supported by the
modular expandability of the hardware. With its modular struc-
ture, flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool,
SIPROTEC 7UT85 offers future-oriented system solutions with
Main function 1 differential protection function (standard or

auto transformer) with additional stabilization;
up to 2 ground fault differential protection
functions
points phase current measuring points, 3 x 3-phase [SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
voltage measuring points; expandable to
Figure 2.11/5 SIPROTEC 7UT85 transformer differential protection
3 sides
(1/3 device = standard variant O1)
transformers 7 to 19 binary inputs, 7 to
23 binary outputs • Typical properties of a transformer differential protection such
as flexible adaptation to the transformer vector group, control
of inrush and overexcitation processes, safe behavior in the
modular system case of current-transformer saturation with different degrees
Housing width 1/3 × 19" to 2/1 × 19"
of saturation
• Adaptive adaptation of the operate curve to the transformer
Benefits tap position
• Safety due to powerful protection functions • Increased sensitivity with near-neutral-point ground faults
through a separate ground fault differential protection 2.11
• Data security and transparency over the entire lifecycle of the • Additional current and voltage inputs can be supplements for
standard protection functions, such as overcurrent, voltage
• Purposeful and simple operation of the devices and software frequency, etc.
• Arc protection
• Voltage controller function ANSI 90V for two-winding trans-
• Consistent implementation of high safety and security mecha- formers, three-winding transformers and grid coupling trans-
nisms formers
• Powerful communication components ensure safe and effec- • Graphical logic editor to create powerful automation func-
tive solutions tions in the device
• Full compatibility between IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2 • Up to 4 pluggable communication modules, usable for
different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-
• Highly available Ethernet communication due to integrated 5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 (serial and TCP), Modbus TCP)
Ethernet redundancy protocols PRP and HSR.
Functions • Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as • Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White-
required. paper requirements
• Transformer differential protection for two-winding trans- • Secure serial protection data communication, also over great
formers with versatile, additional protection functions; distances and all available physical media (fiber-optic cable, 2-
expandable to 3 windings wire connections and communication networks)
• Transformer differential protection for phase-angle regulating • Capturing operational measured variables and protection
transformers of the single core type and special transformers function measured values to evaluate the plant state, to
support commissioning, and to analyze faults
• Universal usability of the permissible measuring points
• Applicable from average up to extra-high voltage values and IEEE C37.118 protocol
• Protection of standard power transformers, auto transformers • Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s
and motors at 8 kHz or 320 s at 2 kHz)
• Auxiliary functions for simple tests and commissioning • Overload protection, backup protection for the downstream
the SIPROTEC 5 modular system • Circuit-breaker failure protection
Applications Two-winding transformer in breaker-and-a-half application
(Figure 2.11/8)
Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applica-
tions. They contain basic configurations and default settings. • Differential protection
These can be used directly or as a template for application- • Ground fault differential protection on the star side
related adaptation. The available measuring points make varied
applications possible. Prior to ordering a device, please • Overload protection, backup protection for the downstream
configure the application with DIGSI. Table "Functions and appli- electrical power system
cation templates" shows the functional scope of the device. Use • Circuit-breaker failure protection.
the configurator to determine the necessary function points.
The Figure 2.11/6 shows the typical structure of an application
template, the measuring points used, the function groups used,
Two-winding transformer basis (Figure 2.11/6) their internal interconnection, and the predefined functions.
The example shows the two-winding transformer with ground
• Differential protection fault differential protection.
Two-winding transformer with restricted ground-fault differen-
tial protection (REF) (Figure 2.11/7)
• Ground fault differential protection on the star side
2.11
Figure 2.11/6 Application example: Protection of a Two-Winding Transformer
2.11
Figure 2.11/7 Application example: Protection of a two-winding transformer with ground fault differential protection
2.11
Figure 2.11/8 Application example: Protection of a two-winding transformer in breaker-and-a-half layout
Available
1 2 3 4 5
Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O ■

21/21N Distance protection Z<, V/∠ ■
(V,I)
87L Line differential protection for 2 line ends ΔI ■
27 Undervoltage protection: "3-phase" or "pos.seq. V< ■ ■
system
47 Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence- / V2/V1> ■
positive-sequence system
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault SOTF ■ 2.11
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, 1-phase IN> ■ ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole CBFP ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
59, 59N Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "zero seq. V> ■ ■ ■
59 Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "pos.seq. V1" V> ■
or "universal Vx"
admittance
68 Power-swing blocking ΔZ/Δt ■
81 Frequency protection: "f>" or "f<" or "df/dt" f>,<; df/dt>,< ■ ■
85/21 Teleprotection for distance protection ■
85/27 Weak or no infeed: Echo and Tripping WI ■
Available
1 2 3 4 5

tion
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87T Transformer differential protection ΔI ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87T Transformer differential protection for special ΔI ■
transformers
87T Node Differential protection (Node protection for Auto- ΔI Node ■
transformer)
87N T Restricted ground-fault protection ΔIN ■ ■ ■
87M Motor differential protection ΔI ■ ■
87 STUB STUB Differential protection (for one-and-half ■
90V Automatic voltage control for 2 winding trans- ■ ■
former
former
former
2.11 AFD Arc-protection (only with plug-in module ARC- ■

CD-3FO)
CFC (Standard, Control) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■
External trip initiation ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Circuit Breaker ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Disconnector ■
Transformer Side 7UT85 ■

3 Two winding transformer 1,5CB (87T, 50BF, 87N)
4 Two winding transformer (87T, 50BF, 87N, 90V)

5 Motor DIFF (87M, 50BF, 27, 81, 46, 49)
2.11
Description
been designed specifically for the protection of three-winding
transformers (3 sides). It is the main protection for the trans-
cables, line). In this process, you are also supported by the
modular expandability of the hardware. The device supports all
SIPROTEC 5 system properties. It enables future-oriented system
With its modular structure, flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5
engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7UT86 offers future-oriented system
Main function 1 differential protection function (standard)

with additional stabilization; up to 3 ground
fault differential protection functions
[SIP5_GD_LEDSS_W3_, 1, --_--]
For auto transformer applications, two differ-
Figure 2.11/9 SIPROTEC 7UT86 transformer differential protection
ential protection functions can be processed in
(1/2 device = standard variant P1)
an Auto transformer function group.
points phase current measuring points, 4 x 3-phase • Applicable from average up to extra-high voltage
voltage measuring points; expandable to
4 sides • Protection of standard power transformers, auto transformers
and motors
transformers 4 voltage transformers, 11 to • Typical properties of a transformer differential protection such
23 binary inputs, 18 to 34 binary outputs as flexible adaptation to the transformer vector group, control
Hardware flexibility Flexibly adjustable and expandable I/O quantity of inrush and overexcitation processes, safe behavior in the
structure within the scope of the SIPROTEC 5 case of current-transformer saturation with different degrees
modular system of saturation
2.11 Housing width 1/2 × 19" - 2/1 × 19"
• Adaptive adaptation of the operate curve to the transformer
tap position
Benefits
• Increased sensitivity with near-neutral-point ground faults
• Safety due to powerful protection functions through a separate ground fault differential protection
• Data security and transparency over the entire lifecycle of the • Additional current and voltage inputs can be supplements for
plant save time and money standard protection functions, such as overcurrent, voltage
frequency, etc.
• Purposeful and simple operation of the devices and software
thanks to user-friendly design • Graphical logic editor to create powerful automation func-
tions in the device
• Arc protection
nisms • Voltage controller function ANSI 90V for two-winding trans-
formers, three-winding transformers and grid coupling trans-
• Powerful communication components ensure safe and effec- formers
tive solutions
• Full compatibility between IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2 • Up to 4 pluggable communication modules, usable for
• Highly available Ethernet communication due to integrated IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 (serial and TCP),
Ethernet redundancy protocols PRP and HSR Modbus TCP)
Functions • Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as • Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White-
required. paper requirements
• Transformer differential protection for three-winding trans- • Secure serial protection data communication, also over great
formers with versatile, additional protection functions; distances and all available physical media (fiber-optic cable, 2-
expandable to four-winding transformers wire connections and communication networks)
• Transformer differential protection for phase-angle regulating • Capturing operational measured variables and protection
transformers of the single core type and special transformers function measured values to evaluate the plant state, to
• Universal usability of the permissible measuring points support commissioning, and to analyze faults
• Phasor measurement unit (PMU) for synchrophasor measured • Overload protection, backup protection for the downstream
values and IEEE C37.118 protocol electrical power system
• Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s • Circuit-breaker failure protection
Three-winding transformer in breaker-and-a-half layout
the SIPROTEC 5 modular system • Ground fault differential protection on the star side
Applications • Ground current protection on the neutral side as backup
protection for the electrical power system
Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for standard appli-
cations. They contain basic configurations and default settings. • Overload protection
These can be used directly or as a template for application- • Circuit-breaker failure protection
related adaptation. The available measuring points make varied
applications possible. Prior to ordering a device, please • Frequency and voltage protection on the neutral side
configure the application with DIGSI 5. Table "Functions and
Figure 2.11/10 shows the template for the protection of a
application templates" shows the functional scope of the device.
three-winding transformer in a breaker-and-a-half layout. You
Use the configurator to determine the necessary function
can recognize the 3 required function groups for the trans-
points.
former side, the integration of the ground fault differential
Application examples protection as well as the internal interconnection and selected
The application templates of the SIPROTEC 7UT85 are also avail- functions. In addition, a voltage transformer is available on the
able for the SIPROTEC 7UT86. upper-voltage side. Here, for example, voltage and frequency
limits can be monitored. The required protection settings are
In addition, the following templates are available: made as required by the system.
Three-winding transformer basis
Auto transformer with stabilizing winding
• Differential protection for the complete transformer (auto
transformer winding + stabilizing winding)
2.11
• Ground fault differential protection (neutral point + maximum
side current)
2.11
[dw_Kat-three-wind, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.11/10 Application example: Protection of a three-winding transformer in breaker-and-a-half layout
Available
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

21/21N Distance protection Z<, V/∠ ■ ■
(V,I)
system
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault SOTF ■ 2.11
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, 1-phase IN> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole CBFP ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
59, 59N Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "zero seq. V> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
or "universal Vx"
admittance
74TC Trip circuit supervision TCS ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Available
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

tion
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87T Transformer differential protection ΔI ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
transformers
87T Node Differential protection (Node protection for Auto- ΔI Node ■ ■
transformer)
87N T Restricted ground-fault protection ΔIN ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
former
former
former
2.11 AFD Arc-protection (only with plug-in module ARC- ■

CD-3FO)
Measured values, standard ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC (Standard, Control) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■
Inrush current detection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Monitoring and supervision ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Circuit Breaker ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Disconnector ■
Function-points class: 0 50 150 30 30 0 30 30 175 50

1 Three winding transformer basic (87T)
2 Three winding transformer 1,5CB (87T, 50BF, 87N)
3 Three winding transformer (87T, 50BF, 87N, 21)
4 Autotransformer (87T, 87N, 50BF)
5 Autotransformer 1,5CB (two 87T, 50BF, 59, 27, 81)

10 Motor DIFF (87M, 50BF, 27, 81, 46, 49)
2.11
Description
been designed specifically for the protection of multi-winding
transformers (up to 5 sides). Furthermore, it is to be used where
numerous measuring points (up to 7 3-pole current measuring
points) are required. Another application is simultaneous protec-
tion of two parallel transformers (additional fast backup protec-
tion). The SIPROTEC 7UT87 is the main protection for the trans-
cables, line). With its modular structure, flexibility and the
powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7UT87 offers
[SIP5_GD_SS_LED_W3, 1, --_--]
Main function Up to 3 differential protection functions with
additional stabilization (in different trans- Figure 2.11/11 SIPROTEC 7UT87 transformer differential protection
former function groups); up to 5 ground fault (2/3 device = standard variant Q1)
differential protection functions.
For auto transformer applications, two differ- • Arc protection
ential protection functions can be processed in
an Auto transformer function group. • Voltage controller function ANSI 90V for two-winding trans-
formers, three-winding transformers and grid coupling trans-
points phase current measuring points, 5 x 3-phase formers
voltage measuring points • Adaptive adaptation of the operate curve to the transformer
Inputs and outputs 2 predefined standard variants with 20 current tap position
27 binary inputs, 22 to 38 binary outputs • Increased sensitivity with near-neutral-point ground faults
through a separate ground fault differential protection
structure within the scope of the SIPROTEC 5 • Additional current and voltage inputs can be supplements for
2.11 modular system. standard protection functions, such as overcurrent, voltage
Housing width 2/3 × 19" - 2/1 × 19" frequency, etc.
Functions tions in the device
DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as • Up to 4 pluggable communication modules, usable for
required. In SIPROTEC 7UT87, two transformer function groups different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850,
can be used. IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 (serial and TCP),
Modbus TCP)
• Transformer differential protection for multi-winding trans-
formers with versatile, additional protection functions (multi- • Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
winding transformers are typical in power converter applica-
tions (such as HVDC)) • Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White-
paper requirements
• Transformer differential protection for phase-angle regulating
transformers of the single core and two core types, and • Secure serial protection data communication, also over great
special transformers distances and all available physical media (fiber-optic cable, 2-
wire connections and communication networks)
• Transformer protection applications with up to seven 3-phase
current measuring points • Capturing operation measured variables and protection func-
tion measured values to evaluate the plant state, to support
• Simultaneous differential protection for two parallel trans- commissioning, and to analyze faults
formers (such as two 2-winding transformers)
• Universal usability of the permissible measuring points values and IEEE C37.118 protocol
• Applicable from average up to extra-high voltage • Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s
• Protection of standard power transformers, auto transformers
and motors • Auxiliary functions for simple tests and commissioning
• Typical properties of a transformer differential protection such • Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure within the scope of
as flexible adaptation to the transformer vector group, control the SIPROTEC 5 modular system
of inrush and overexcitation processes, safe behavior in the
case of current-transformer saturation with different degrees
of saturation
Application templates • Overload protection, backup protection for the downstream

All application templates that were described for the
SIPROTEC 7UT85 and SIPROTEC 7UT86 devices can be used in • Circuit-breaker failure protection
SIPROTEC 7UT87.
• Frequency and voltage protection on the upper-voltage side.
In addition, the following template is available:
Auto transformer with stabilizing winding in breaker-and-a-half
layout
• Differential protection for the complete transformer (auto
transformer winding + stabilizing winding)
• Intersection protection for the auto winding for recording
ground faults (3-phase recording of the neutral-point current)
2.11
2.11
[dw_autotrans, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.11/12 Application example: Protection of an auto transformer with stabilizing winding in breaker-and-a-half application system
Figure 2.11/12 shows the template for the protection of an auto dant differential protection with supplementing sensitivity. A
transformer that is connected to a breaker-and-a-half arrange- separate ground fault differential protection is not required. In
ment. The special feature of this application is that per phase addition, a voltage transformer is available on the upper-voltage
the neutral point side current is directly recorded. A separate side. Here, for example, voltage and frequency limits can be
node point differential protection via the auto winding reliably monitored. The required protection settings are made as
records ground faults and turn-to-turn faults. The classic differ- required by the system.
ential protection is assigned over the entire transformer (auto Since the SIPROTEC 7UT87 is intended to be used for special
and stabilizing winding). Both functions run in the Auto trans- applications, you must create your own application template as
former function group. This type of execution gives you a redun-
a function of the application. Save this template with the device. Example 1:
To make your work easier, you can use an available template
This example requires a large number of three-phase current
and modify it as required. The following examples may help
measuring points for a complex application in the power plant
you:
field. Figure 2.11/13 shows a possible configuration.
2.11
[dw_7-messstellen, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.11/13 Possible application of SIPROTEC 7UT87 in a power plant (up to seven 3-phase current measuring points)
Example 2: device. The second differential protection function is the backup

protection for the parallel transformer. For example, start here
Another example is a powerful functional redundancy with
with an application template of the two-winding transformer,
parallel transformers. The differential protection function is
and duplicate it. An alternative cost-optimized variant is the use
doubled. One protection device is used for each transformer.
of one device to protect both transformers.
Two differential protection functions run in each protection
2.11
[dw_two-transformer, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.11/14 Protection of two parallel transformers with one SIPROTEC 7UT87
Example 3:
The last example shows the protection of a converter trans-
former. Four sides and six measuring points are required here.
2.11
[dw_umrichter-transf, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.11/15 Protection of a converter transformer
Available
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

21/21N Distance protection Z<, V/∠ ■ ■
(V,I)
system
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2.11 Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault SOTF ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, 1-phase IN> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole CBFP ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
59, 59N Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "zero seq. V> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
or "universal Vx"
admittance
74TC Trip circuit supervision TCS ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Available
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

tion
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87T Transformer differential protection ΔI ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
angle regulating transformer (two core)
transformers
87T Node Differential protection (Node protection for Auto- ΔI Node ■ ■
transformer)
87N T Restricted ground-fault protection ΔIN ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
former
former
former
PMU Synchrophasor measurement (1 PMU can be used PMU ■ 2.11
CD-3FO)
Measured values, standard ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC (Standard, Control) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■
Inrush current detection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Monitoring and supervision ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Circuit Breaker ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Disconnector ■
Function-points class: 0 30 30 175 0 50 150 30 30 50


5 Three winding transformer basic (87T)
6 Three winding transformer 1,5CB (87T, 50BF, 87N)
7 Three winding transformer (87T, 50BF, 87N, 21)
8 Autotransformer (87T, 87N, 50BF)
9 Autotransformer 1,5CB (two 87T, 50BF, 59, 27, 81)
10 Motor DIFF (87M, 50BF, 27, 81, 46, 49)
2.11
Transformer Differential Protection – Standard variants
Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7UT82

W1 1/3, 7 BI, 7 BO, 8 I
Housing width 1/3 x 19”,
7 binary inputs,
O1 1/3, 7 BI, 7 BO, 8 I
7 binary inputs,
O2 1/2, 19 BI, 23 BO, 8 I
Housing width 1/2 × 19",
19 binary inputs,
P1 1/2, 11 BI, 18 BO, 12 I, 4 U
Housing width 1/2 × 19",
11 binary inputs, 2.11
module IO208.
P2 2/3, 23 BI, 34 BO, 12 I, 4 U
23 binary inputs,
Q1 2/3, 15 BI, 22 BO, 20 I, 4 U
15 binary inputs,
Expansion modules IO208 and IO203.
Transformer Differential Protection – Standard variants
Q2 5/6, 27 BI, 38 BO, 20 I, 4 U

27 binary inputs,
Expansion modules IO208, IO203 and IO205.
Table 2.11/5 Standard variants for transformer differential protection devices

2.11
Motor Protection
Motor Protection – SIPROTEC 7SK82, 7SK85
[dw_7SK_anwendung, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7SK82, 7SK85

SIPROTEC 5 motor protection devices have been designed
2.12 specifically for the protection of asynchronous motors of small
and medium power.
The devices contain all important auxiliary functions that today
are necessary for safe network operation. This includes func-
tions for protection, control, measurement and monitoring. The
large number of communication interfaces and communication
protocols satisfies the requirements of communication-based
selective protection, as well as automated operation.
Features
The difference between the two device models SIPROTEC 7SK82
and SIPROTEC 7SK85 is in the configurability of their hardware
quantity structure.
Essential differentiating characteristics

7SK82 Different hardware quantity structures for binary inputs and
outputs are available in the 1/3 base module
7SK85 Flexible configuration of the hardware quantity structure for
analog inputs, binary inputs and outputs, measuring trans-
expansion modules
Motor Protection – SIPROTEC 7SK82
Description
The SIPROTEC 7SK82 motor protection has been designed
particularly for a cost-optimized and compact utilization of small
to medium-sized motors. With its flexibility and the powerful
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7SK82 offers future-oriented
ating costs.
Main function Motor protection for small to medium-sized

motors (100 kW to 2 MW)
(optional), 11 or 23 binary inputs, 9 or 16
binary outputs.
modules is not possible; available with large or
[SIP5_7xx82_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
small display.
Housing width 1/3 × 19" Figure 2.12/2 SIPROTEC 7SK82 motor protection
Benefits • Detection of current and voltage signals up to the 50th

• Compact and low-cost motor protection (such as thermal overload protection) and operational meas-
• Safety due to powerful protection functions ured values
• Data security and transparency over the entire lifecycle of the • Control, synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection
plant save time and money • Graphical logic editor to create powerful automation func-
• Purposeful and simple operation of the devices and software tions in the device
thanks to user-friendly design • Single line representation in small or large display
• Increased reliability and quality of the engineering process • Integrated electrical Ethernet RJ45 for DIGSI 5 and IEC 61850
• Consistent implementation of high safety and security mecha- (reporting and GOOSE)
nisms • Two optional pluggable communication modules, usable for
• Powerful communication components ensure safe and effec- different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 2.12
tive solutions 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 (serial and TCP),
Modbus TCP)
• Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
• High investment security and low operating costs due to
future-oriented system solution. • Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White-
paper requirements
Functions
• Secure serial protection data communication, also over great
distances and all available physical media (fiber-optic cable, 2-
required.
• Motor protection functions: Startup time monitoring, thermal • Capturing operational measured variables and protection
overload protection for stator and rotor, restart inhibit, unbal- function measured values to evaluate the plant state, to
anced-load protection, load-jam protection support commissioning, and to analyze faults
• Stator and bearing temperature monitoring via temperature • Phasor measurement unit (PMU) for synchrophasor measured
sensors with external RTD unit. values and IEEE C37.118 protocol
• Sensitive ground-fault protection (non-directional, directional) • Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s
to detect stator ground faults at 8 kHz or 320 s at 2 kHz)
• Directional and non-directional overcurrent protection (short- • Auxiliary functions for easy tests and commissioning.
circuit protection) with additional functions
Applications
ground power systems • Protection against thermal overload of the stator from over-
• Overvoltage and undervoltage protection current, cooling problems or pollution
• Arc protection • Protection against thermal overload of the rotor during

startup due to frequent startups, excessively long startups or
• Power protection, configurable as active or reactive power blocked rotor
protection • Monitoring for voltage unbalance or phase outage
• Monitoring the thermal state and the bearing temperatures • Unbalanced-load protection (thermal)
with temperature measurement
• Temperature supervision
• Detection of idling drives of pumps and compressors, for
example • Load-jam protection
• Detection of ground faults in the motor • Overcurrent protection (non-directional) for phases and
ground
• Protection against motor short circuits
• Transformer inrush-current detection
• Protection against instability due to undervoltage.
• Sensitive directional ground-fault detection for systems with
Application templates isolated or resonant neutral and for detecting stator ground
Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applica- faults
tions. They comprise all basic configurations and default • Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence system V0
settings.
• Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence system V1
Current measurement • Fuse-failure monitor
• Thermal overload protection for stator and rotor Application Example
SIPROTEC 7SK82 – protection of a motor of medium power
• Starting-time supervision
The motor protection functions and the overcurrent protection
• Restart inhibit of the SIPROTEC 7SK82 protect an asynchronous motor of
• Unbalanced-load protection (thermal) medium power (up to approximately 2 MW) against thermal and
mechanical overload and short circuits. The directional sensitive
• Temperature supervision ground-fault detection and the overvoltage protection with
zero-sequence voltage V0 detect stator ground faults in the
• Load-jam protection motor. An external RTD unit captures and monitors the thermal
• Overcurrent protection (non-directional) for phases and state of the motor and the bearing temperatures. The RTD unit
ground connects to the device via Ethernet or serial communication.
• Transformer inrush-current detection Figure 2.12/3 shows the functional scope and the basic configu-
ration of a SIPROTEC 7SK82 for this application. It is based on
Current and voltage measurement the application template "Current and voltage measurement". In
• Thermal overload protection for stator and rotor addition, the device must be equipped with a plug-in module for
2.12 communication with the RTD unit.
• Starting-time supervision
• Restart inhibit
2.12
[Motorschutz-7SK82, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.12/3 Application example: Protection of a motor of medium power
Available
1 2

14 Locked rotor protection I> + n< ■ ■ ■
tion
38 Temperature Supervision θ> ■ ■ ■
46 Unbalanced-load protection (thermal) I2² t> ■ ■ ■
direction
system
47 Overvoltage protection: "neg.-seq. V2" or "neg.- V2>; V2/V1> ■
seq. V2 / pos.-seq.V1"
48 Starting-time supervision for motors I²start ■ ■ ■
49R Thermal overload protection, rotor θR ■ ■ ■
2.12 Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault SOTF ■
50L Load-jam protection I>L ■ ■ ■
66 Restart inhibit for motors I²t ■ ■ ■
67N Directional overcurrent protection, ground IN>, ∠(V,I) ■
admittance
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■
former
Available
1 2

CD-3FO)
CFC arithmetic ■
Inrush current detection ■ ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■
Disconnector ■
Table 2.12/1 SIPROTEC 7SK82 - Functions and application templates

1 Current measurement
2 Current and voltage measurement
2.12
Description
The SIPROTEC 7SK85 motor protection is designed for the
protection of motors of all sizes. With its modular structure, flex-
ibility and the powerful DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC
7SK85 offers future-oriented system solutions with high invest-
Main function Motor protection for motors of all sizes

modules can be added, available with large,
small or without display
Housing width 1/3 × 19" to 2/1 × 19"
Benefits [SIP5_GD_W3, 1, --_--]
• Safety due to powerful protection functions Figure 2.12/4 SIPROTEC 7SK85 motor protection device (1/3 device
with large graphical display and 1/6 expansion module
• Data security and transparency over the entire lifecycle of the with key switch front panel)
• Purposeful and simple operation of the devices and software • Detection of current and voltage signals up to the 50th
thanks to user-friendly design harmonic with high accuracy for selected protection functions
• Increased reliability and quality of the engineering process ured values
• Consistent implementation of high safety and security mecha- • Control, synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection
nisms
• Powerful communication components ensure safe and effec- tions in the device
tive solutions
• Full compatibility between IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2 (reporting and GOOSE)
2.12
• High investment security and low operating costs due to • Up to 4 pluggable communication modules, usable for
future-oriented system solution different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850,
Functions IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 (serial and TCP),
Modbus TCP)
required. • Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
• Motor protection functions: Startup time monitoring, thermal • Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White-
overload protection for stator and rotor, restart inhibit, unbal- paper requirements
anced-load protection, load-jam protection • Secure serial protection data communication, also over great
• Stator and bearing temperature monitoring via temperature distances and all available physical media (fiber-optic cable, 2-
sensors with external RTD unit. wire connections and communication networks)
• Differential motor protection as fast short-circuit protection • Capturing operational measured variables and protection
for motors of high power function measured values to evaluate the plant state, to
• Sensitive ground-fault protection (non-directional, directional)
to detect stator ground faults • Synchrophasor measured values with IEEE C37.118 protocol
integrated (PMU)
• Directional and non-directional overcurrent protection (short-
circuit protection) with additional functions • Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s
ground power systems • Auxiliary functions for simple tests and commissioning
• Overvoltage and undervoltage protection • Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure within the scope of
• Arc protection
protection
Applications • Transformer inrush-current detection

• Protection against thermal overload of the stator from over- • Sensitive directional ground-fault detection for systems with
current, cooling problems or pollution isolated or resonant neutral and for detecting stator ground
• Protection against thermal overload of the rotor during faults
startup due to: Frequent startups, excessively long startups or • Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence system V0
blocked rotor
• Monitoring for voltage unbalance or phase outage • Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence system V1
• Monitoring the thermal state and the bearing temperatures • Fuse-failure monitor.
with temperature measurement Motor differential protection, current and voltage measurement
• Detection of idling drives of pumps and compressors, for • Motor differential protection
example
• Detection of ground faults in the motor • Thermal overload protection for stators and rotors
• Protection against motor short circuits • Starting-time supervision
• Protection against instability due to undervoltage. • Restart inhibit
Application templates • Unbalanced-load protection (thermal)
Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applica- • Temperature supervision
settings.
• Load-jam protection
The following application templates are available: • Overcurrent protection (non-directional) for phases and
ground
Current measurement
• Transformer inrush-current detection
• Thermal overload protection for stator and rotor
• Sensitive directional ground-fault detection for systems with
• Starting-time supervision isolated or resonant neutral and for detecting of stator ground
faults
• Restart inhibit
• Overvoltage protection with phase-sequence system V0
• Unbalanced-load protection (thermal)
• Undervoltage protection with positive sequence system V1
• Temperature supervision
• Measuring voltage failure supervision. 2.12
• Load-jam protection
Application example
• Overcurrent protection (non-directional) for phases and SIPROTEC 7SK85 – protecting a medium power motor
ground
An asynchronous medium-power motor (up to approx. 2 MW) is
• Transformer inrush-current detection. protected against thermal and mechanical overloads as well as
Current and voltage measurement short circuits with the motor protection functions and timeover-
current protection of the 7SK85. The directional sensitive
• Thermal overload protection for stators and rotors ground-fault detection and overvoltage protection with zerose-
• Starting-time supervision quence voltage V0 detect stator ground faults in the motor. The
thermal state of the motor and bearing temperatures are
• Restart inhibit acquired and monitored via an external RTD-box. The RTD-box is
• Unbalanced-load protection (thermal) connected to the device via Ethernet or serial communication.
Figure 2.12/5 shows the function scope and the basic configu-
• Temperature supervision ration of a SIPROTEC 7SK85 for this application. The application
• Load-jam protection template "current and voltage measurement" is used as a basis.
Additionally, the device has to be equipped with a plug-in
• Overcurrent protection (non-directional) for phases and module for communication with the RTD-box.
ground
2.12
[Motorschutz-7SK85, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.12/5 Application example: Protection of a medium-power motor
Available
1 2 3

14 Locked rotor protection I> + n< ■ ■ ■ ■
27 Undervoltage protection: "3-phase" or "pos.seq. V< ■ ■ ■
tion
38 Temperature Supervision θ> ■ ■ ■ ■
46 Unbalanced-load protection (thermal) I2² t> ■ ■ ■ ■
direction
system
47 Overvoltage protection: "neg.-seq. V2" or "neg.- V2>; V2/V1> ■
seq. V2 / pos.-seq.V1"
48 Starting-time supervision for motors I²start ■ ■ ■ ■
49R Thermal overload protection, rotor θR ■ ■ ■ ■
50HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent protection I>>> ■ 2.12
50L Load-jam protection I>L ■ ■ ■ ■
66 Restart inhibit for motors I²t ■ ■ ■ ■
67Ns Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems ■ ■ ■
admittance
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■
Available
1 2 3

former
former
former
CD-3FO)
CFC arithmetic ■
Disconnector ■
2.12 The configuration and function points for your application can be ascertained in the SIPROTEC 5 order configurator under: www.siemens.com/siprotec
Table 2.12/2 SIPROTEC 7SK85 - Functions and application templates

1 Current measurement
2 Current and voltage measurement
3 Differential prot. + cur. & volt. meas.
Motor Protection – Standard variants
Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SK82

T1 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I
11 binary inputs,
Contains the base module with PS101 and IO101 modules.
T2 1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I
23 binary inputs,
Contains the base module with PS101, IO101 and IO110 modules.
T3 In preparation
T4 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V
11 binary inputs,
T5 1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V
23 binary inputs,
4 current transformers 2.12
Contains the base module with PS101, IO102 and IO110 modules.
Table 2.12/3 Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SK82 motor protection devices
Motor Protection – Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SK85

R1 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V
11 binary inputs,
R2 1/2, 17 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V
17 binary inputs,
Contains the base module with PS201 and IO202 modules, expansion
modules IO206.
R3 1/2, 27 BI, 17 BO, 4 I, 4 V
27 binary inputs,
Contains the base module with PS201 and IO202 modules, expansion
modules IO207.
Table 2.12/4 Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SK85 motor protection devices
2.12
Generator Protection
Generator Protection – SIPROTEC 7UM85
[dw_7UM8_anwendung, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7UM85 Commissioning and maintenance work can be completed safely,

The main protection functions of SIPROTEC 5 generator protec-
tion devices 7UM85 are based on typical generator protection
functions (stator and rotor ground-fault protection, reverse-
2.13
power protection, unbalanced-load protection, differential Features
protection, underexcitation protection, and many others). They
Scaling hardware and functionality as required is a special
protect generators and power plant blocks in bus and unit
feature of the SIPROTEC 7UM85 device models. Using the
connection. The protection functions are implemented such that
configurator, you can create the hardware configuration
they satisfy the requirements of different power plant versions.
(number of V, I measuring points, binary inputs and outputs,
These can be conventional run-of-river power or pumped-
communication interfaces, etc.) as required by the application.
storage hydropower plants with phase-rotation reversal in pump
Using the DIGSI 5 engineering tool, you can download the
operation. Besides standard unit-type power plants (different
required functions from the library into the 7UM85 device. The
raw material sources), comprehensive protection is also possible
usable functional scope is limited by the ordered function
for nuclear power plants and for power plants that are started
points. You may order additional points without any problems.
with a starting converter (gas turbine power plants, for
example). The scalability of the devices with respect to hard- For your order, you can select the devices from various standard
ware design and functionality opens a wide field of applications. variants. Additional expansion modules permit the device to be
Selecting hardware and functionality as required, you can thus adapted to your specific application (see "Overview of the
cover the entire power spectrum of the machines (starting at standard variants").
approximately 1 MVA) at low costs. The devices are perfectly
suited for industrial applications, too. The large number of Essential differentiating characteristics
protection and automatic functions permits the device to be 7UM85 Flexible configuration of the hardware quantity structure for
used in all fields of electrical energy generation. analog inputs, binary inputs and outputs, measuring trans-
The devices contain all important auxiliary functions that today expansion modules
are necessary for safe plant operation. This includes control,
measurement and monitoring functions. The large number of
communication interfaces and communication protocols satis-
fies the requirements of communication-based selective protec-
tion and of automated operation.
Description
The SIPROTEC 7UM85 generator protection device has been
designed specifically for the protection of generators and power
plant units. It contains all necessary main protection functions
and a large number of other protection and monitoring func-
tions. With its modular structure, flexibility and the powerful
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7UM85 offers future-
oriented system solutions with high investment security and low
operating costs.
Main function Typical generator protection functions

Inputs and outputs 3 predefined standard variants with up to
8 current transformers and 8 voltage trans-
formers, 7 to 15 binary inputs, 9 to 20 binary
outputs
2 additional standard variants with 4 additional [SIP5_GD_SS_LED_W3, 1, --_--]
measuring transducers are in preparation
Figure 2.13/2 SIPROTEC 7UM85 generator protection (width: 1/3 x 19”
to 2 x 19”)
modules can be added, available with large, • Universal overvoltage and undervoltage protection with
small or without display different measuring methods
Housing width 1/3 × 19" to 2 × 19"
• Overfrequency and underfrequency protection and frequency-
change protection
Benefits
• Protection functions for network decoupling (voltage and
• Safe and reliable protection of your plants frequency protection, directional reactive-power undervoltage
protection (QU protection))
• Purposeful and easy handling of devices and software thanks
to a user-friendly design • Switching protection to detect incorrect activation of the
circuit breaker
nisms • Circuit-breaker failure protection
• Powerful communication components ensure safe and effec- • Circuit-breaker reignition monitoring
tive solutions
• High investment security and low operating costs due to tions in the device
future-oriented system solution 2.13
Functions (reporting and GOOSE)
DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as • Optional pluggable communication modules, usable for
required. different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850,
• Short-circuit protection (overcurrent protection, impedance IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus TCP, DNP3 (serial
protection, differential protection) and TCP))
• Stator ground-fault protection (90% non-directional or direc- • Secure serial protection data communication, also over great
tional, 100% with 3rd harmonic, real 100% protection with distances and all available physical media (fiber-optic cable, 2-
20-Hz voltage injection) wire connections and communication networks)
• Rotor ground-fault protection with different measuring • Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
methods (ground-current or ground-resistance monitoring)
• High-precision reverse-power protection and universal power paper requirements
protection
• Underexcitation and overexcitation protection values and IEEE C37.118 protocol
• Unbalanced-Load Protection • Time synchronization using IEEE 1588

• Overload protection and temperature monitoring via external • Capturing operational measured variables and protection
RTD unit (with PT 100, for example) function measured values to evaluate the plant state, to
• Out-of-Step Protection
• Shaft-current protection (in particular with hydropower appli- at 8 kHz or 320 s at 2 kHz)
cations)
• Auxiliary functions for simple tests and commissioning Generator busbar connection basis
• Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure within the scope of • Basic protection functions
• Generator differential protection
Applications
• Underexcitation Protection
• Protection of generators in busbar connection of different
power, with directional stator ground-fault protection. Generator unit connection basis
• Protection of generators in unit connection of different power • Basic protection functions
(using the 100% stator ground fault (20 Hz)) with larger
generators • Transformer differential protection as overall protection
(transformer + generator)
• Protection of power plant units with one device per protection • Underexcitation Protection
group. In the generator transformer version, the 7UM85
implements both generator and transformer protection. • 100% stator ground-fault protection with 3rd Harmonic
• In more complex power plant units (unit connection with Generator unit connection advanced
generator circuit breaker and several auxiliary transformers),
additional SIPROTEC 5 devices are used, such as 7UT8x, 7SJ82 • Basic protection functions
or 7SJ85 and 7SA, SD, SL86, at the upper-voltage side of the
generator transformer. • Transformer differential protection
• Using motor and generator protection functions (underexcita- • Generator differential protection
tion protection, for example) to protect synchronous motors
• Underexcitation Protection
Application Templates
• Out-of-Step Protection
tions. They comprise basic configurations and default settings. • 100% stator ground-fault protection with 20-Hz coupling
The following application templates are available: • Synchronization function (without adjusting commands)
Generator basis
• Circuit-breaker failure protection
• Basic protection functions (overcurrent protection, stator
ground-fault protection, reverse-power protection, overexcita-
tion protection, voltage protection, frequency protection and
unbalanced-load protection),
• Rotor ground-fault protection (ground current measurement)
2.13
2.13
[dw_appl-02_legend, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.13/3 Application example: Protection of a generator in a busbar connection (application template: Generator busbar connection basis)
Application examples transformer (same transformation ratio). The rotor ground-fault

protection is implemented as coupling at power system
SIPROTEC 7UM85 - protection of generators in busbar connec-
frequency, and is based on the rotor ground-current measure-
tion
ment. A 7XR61 + 3PP1336 must be provided as accessory. A
This description gives an overview of an application of genera- base module and an expansion module (such as standard
tors in busbar connection. It is based on the application variant AA2 + IO201) are required as minimum device hardware.
template "Generator busbar connection basis“. Figure 2.13/3 Figure 2.13/3 shows also the internal functional structure of the
shows the single line diagram, the connection to the 7UM85, device. The measuring points are connected with the function
and the logical structure in the device. The ground current for groups. The function groups are also interconnected. Functions
the stator ground-fault protection is generated via a neutral- are allocated to function groups, and interconnected automati-
point transformer. Sensitive ground-fault detection must be cally. The FG Generator stator is the main function group. Differ-
implemented via a difference connection of the ground-current ential protection requires additional function groups. The rotor
ground-fault protection runs in the V/I, 1-phase FG. The Circuit- you may use additional Circuit breaker FGs. All linkages are
breaker function group controls the entire interaction with the preset in the application template. You need 100 function
circuit breaker. Additional functions, such as activating quick points for the template. If you want to use additional functions,
stop and actuating de-excitation, are activated via a direct you may have to increase the number of function points.
routing of the tripping signal to the relay contacts. Alternatively,
2.13
Figure 2.13/4 Application example: Protecting a generator in unit connection (application template: Generator unit connection basis)
SIPROTEC 7UM85 - protecting a generator in unit connection connection. The generator feeds power via the GSU transformer
into the power system. The application is based on the applica-
The example shows a typical implementation of a plant for small
tion template "Generator unit connection basis". Figure 2.13/4
to medium-sized generators (1 - 50 MVA, for example) in unit
shows the single line diagram, the connection to the 7UM85, device. It is almost identical to the busbar version. The differen-
and the logic structure in the device. The protection range of the tial protection was changed. It is to protect the generator and
90% stator ground-fault protection is guaranteed by the neutral- the transformer. A transformer differential protection must
point transformer with load resistor. The rotor ground-fault therefore be used with the associated function groups.
protection is implemented as coupling at power system
All linkages are preset in the application template. You need
frequency, and is based on the rotor ground-current measure-
125 function points for the template. If you want to use addi-
ment. A 7XR61 + 3PP1336 must be provided as accessory. A
tional functions, you may have to increase the number of func-
base module and an expansion module (such as standard
tion points.
variant AA2 + IO201) are required as minimum device hardware.
Figure 2.13/4 shows also the internal functional structure of the
2.13
Figure 2.13/5 Application example: Protection of a power plant unit (application template: Generator unit connection advanced)
SIPROTEC 7UM85 - protection of a power plant unit

The typical application shows a more complex version of a plant
for medium-sized to large generators (20 - 200 MVA, for
example) in unit connection. The auxiliary system is satisfied via
a separate infeed. This example is intended to show the
performance of the system. An expansion for plants with auxil-
iary transformer is possible. If necessary, a transformer differen-
tial protection may have to be added. The maximum number of
differential protection functions is limited to 3. The described
application is based on the application template "Generator unit
connection advanced". Figure 2.13/5 shows the single line
diagram, the connection to the 7UM85, and the logic structure
in the device.
The protection range of the 90% stator ground-fault protection
is guaranteed by the neutral-point transformer with load
resistor. To ensure 100% protection range, the 100% stator
ground fault with 20-Hz infeed is provided. This requires the
accessories 7XT33 and 7XT34 and a miniature current trans-
former. The rotor ground-fault protection is implemented as
coupling at power system frequency, and is based on a resist-
ance test. A 7XR61 + 3PP1336 must be provided as accessory. A
base module and two expansion modules (such as standard
variant AA3 + an additional IO201) are required as minimum
device hardware. Figure 2.13/5 shows also the internal func-
tional structure of the device. To locate the faulty piece of
equipment more rapidly, a stand-alone differential protection is
provided for the generator and for the transformer. This has an
effect on function group size and interconnection. In addition, a
circuit-breaker failure protection and the synchronization func-
tion are provided in the Circuit breaker FG. The adjusting
commands are carried out manually (automatic adjusting
commands are being prepared). The synchronization function
can be used to release manual synchronization. All linkages are
preset in the application template. You need 350 function
points for the template. If you want to use additional functions,
2.13
you may have to increase the number of function points.
Available
1 2 3 4

21T Impedance protection for transformers Z< ■ ■
24 Overexcitation protection V/f ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
27 Undervoltage protection: "3-phase" or "pos.seq. V< ■ ■ ■
27 Undervoltage protection: "3-phase" or "universal V< ■
Vx"
tion
32R Reverse power protection - P< ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
40 Underexcitation protection 1/xd ■ ■ ■ ■
46 Unbalanced-load protection (thermal) I2² t> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
direction
system
48 Starting-time supervision for motors I²start ■
49R Thermal overload protection, rotor θR ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> ■ 2.13
50GN Shaft current protection INs> ■
50/27 Inadvertent energization protection I>, V<reset ■
50L Load-jam protection I>L ■
51V Voltage dependent overcurrent protection t=f(I,V) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
59, 59N Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "zero seq. V> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
or "universal Vx"
59N, 67Ns Stator ground fault protection (undirectional, V0>, ∠(V0,I0) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
directional)
27TH, 59TH, Stator ground fault protection with 3rd harmonics V03.H<, ■ ■
59THD V03.H>;
ΔV03.H
64S Stator ground fault protection 100% (20-Hz) RSG< ■ ■
64F, frated Rotor ground fault protection (IRG>, fn) IRG> ■ ■ ■ ■
Available
1 2 3 4
64F, frated Rotor ground fault protection (RRG>, fn) RRG< ■ ■

66 Restart inhibit for motors I²t ■
78 Out-of-step protection ΔZ/Δt ■ ■
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87T Transformer differential protection ΔI ■ ■ ■
87M Motor differential protection ΔI ■
87G Generator differential protection ΔI ■ ■ ■
CD-3FO)
CFC arithmetic ■
2.13
Disconnector ■
Table 2.13/1 SIPROTEC 7UM85 - Functions and application templates

1 Generator basic
2 Generator busbar connection
3 Generator unit connection basic
4 Generator unit connection extended
Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7UM85

AA1 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4V, 4I
11 binary inputs
1 sensitive ground-current input
Contains the base module with PS201 and IO202 modules
AA2 1/3, 7 BI, 14 BO, 4V, 4I,
7 binary inputs
1 sensitive ground-current input
AA3 1/2, 15 BI, 20 BO, 8V, 8I,
15 binary inputs
2 sensitive ground-current inputs
Expansion module IO202
AA4 in preparation (V7.10 1/2, 11 BI, 16 BO, 7V, 8I, 4MU
and later) 2.13
11 binary inputs
4 fast measuring transducer inputs (alternatively 20 mA, 10 V)
AA5 2/3, 15 BI, 20 BO, 7V, 16I, 4MU

15 binary inputs
4 fast measuring transducer inputs (alternatively 20 mA, 10 V)
Expansion modules IO210 and IO203

2.13
Busbar Protection
Busbar Protection – SIPROTEC 7SS85
[dw_7SS85_anwendung, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7SS85 Short designation Functional scope

The SIPROTEC 7SS85 busbar protection has been designed with 9 1 protection zone
the highest selectivity possible for a large variety of different A 2 protection zones
busbars and all voltage levels. Additional protection and control B 2 protection zones, disconnector image
functions extend the field of application to a comprehensive C 4 protection zones
station protection. D 4 protection zones, disconnector image
2.14 The SIPROTEC 7SS85 is suited for the following system configu- E Only Circuit-breaker failure protection
rations:
Table 2.14/1 Maximum functional scope of the "significant properties"
• Single busbars with/without transfer busbar
• Double busbars with/without transfer busbar Applications
• Triple busbars The central busbar protection SIPROTEC 7SS85 includes the
following maximum quantity structure:
• Breaker-and-a-half layout method • 201) (15 with CP200) 3-phase meas. points (current transf.)
• Dual circuit-breaker systems and one or two current trans- • 41) (2 with CP200) 3-phase meas. points (voltage transf.)
former(s) per feeder
• Truck-Type Switchgear • 26 (22 with CP200) bays (feeders, bus couplers, bus-section
disconnections)
• Systems with combined busbars (alternatively main/transfer • 4 bus sections (protection zones)
busbar).
• T circuit arrangements • 4 bus couplers (with 1 or 2 current transformers)
• H connection arrangement with busbar coupler or disconnec- • 2 auxiliary busbars (bus sections without measuring function)
tion
• Optional distributed binary inputs and outputs via protection
• Ring busbars. interface (PI) or IEC 61850 (GOOSE) open new plant concepts
1) Please consider that the maximum possible number of binary inputs and outputs decreases as
Specify "significant properties" to define the maximum scope of
the number of current and voltage measuring points increases. Consequently, a configuration
functions of your device. Each significant property is defined by
a short designation. with 20 current measuring points permits only 43 binary inputs and 43 binary outputs.
SIPROTEC 7SS85
The busbar protection SIPROTEC 7SS85 is a selective, safe and
fast protection against busbar short circuits in medium, high
and extra-high voltage systems with a large variety of busbar
configurations. Selection of the device basis functionalities
(significant properties) and the modular hardware structure
permit optimum adaptation of the SIPROTEC 7SS85 to a large
variety of system configurations and functional requirements up
to a comprehensive station protection.
Selection of the device basis functionalities (significant proper-
ties) and the modular hardware structure permit optimum adap-
tation of the SIPROTEC 7SS85 to a large variety of system config-
urations and functional requirements.
Benefits
• Safety by measuring methods proven and reliable for
25 years.
• Simple creation and adaptation of the configuration by the
user over the entire service life [SIP5_GD_SS_LED_LED_LED_W3, 1, --_--]
• Clearly structured by fully graphical engineering and online Figure 2.14/2 SIPROTEC 7SS85 – busbar protection
plant visualization with DIGSI 5
• Protection of up to 20 feeders with a single device • Three interacting methods of measurement allow minimum
tripping times after busbar faults and ensure maximum
Functions stability in case of large short-circuit currents
The table "Functions and templates" shows all functions that are • The integrated circuit-breaker failure protection recognizes
available in the SIPROTEC 7SS85. All functions can be configured circuit-breaker faults in the event of a busbar short circuit and
as required with DIGSI 5. Using some functions requires the provides a trip signal for the circuit breaker at the line end.
appropriate number of free function points to be available in the The adjacent busbar trips if a coupling circuit breaker fails
device. The function point calculator in the online configurator
provides support in determining the required number of func-
• There is extensive monitoring of current transformer circuits,
measured value acquisition and processing, and trip circuits.
tion points for your device. The necessary function points are
This prevents the protection from functioning too tightly or
also shown during project engineering with DIGSI 5.
too loosely, which reduces the effort for routine checks
Characteristic key values of SIPROTEC 7SS85
• Various control possibilities, such as bay out of order, acquisi-
• Phase-selective measurement and display tion blocking from disconnectors and circuit breakers,
blocking of protection zones or circuit-breaker failure protec-
• Selective tripping of faulty busbar sections tion, make the adaptation to operationally caused special 2.14
states of your system easier
• Disconnector-independent check zone as additional tripping
criterion • Optional 1/3-pole or 3-pole circuit-breaker failure protection
using the integrated disconnector image to trip all circuit
• Shortest tripping times (<7 ms) to ensure network stability breakers of the busbar section affected
and minimize damage to the system
• Highest stability in case of external faults, also in case of • Optional end-fault protection for the protection of the section
transformer saturation, through stabilization with flowing between circuit breaker and current transformer for feeders
currents and bus couplers
• Operate curve with freely adjustable characteristic curve • Direct tripping of protection zones through external signals
sections
• Release of the tripping of a protection zone through addi-
• Additional operate curve with increased sensitivity for low- tional external signals
current faults, for example in resistance-grounded power
systems
• Release of tripping through additional, external phase-selec-
tive signals
• Fast recognition of internal and external faults requires only • Optional overcurrent protection phase / ground per bay
2 ms of saturation-free time of the current transformer
• Using closed iron core or linearized current transformers in a • Optional voltage and frequency protection for up to two 3-
plant is possible phase voltage transformers. This may also be used for the
implementation of an integrated undervoltage release.
• Adaptation of different current transformer ratios per parame-
terization • Optional cross stabilization as additional tripping release in 3-
pole encapsulated gas-insulated switchgear.
• Straight-forward dimensioning of current transformers and Function library and application templates
stabilization factor
The flexibility of the SIPROTEC 7SS85 permits a large number of

possible plant configurations to be protected. In place of appli-
cation templates, DIGSI 5 makes a comfortable, fully graphical
interface for complete engineering of your busbar protection
available.
Significant Features
Use the “Significant properties" to select the basic device func-
tionalities. These properties are oriented to typical plant constel-
lations or applications.
For the SIPROTEC 7SS85 devices, each significant property has a
standard variant allocated (V1, V2, V3). Additional expansion
modules permit the device to be adapted to your specific appli-
cation (see "Overview of the Standard Variants").
Table 2.14/2 shows the basic scope of bays and the degree of
expansion of the hardware in accordance with the allocated
standard variant. Additional bays require additional function
points.
The significant property E “Only Circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion" is special. Here, the main protection function is the circuit-
breaker failure protection. The device permits independent,
complete backup protection for a circuit-breaker failure in the
station to be implemented.
2.14
Significant features
Brief description 9 A B C C E
Only circuit-
Main protection function Busbar differential protection breaker failure
protection
Busbar sections 1 2 2 4 4 4
Disconnector Image No No Yes No Yes Yes
Measuring points, 3-phase 20 (15 with 20 (15 with 20 (15 with 20 (15 with 20 (15 with 20 (15 with
(maximum) CP200) CP200) CP200) CP200) CP200) CP200)
Bays (maximum) 26 (22 with 26 (22 with 26 (22 with 26 (22 with 26 (22 with 26 (22 with
CP200) CP200) CP200) CP200) CP200) CP200)
Bays (included in the basic scope) 3 4 4 6 6 6
Related standard variant V1 V2 V2 V3 V3 V3
Included measuring points, 3-phase 3 4 4 6 6 6
Table 2.14/2 Significant properties and standard variants
Configuration and parameterization

The single-line diagram describes the primary topology of your
plant. From the DIGSI 5 library, add a SIPROTEC 7SS85 device
and the necessary function blocks. Connect the primary
elements of the single-line diagram (busbars, current trans-
formers, disconnectors, circuit breakers) to the inputs and
outputs of the device. This establishes a topological reference.
In DIGSI 5 online mode, the information that is important for
commissioning, operation and analysis is shown in the single-
line diagram. The switch positions are shown in addition to the
measured values of the feeders and the protection zones.
Additionally, you obtain information about special operational
states, for example in "Bay out or order" or reduced protection of
selectivity, with direct coupling of busbars via disconnectors
(busbar shunt by disconnectors). [dw_DwKennIs, 1, en_US]
Using standardized SIPROTEC 5 hardware ensures flexible adap- Figure 2.14/3 Standard Characteristic Curve
tation to a large variety of busbar configurations and simple
expandability. 2.14
Operate curve with increased sensitivity

In resistance-grounded networks, single-phase short circuits are
in the range of the rated currents. An independent characteristic
curve is available to provide busbar protection with appropriate
sensitivity in these cases, too. This characteristic curve provides
separated parameters for the pickup threshold and for a limita-
tion of the action area. For this case, too, the integrated circuit-
breaker failure protection has a corresponding characteristic
curve. The characteristic curve is activated via a binary input.
Detecting a high residual voltage as a characteristic of a single-
pole fault is one usual criterion.
[dw_DwEmpKen, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.14/4 Sensitive Characteristic Curve
Disconnector image
With multiple busbars, disconnectors can be used to switch bays
to different busbar sections (protection zones). For a correct
assignment of the bay currents to the appropriate protection
zones, the positions of the disconnectors are needed in busbar • Storage of the disconnector setting in the event of an auxil-
failure protection and in circuit-breaker failure protection. The iary-voltage failure
disconnector image that is integrated in the device performs the
dynamic administration of the switching states. In the event of a
• Convenient graphical project engineering with the DIGSI 5
operating program.
busbar fault, the necessary trip commands for the individual
circuit breakers are also generated via the disconnector image. • Dynamic graphical visualization of the switchgear with
DIGSI 5 in online mode.
This function is characterized by the following features:
• Processing up to 26 bays and 4 busbar sections Project engineering of a double busbar
• Disconnector runtime and position monitoring The following Figure shows a typical structure of engineering
• Due to the program assignment "Disconnector NOT off = with DIGSI 5, the measuring points used, the function groups
Disconnector on", adjusted disconnector auxiliary contacts are used, and their interconnections.
not necessary.
2.14
[dw_Anwendbsp_Verbind-Feld-Koppl, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.14/5 Application example: Project engineering of a double busbar
Stub protection significant feature 9 (differential protection for a protection

zone), a tailored solution is available for you. With 2 such
devices, a so-called H connection can also be protected, if a
circuit breaker and a current transformer exist in the connection.
Protection of a single busbar
Single busbars can be segmented into several sections using
bus-section couplers (circuit breakers and current transformers)
or busbar disconnectors. With the variant with bus-section
coupler, every zone is selectively protectable.
With the variant with bus-section disconnectors, selective
protection is possible only with open disconnectors.
For this, the disconnector position must be recorded in the
device
According to the number of the busbar sections, the significant
feature 9 (differential protection for 1 protection zone), signifi-
cant feature A (differential protection for 2 protection zones)
and significant feature C (differential protection for 4 protection
zones) are used.
[dw_Dreibein, 1, en_US]
For more than 4 zones and bus-section couplers, two SIPROTEC
Figure 2.14/6 Application example: Stub 7SS85 devices are used.
The differential protection for so-called stubs requires a protec-

tion zone and inputs for 3 current measuring points. With the
2.14
[dw_LS_SS_Anlagen_1-teil, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.14/7 Application example: Single busbar with 7 feeders and bus-section coupler
H connections
H connections can be looked at as two single busbars, each with
2 feeders on both sides of the coupling or disconnection.
Accordingly, the significant feature A (differential protection for
2 protection zones) is used. The SIPROTEC 7SS85 must be
configured for 5 bays.
[dw_H-Schaltung, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.14/8 H connection with coupler or disconnector
Protection of a breaker-and-a-half arrangement Protection of a double busbar

Busbars in a breaker-and-a-half layout permit an uninterrupted Double-busbar systems allow the distribution of overall output
operation of infeed and feeders even during a busbar outage. and a flexible operations management. Each busbar or each
They are thus usually coupled during operation. switchable-busbar section can be selectively protected.
Breaker-and-a-half arrangements are protected like two single Since bays can be connected to various busbars (protection
busbars. A system as shown in Figure 2.14/9 requires a zones), the disconnector positions must be determined in the
SIPROTEC 7SS85 device with the significant property A (differen- busbar protection.
tial protection for 2 protection zones). The SIPROTEC 7SS85 In the integrated disconnector image, the dynamic updating of
must be designed for 10 bays (corresponds to 5 cross branches the switching state of the system occurs in accordance with the
or "diameters"). switch positions and the configured topology.
With more than 20 feeders (10 diameters), one SIPROTEC 7SS85 For a system in accordance with Figure 2.14/10 a SIPROTEC
device with the significant property 9 (Differential protection for
7SS85 device of the significant feature D (differential protection
1 protection zone) is used for each busbar. The middle circuit
for 4 protection zones and disconnector image) is needed.
breakers and current transformers are not relevant to the busbar
differential protection. In SIPROTEC 7SS85, however, a system-
encompassing circuit-breaker failure protection can be imple-
mented.
2.14
Figure 2.14/9 1 1/2 circuit-breaker arrangement
[dw_Doppel_SS_Anlagen, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.14/10 Double busbar with bus coupler and bus-section disconnection
Systems with transfer busbars or combined busbars the feeder. Mostly a transfer busbar of one´s own is available
for this operation state. If one of the main busbars, on the basis
Transfer busbars are provided in order to continue to operate
of the disconnector topology, can also be used as transfer
feeders in cases of circuit-breaker revision or defect. In this
busbar, this is called a combined busbar.
circuit-breaker substitution mode, the circuit breaker in the
affected coupler assumes the function of the circuit breaker of
Figure 2.14/11 Double busbar with combined busbar
For a system in accordance with Figure 2.14/11, a SIPROTEC

7SS85 device of the significant feature B (differential protection
for 2 protection zones and disconnector image) is needed.
2.14
Available
1

system
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 1-/3-pole CBFP ■
50EF End fault protection ■
86 Lockout ■
87B Busbar differential protection ΔI ■
Cross stabilization ■
Bay ■
Measured values, standard ■
CFC (Standard, Control) ■
2.14 CFC arithmetic ■
Control ■
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■
Monitoring and supervision ■
Circuit Breaker ■
Disconnector ■
Function-points class: 0
Table 2.14/3 SIPROTEC 7SS85 - Functions and application templates

1 Busbar standard
Busbar Protection – Standard variants
Standard variants
V1 1/2, 15 BI, 13 BO, 12 I

15 binary inputs
V2 1/2, 11 BI, 11 BO, 16 I
11 binary inputs
V3 2/3 15 BI, 15 BO, 24 I
15 binary inputs
2 expansion modules IO203
Table 2.14/4 Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SS85

2.14
Busbar Protection – Standard variants
2.14
Bay Controllers
Bay Controllers – SIPROTEC 6MD85, 6MD86
[dw_6md_anwendung, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 6MD85, 6MD86 The SIPROTEC 6MD86 devices are designed for applications in
the power transmission system. They can be used with a
SIPROTEC 5 bay controllers control and monitor plants of all
maximum variety of auxiliary functions. Both device types can
voltage levels. The large number of automatic functions permits
be flexibly configured in your hardware implementation.
the device to be used in all fields of energy supply.
The devices contain all important auxiliary functions that are Type 6MD85 6MD86
necessary for safe grid operation today. This includes functions
Circuit-breaker failure protection - Optional
for protection, control, measurement and monitoring. The large
Automatic reclosing - Optional
number of communication interfaces and communication proto-
Switching Sequences Optional ■
2.15 cols satisfies the requirements of communication-based selec-
tive protection and of automated operation. CFC arithmetic Optional ■
Measured-value Processing Optional ■
Number of switching devices Optional ■
greater than 4
functions. Because of a modular structure design, the
Synchrocheck Optional ■
SIPROTEC 5 bay controllers can always be flexibly adapted to
specific requirements.
Table 2.15/1 Essential differentiating characteristics
Overview of the SIPROTEC 6MD85 and 6MD86 devices
The SIPROTEC 5 bay controllers are based on the flexible and Common points:
powerful SIPROTEC 5 modular system. When ordering, you can
select from among various standard variants. Expandability
• Configuration of a large number of protection functions
through supplemental modules allows for individual adaptation • Modular expansion of the quantity structure
to specific applications.
• Optionally usable as phasor measurement unit (PMU)
Sets of devices
The bay controllers are differentiated into SIPROTEC 6MD85 and
• Powerful automation with CFC.
SIPROTEC 6MD86 product groups.
Although the SIPROTEC 6MD85 devices are tailored for applica-
tions in distribution systems, they can also be used in high-
voltage and extra-high voltage applications.
Bay Controllers – SIPROTEC 6MD85
Description
The SIPROTEC 6MD85 bay controller is a general-purpose control
and automation device with protection function. It has been
designed for utilization on all voltage levels, from distribution to
transmission. As a part of the SIPROTEC 5 family, it allows the
use of a large number of protection functions from the
SIPROTEC library. The modular hardware permits action-related
IOs to be integrated. Adapt the hardware exactly to your
requirements and rely on future-oriented system solutions with
Main function Bay controller for medium voltage and high to

extra-high voltage switchgear with integrated
operation and extensive protection functions.
Powerful automation, simple configuration
with DIGSI 5
75 binary inputs, 9 to 41 binary outputs [SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 1, --_--]
Hardware flexibility Flexibly adjustable and expandable I/O quantity Figure 2.15/2 SIPROTEC 6MD85 bay controller (1/3 device with
structure within the scope of the SIPROTEC 5 1/6 expansion module with key switch operation panel)
modular system. For great requirements placed
on the quantity structure, the device can be
extended in the second row. For example, this • Secure serial protection data communication, also over great
permits an additional 240 binary inputs (and distances and all available physical media (fiber-optic cable, 2-
more) to be used with the IO230 (see chapter wire connections and communication networks)
"Hardware")
• Capturing operational measured variables and protection
Housing width 1/3 × 19" to 2/1 × 19" function measured values to evaluate the plant state, to
Functions
• Synchrophasor measured values integrated with IEEE C37.118
DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as protocol (PMU)
required.
• Integrated bay controller with versatile protection function at 8 kHz or 320 s at 2 kHz)
from medium to extra-high voltage • Auxiliary functions for simple tests and commissioning
• Control of switching devices • Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure within the scope of
• Synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection the SIPROTEC 5 modular system
Applications
(reporting and GOOSE) The SIPROTEC 6MD85 bay controller is a general-purpose control
2.15
and automation device with protection function on the basis of
• Up to 4 pluggable communication modules, usable for
different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850, the SIPROTEC 5 system. The standard variants of the SIPROTEC
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 (serial and TCP), 6MD85 are delivered with instrument transformers. Further-
Modbus TCP) more, protection-class current transformers are also possible in
SIPROTEC 6MD85 so that protection functions can be used. Due
• Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR to its high flexibility, it is suitable as selective protection equip-
• Arc protection ment for overhead lines and cables with single-ended and multi-
ended infeed with two ends when protection communication is
• Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White- used. The device supports all SIPROTEC 5 system properties. It
paper requirements enables future-oriented system solutions with high investment
• Graphical logic editor to create powerful automation func- security and low operating costs.
tions in the device Application example
• Optional overcurrent protection for all voltage levels with 3- Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applica-
pole tripping tions. They comprise all basic configurations and default
• Also used in switchgear with breaker-and-a-half configuration settings.
• Selective protection of overhead lines and cables with single- The following application templates are available:
ended and multi-ended feeders using protection communica-
tion
• Overcurrent protection also configurable as emergency func-
tion
SIPROTEC 6MD85 standard contains the synchrocheck. The disconnectors are also
controlled by one function group each. Operational measured
• Double-busbar feeder with switchgear interlocking. values and energy measured values are calculated in the func-
SIPROTEC 6MD85 extended control tion group VI_3-phase, and are available for output on the
display, transmission to the station automation system and
• Additionally to 6MD85 standard, this includes the CFC blocks processing in the CFC. A switching sequence stored in the CFC
for switching sequences and arithmetic
which is triggered via a function key causes an automatic busbar
• Switching sequence for automatic busbar transfer preconfig- transfer.
ured (started by function key).
Application example with switching sequence
Figure 2.15/3 shows a simple application example with a
6MD85 on a double busbar. The circuit-breaker function group
2.15
[dw_6MD8-Bsp-Application-1, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.15/3 Application example: Bay controller 6MD85 for double busbar with switching sequence for busbar transfer
Available
1 2 3

Vx"
or "universal Vx"
86 Lockout ■
former
former
former
CD-3FO)
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, Avg ■ ■
Switching statistic counters ■ ■ ■
Circuit breaker wear monitoring ΣIx, I²t, 2P ■ 2.15
CFC arithmetic ■
Switching sequences function ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■
Disconnector ■ ■ ■
Table 2.15/2 SIPROTEC 6MD85 - Functions and application templates

1 Standard
2 Not Configured
3 Extended Control
Description
The SIPROTEC 6MD86 bay controller is a universal control and
automation device with a protection function. It is designed for
use in all voltage levels from distribution to transmission. As a
part of the SIPROTEC 5 family, it allows the use of a large
number of protection functions from the SIPROTEC library.
Adapt the hardware and the IO quantity structure exactly to
your requirements and enable future-oriented system solutions
with high investment security and low operating costs.
Main function Bay controller for medium voltage and high to

extra-high voltage switchgear with integrated
operation and comprehensive protection func-
tions. Powerful automation, simple configura-
tion with DIGSI 5.
Hardware flexibility Flexible adjustable and expandable I/O quantity [SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 1, --_--]
structure within the scope of the SIPROTEC 5 Figure 2.15/4 SIPROTEC 6MD86 (1/3 device with 1/6 expansion module
modular system. For great requirements placed with key switch operation panel)
on the quantity structure, the device can be
extended in the second row. For example,
240 (and more) binary inputs are possible with • Capturing operational measured variables and protection
the IO230 (see Section Hardware). function measured values to evaluate the plant state, to
Housing width 1/3 × 19" to 2/1 × 19" support commissioning, and to analyze faults
• Synchrophasor measured values with IEEE C37.118 protocol
Functions integrated (PMU)
DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as • Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s
required. at 8 kHz or 320 s at 2 kHz)
• Integrated bay controller with versatile protection function • Auxiliary functions for simple tests and commissioning
from medium to extra-high voltage
• Control of switching devices the SIPROTEC 5 modular system
• Synchrocheck, switchgear interlocking protection and switch- Applications

related protection functions, such as circuit-breaker failure The SIPROTEC 6MD86 bay controller is a universal control and
protection and automatic reclosing automation device with a protection function based on the
• Integrated electrical Ethernet RJ45 for DIGSI 5 and IEC 61850 SIPROTEC 5 system. The standard variants of the SIPROTEC
(reporting and GOOSE) 6MD86 are delivered with instrument transformers. Further-
2.15 more, protection-class current transformers are also possible in
• Up to 4 pluggable communication modules usable for SIPROTEC 6MD86 so that protection functions can be used. Due
different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850, IEC
to its high flexibility, it is suitable as selective protection equip-
60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 (serial+TCP), Modbus
ment for overhead lines and cables with single-ended and multi-
TCP)
ended infeeds when protection communication is used. The
• Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR device supports all SIPROTEC 5 system properties. It enables
• Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White- and low operating costs.
paper requirements
Application Templates
• Arc protection
tions in the device SIPROTEC 6MD86 standard double busbar
• Optional overcurrent protection with 3-pole tripping • Double busbar feeder with switchgear interlocking protection
• Also used in switchgear with breaker-and-a-half configuration • Synchrocheck for circuit breaker
• Overcurrent protection also configurable as emergency func- • Switching sequence for automatic busbar switchover precon-
tion figured (triggered by function key)
• Secure serial protection data communication, also over great
distances and all available physical media (fiber-optic cable, 2-
SIPROTEC 6MD86 breaker-and-a-half type 1 Double busbar with protection functions

• Control of a breaker-and-a-half diameter (3 circuit breakers, In Figure 2.15/5 the double busbar feeder is controlled and also
14 disconnectors) protected by a 6MD86. For this purpose, circuit-breaker failure
protection and automatic reclosing are activated in the Circuit
• Synchrocheck for the three circuit breakers with dynamic breaker function group. The function group VI_3-phase includes
measuring point switchover.
the protection functions overvoltage protection, frequency
SIPROTEC 6MD86 breaker-and-a-half type 2 protection and power protection. In contrast to Figure 2.15/3, it
• Control of part of a 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout bay is therefore connected to the circuit breaker so that the resulting
trip signals have a destination. Such linkages can be quickly and
• Supports concepts with multiple bay controllers per bay flexibly created in the DIGSI editor “Function-group connections”
(Figure 2.15/6).
• Circuit-breaker failure protection and automatic reclosing.
2.15
Figure 2.15/5 Application example: Bay controller 6MD86 for double busbar with protection functions
Breaker-and-a-half diameter with protection and control

systems
Figure 2.15/7 zshows a breaker-and-a-half diameter with
protection and control system. Protection is ensured by two line
protection devices SIPROTEC 7SL87 which also include circuit-
breaker failure protection and automatic reclosing of the three
circuit breakers. All swi tching devices and the synchrocheck of
the circuit-breakers are controlled by the bay controller
SIPROTEC 6MD86.Figure 2.15/8 shows the functions of
[Schutzobjekt, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 6MD86.
Figure 2.15/6 Assignment of the function group with protection func-

tions to the switch (protected object)
2.15
2.15
[dw_1-5_CB-Feldleit-, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.15/7 Application example: Breaker-and-a-half layout with one bay controller and two line protection devices (overview)
Figure 2.15/8 shows the principle of dynamic changeover of bilities each for both voltages, depending on the position of the
measured voltage values for the synchrocheck functions of the disconnectors and the circuit-breakers. For the two exterior
three circuit-breakers in the bay controller SIPROTEC 6MD86. circuit-breakers QA1 and QA3, there is only one possibility for
Every synchrocheck function (ANSI number 25) requires the two one voltage (that is, the adjacent busbar), whereas the other
voltages Vsync1 and Vsync2 (feeder voltage and reference voltage is connected with one of three possibilities (also
voltage). For the central circuit-breaker QA2 there are two possi- depending on the position of the switching device).
2.15
Figure 2.15/8 Application example: Breaker-and-a-half layout with one bay controller and two line protection devices (detail for bay controller)
[Spannungskanäle, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.15/9 Mapping of the possible voltage channels to the three circuit-breaker function groups
Figure 2.15/9 shows the mapping in the editor “Function Group The ID number of the measured values is used to select the pres-
Connections”. All voltages that are possible as feeder or refer- ently applied operational voltages in a CFC (Figure 2.15/10).
ence voltage for the synchrocheck are assigned to the inputs
Vsync1 or Vsync2.
2.15
[CFC, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.15/10 CFC for selection of the synchrocheck reference voltages
Phasor Measurement Unit When selecting the option “Phasor Measurement Unit”, the
devices determine current and voltage phasors, provide them
PMUs measure current and voltage by amount and phase at
with highly accurate time stamps and transmit them for analysis
selected stations of the transmission system. The high-precision
together with other measured values (frequency, speed of
time synchronization (via GPS) allows comparing measured
frequency change) using the IEEE C37.118 communication
values from different substations far apart and drawing conclu-
protocol, see Figure 2.15/12. Using synchrophasors and a suit-
sions as to the system state and dynamic events such as power
swing conditions. able analysis program (for example SIGUARD PDP) it is possible
to automatically detect power swings and trigger alarms, which
are sent to the control center, for example.
[Zeigermessung (PMU), 1, --_--]
2.15
[dw_struct_WAM, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.15/12 Connection of 3 Phasor Mesurement Units with two Phasor Data Concentrators (PDCs) SIGUARD PDP
When using the PMU function, a function group “FG PMU” is protocol. There, the data can be received, stored and processed
created in the device. This function group calculates the phasors by one or more clients. Up to three client IP addresses can be
and analog values, conducts the time stamping and sends the assigned in the device.
data to the selected Ethernet interface using the IEEE C37.118
2.15
Figure 2.15/13 Application example: Double busbar with 6MD86, used as bay controller and Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
2.15
Available
1 2 3 4

Vx"
or "universal Vx"
86 Lockout ■
former
former
former
CD-3FO)
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, Avg ■ 2.15
CFC arithmetic ■ ■ ■ ■
Switching sequences function ■ ■
Disconnector ■ ■ ■ ■
Table 2.15/3 SIPROTEC 6MD86 - Functions and application templates
1 Not Configured
2 1.5 CB type1
3 Standard Double Busbar
4 1.5 CB type2
2.15
Bay Controllers – Standard variants
Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 6MD85

J1 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V
11 binary inputs
4 sensitive current transformer inputs,
Includes the base module with PS201 and IO202 modules
J2 1/2, 27 BI, 17 BO, 4 I, 4 V
27 binary inputs
J4 2/3, 43 BI, 25 BO, 4 I, 4 V
43 binary inputs
Expansion modules 2 x IO207
J5 5/6, 59 BI, 33 BO, 4 I, 4 V
59 binary inputs
Includes the base module with PS201 and IO202 modules 2.15
J7 1/1, 75 BI, 41 BO, 4 I, 4 V
75 binary inputs
Table 2.15/4 Standard variants for bay controllers SIPROTEC 6MD85
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 6MD86

The standard variants of the 6MD86 also include an Ethernet communication module, a large display and key switch (starting with type K2)
K1 1/3, 11 BI, 9BO, 4 I, 4 V
1 electrical Ethernet module ETH-L1-2EL
11 binary inputs
K2 1/2, 27 BI, 17 BO, 4 I, 4 V
27 binary inputs
K4 2/3, 43 BI, 25 BO, 4 I, 4 V
43 binary inputs
K5 5/6, 59 BI, 33 BO, 4 I, 4 V
2.15 59 binary inputs
K7 1/1, 75 BI, 41 BO, 4 I, 4 V
75 binary inputs
K8 1/1, 67 BI, 39 BO, 8 I, 8 V

67 binary inputs
Expansion modules IO202, 3 x IO207
Table 2.15/5 Standard variants for bay controllers SIPROTEC 6MD86

2.15
2.15
Fault Recorder
Fault Recorder – SIPROTEC 7KE85
[dw_7KE85_anwendung, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7KE85 • Additional quality information supplements the records

SIPROTEC Fault Recorders are a component part of the • Power Quality recordings
SIPROTEC 5 modular system and support all SIPROTEC 5 system
properties. They can be used individually as well as universally • Recording of GOOSE messages in a continuous recorder.
within the scope of system solutions.
Distinguishing features
The SIPROTEC 7KE85 Fault Recorder is designed to suit present
and future requirements in a changing energy market. Powerful The SIPROTEC 7KE85 Fault Recorder can be configured with
and reliable monitoring combined with flexible engineering and different basic functions.
communication features provide the basis for maximum supply
reliability. Basic functions
2.16 Commissioning and maintenance work can be completed safely, Fault Recorder Comprehensive flexible, event-triggered and
continuous recording options
functions. Through their modular structure, SIPROTEC 5 fault PMU Synchrophasor measurement (PMU) as per
C37.118 (2011)
recorders can always be flexibly adapted to specific require-
ments. Power Quality record- Continuous measurement of events and fail-
ings ures in the electrical energy supply system
The SIPROTEC 7KE85 Fault Recorder has the following additional according to IEC 61000-4-30
functionalities compared to the SIPROTEC 5 protection devices
and bay controllers.
• Sampling configurable from 1 to 16 kHz
• Mass storage of 16 GB
• All recorders capable of running in parallel
• Individually triggered recorders
• Continuous recorders
• Separate activation of the recorders
• Freely configurable memory for each recorder
Description
Powerful fault recorders with integrated measurement of
synchrophasors (PMU) according to IEEE C37.118 and power
quality measurement according to IEC 61000-4-30. Due to the
great flexibility of trigger functions, the SIPROTEC 7KE85 is
ideally suited for monitoring the entire energy value added
chain, from generation to distribution. The powerful automation
and flexible configuration with DIGSI 5 complements the range
of functions.
Main function Fault Recorder

Inputs and outputs 4 predefined standard variants with up to
40 current transformers and 40 voltage trans-
formers, 43 binary inputs, 33ìbinary outputs
modular system
Housing width 1/3 to 1/1 x 19"
[SIP5_GD_SS_LED_LED_LED_W3, 1, --_--]
Benefits
Figure 2.16/2 Fault recorder SIPROTEC 7KE85 (1/3 device with expan-
• Clearly organized documentation and focused analysis of sion modules)
power system processes and failures
• Data security and transparency over the entire lifecycle of the • Lossless data compression
• Purposeful and simple operation of the devices and software • Time synchronization via Precision Time Protocol (PTP)
IEEE 1588 protocol, IRIG-B, DCF77, and SNTP
• Increased reliability and quality of the engineering process • Routing of the measured values to the individual recorders as
desired
• Powerful communication components ensure secure and • Combination of the measuring groups for the power calcula-
effective solutions tion as desired
• Full compatibility between IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2 • Quality attributes for representing the instantaneous signal
quality in the time signal view
• Highly available Ethernet communication due to integrated
Ethernet redundancy protocols PRP and HSR • Trigger functions of a function block are fundamental compo-
nent value, RMS value, zero-sequence, positive-sequence,
Functions
negative-sequence system power, frequency power, Σ active
DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as power, Σ reactive power and Σ apparent power
required.
• Level trigger and gradient trigger for every trigger function
• Up to 40 analog channels
• Flexible cross trigger and system trigger, manual trigger
• Fast-Scan Recorder 2.16
• Creation of independent trigger functions with the graphic
• Up to 2 slow-scan recorders automation editor CFC (continuous function chart)
• Up to 5 continuous recorders and 2 trend recorders • Trigger functions via a combination of single-point, double-
point indications, analog values, binary signals, Boolean
• Power Quality recordings according to IEC 61000-4-30 signals and GOOSE messages
(harmonics, THD, TDD - in preparation)
• Consistent monitoring concept
• Sequence-of-events recorder for continuous recording of
binary status changes and IEC 61850 GOOSE messages • Auxiliary functions for simple tests and commissioning
• Usable as Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) according to • Special test mode for commissioning
IEEE C37.118 protocol
• Transmission of the records and triggering via IEC 61850 • Integrated electrical Ethernet RJ45 for DIGSI 5 and IEC 61850
GOOSE messages
• Variable sampling frequencies parameterizable between 1 kHz • Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
and 16 kHz • Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDWE White-
paper requirements
• Distribution of the mass storage of 16 GB to the various
recorders by the user as desired
• Intelligent monitoring routines of the storage medium ensure
a high level of availability and integrity for archived data
• Up to 4 pluggable communication modules usable for Application Templates

different and redundant protocols
• Intelligent terminal technology enable prewiring and a simple tions. They comprise basic configurations and default settings.
device replacement
Applications
Fault Recorder 4 V / 4 I / 11 BI
The fault recorder is for use in medium, high and extra-high
voltage systems and in power plants with comprehensive trigger • Application templates related to the monitoring of a total of 8
current/voltage transformers.
and recording functions. With the fault recorder SIPROTEC
7KE85, you receive a clearly organized and event-related evalua- Fault Recorder 8 V / 11 BI
tion and documentation of your power system processes. You
• Application templates related to the monitoring of a total of 8
are thereby able to analyze failures in a targeted manner and voltage transformers.
optimize your power system.
Fault Recorder 8 V / 8 I / 19 BI
Typical processes to be monitored and documented:
• Application templates related to the monitoring of a total of
• System incidents, such as critical load cases or short circuits 16 current/voltage transformers.
• Failures of the quality of supply Fault Recorder 20 V / 20 I / 43 BI
• Dynamic behavior of generators • Application templates related to the monitoring of a total of

40 current/voltage transformers.
• Closing and breaking operations of transformers (saturation
response)
• Power fluctuations and power-swing cycles
• Test runs during commissioning.
2.16
[dw_7KE85_Applicationsbsp-1, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.16/3 Application example: Fault Recorder SIPROTEC 7KE85 for monitoring a feeder
Fault recorder for monitoring feeders feeders. In these examples, the various triggers are provided via
function group “FG VI_3-phase” and are available to the function
Figure 2.16/3 and Figure 2.16/4 show simple application exam-
group “FG Recorder” and, thus, to the event-triggered recorders.
ples with a SIPROTEC 7KE85, which is connected for monitoring
In parallel, individually generated trigger functions (combination
of GOOSE messages, single-point/double-point indications,

binary signals, etc.) can start a recorder via the CFC and thus
generate a fault record.
[dw_7KE85_Applicationsbsp-2, 2, en_US]
2.16
Figure 2.16/4 Application example: Fault Recorder SIPROTEC 7KE85 for monitoring two feeders
[dw_7KE85_Applicationsbsp-PMU, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.16/5 Application example: Double busbar with SIPROTEC 7KE85 used as a Fault Recorder and Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
Fault Recorder with PMU

When the PMU function is used, a “FG PMU” function group is
2.16 created in the device, see Figure 2.16/5. This function group
calculates the phasor and analog values, performs the time
stamping and transmits the data with the protocol IEEE C37.118
to the selected Ethernet interface. There, they can be received
from one or more clients, saved and processed. Up to three IP
addresses from clients can be assigned in the device.
Phasor Measurement Unit
PMUs measure current and voltage by amount and phase at
selected stations of the transmission system. The high-precision
time synchronization (via GPS) allows comparing measured
values from different substations far apart and drawing conclu-
sions as to the system state and dynamic events such as power
swing conditions.
When selecting the option “Phasor Measurement Unit”, the

devices determine current and voltage phasors, provide them
with highly accurate time stamps and transmit them for analysis
together with other measured values (frequency, speed of
frequency change) using the IEEE C37.118 communication
protocol, see Figure 2.16/. Using synchrophasors and a suitable
analysis program (for example SIGUARD PDP) it is possible to
automatically detect power swings and trigger alarms, which
are sent to the control center, for example.
[Zeigermessung (PMU), 1, --_--]
2.16
Figure 2.16/7 Connection of 3 Phasor Mesurement Units with two Phasor Data Concentrators (PDCs) SIGUARD PDP
When using the PMU function, a function group “FG PMU” is protocol. There, the data can be received, stored and processed
created in the device. This function group calculates the phasors by one or more clients. Up to three client IP addresses can be
and analog values, conducts the time stamping and sends the assigned in the device.
data to the selected Ethernet interface using the IEEE C37.118
[dw_7KE85_Applicationsbsp-PMU, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.16/8 Application example: Double busbar with SIPROTEC 7KE85 used as a fault recorder and Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
2.16
Pre-trigger time (max.)
Sampling/resolution
Common data class
Seal-in time (max.)

(IEC 61850)
Posting time
SMV/MV 3s 90 s 1 kHz to 16 kHz -
Fast-Scan recorder
SPS 3s 90 s 1 ms -
MV 90 s 5400 s MVs every 10 1 - 3000 cycles
Slow-Scan recorder ms
SPS 90 s 5400 s 1 ms -
Continuous recorder MV - - MVs every 10 1 s - 900 s
ms
SMV = Sample Measured Values / SPS = Single Point Status / MV = Measured Values
Table 2.16/1 Overview of the recorders
Recorder for this purpose. Furthermore, up to 2 independent instances of

the slow-scan recorder can be created.
Fast-Scan recorder
Continuous recorder
Transient processes, short circuits or ground faults and also the
behavior of protection devices can be analyzed by using the The SIPROTEC 7KE85 has up to 5 continuous recorders that are
fast-scan recorder. Transient processes can be tripped, for used for data acquisition of the analog quantities and internally
example, by switching operations. The fast-scan recorder can recorded measured values over longer time frames. This makes
record the history of the sampled values of all analog inputs, it possible to perform an exact long-term analysis of the system
internally calculated measured values and binary signals when behavior.
an error occurs for over 90 seconds with a pre-trigger time of
For each recorded quantity of the continuous recorder, an
3 seconds. The sampling rate can be set between 20 and
average value is formed over an adjustable time period and
320 sampled values per cycle. This corresponds to a sampling
stored in memory. Each of these recorders can be separately
frequency of 1 kHz to 16 kHz.
activated. The user can set the available memory space in the
Binary changes are recorded at a resolution of 1 ms. The input ring archive specifically for each recorder.
signals are analyzed according to the specified trigger condi-
Trigger functions
tions and recorded if the limiting values are violated. This
recorded fault record includes the pre-trigger time, the trigger The event-triggered recorders (fast-scan and slow-scan) have a
point and the fault recording. In addition, the cause that trips large number of analog and binary triggers that enable the user
the trigger is saved. The trigger limiting values and record times to record the particular system problem exactly and avoid
can easily be set with DIGSI 5. unnecessary recordings. The input signals are thus queried
corresponding to the trigger conditions and start the fault
Slow-Scan recorder
record recording. In the SIPROTEC 7KE85, all triggers can also be
The function principal resembles that of the fast-scan recorder, assigned multiple times to the various recorders. 2.16
but the values are calculated every 10 ms and communicated
Analog trigger
over a configurable interval. The averaging interval can be
configured from a nominal period up to 3000 nominal periods. The analog triggers are essentially subdivided into level and
The averaged values are stored by the slow-scan recorder as a gradient triggers. Level triggers monitor measurands for
recording in mass storage. Binary changes are recorded, similar conformity to the configured limiting values (min/max). As soon
to the fast-scan recorder, at a resolution of 1 ms. as the measurand exceed or fall below the respective limiting
value, the trigger is tripped. Gradient triggers respond to the
Slow-scan recorders are therefore very well-suited for detecting,
level change over time.
for example, the load conditions before, during and after a
failure and, thus, also power-swing cycles. Each analog trigger can be configured as primary, secondary or
percentage value. A distinction is made here between
The slow-scan recorder can record the history of sampled values
frequency, voltage, current and power triggers. With current
from all analog inputs, internally calculated measured values
and voltage as trigger variables, it is possible to select between
and binary signals when an error occurs for over 90 minutes
fundamental, RMS or symmetric components.
with a pre-trigger time of 90 seconds. Here, too, the input
signals are analyzed according to the specified trigger condi- Binary trigger
tions and recorded if the limiting values are violated. These fault A binary trigger starts a recording via the logical status change
records include the pre-trigger time, the trigger point and the of a binary signal. Along with the manual trigger, which can be
fault recording. In addition, the cause that trips the trigger is tripped via the device keypad, DIGSI 5 or any IEC 61850 client
saved. The user sets trigger values and record times in DIGSI 5 (for example, SICAM PAS/PQS), the triggering can occur via
binary input (external trigger) or IEC 61850 GOOSE messages

via the communication network. The logic triggers are imple-
mented via the powerful graphical logic editor (CFC). In this
case, the free combination of all available analog values (abso-
lute values or phases), binary signals, Boolean signals, GOOSE
messages, single-point and double-point indications is possible
via Boolean or arithmetic operations.
As a user, you can thus set the trigger conditions appropriate for
your problem and start the recording.
2.16
Available
1 2 3 4

Measured values, extended: Min, Max, Avg ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■
FSR Fast-scan recorder FSR ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
SSR Slow-scan recorder SSR ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CR Continuous recorder CR ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
TR Trend recorder TR ■
PQR Power Quality recordings (functionalities) PQR ■
Sequence of events recorder SOE ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
ExTrFct Extended trigger functions ExTrFct ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Table 2.16/2 SIPROTEC 7KE85 - Functions and application templates

1 Fault recorder 4V/4C/11BI
2 Fault recorder 8V/11BI
2.16
Fault Recorder – Standard variants
Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7KE85

N1 1/3 x 19”, 4 V, 4 I, 11 BI, 9 BO
11 binary inputs
N2 1/3 x 19”, 8 V, 11 BI, 3 BO
8 voltage transformer inputs,
11 binary inputs,
N5 1/2 x 19”, 8 V, 8 I, 19 BI, 15 BO
19 binary inputs
N6 1 x 19”, 20 V, 20 I, 43 BI, 33 BO
43 binary inputs
The technical data of the device can be found in the device

2.16
manual www.siemens.com/siprotec
SIPROTEC 5 System
SIPROTEC 5 System
Chapter
Functional Integration 3.1
Protection 3.2
Control 3.3
Automation 3.4
Monitoring 3.5
Data Acquisition and Recording 3.6
Communication 3.7
Safety and Security Concept 3.8
Test 3.9
Engineering 3.10
Hardware 3.11
SIPROTEC 5 System
Functional Integration
cation flexibility, this expands the field of application and opens

Due to the modular construction of their hardware and
up a wide variety of possibilities in meeting requirements for
software, and their functional integration, SIPROTEC 5
present and future power systems. With SIPROTEC 5, you are on
devices are well suited for all tasks in the energy sector.
the safe side for your application. The following figure shows
The SIPROTEC 5 devices include:
the possible functional expansion of a SIPROTEC 5 device.
• Protection
• Control and automation
• Supervision and monitoring
• Data acquisition and logging
• Communication and cyber security
• Test and Diagnosis
Due to the modular design of the hardware and software and
the powerful engineering tool DIGSI 5, SIPROTEC 5 is ideally suit-
able for protection, automation, measurement and monitoring
tasks for the operation and monitoring of modern power
systems.
The devices are not only pure protection and electronic control
units; their performance enables them to assure functional inte-
gration of desired depth and scope. For example, they can also
serve to perform monitoring, synchrophasor measurement
(phasor measurement), powerful fault recording, a wide range
of measuring functions and much more, concurrently, and they
have been designed to facilitate future extensions.
[dw_funktionale-Integration, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5 provides extensive, precise data acquisition and bay
level logging for these functions. Combined with its communi- Figure 3.1/1 Possible functional expansion of SIPROTEC 5 devices
3.1
SIPROTEC 5 System
Functional Integration – Instrument and protection-class current transformers
Figure 3.1/2 Protection of a transformer
Faster results with application templates (FGs) correspond to the primary components (protected object,
transformer side 1, transformer side 2, neutral point, trans-
A common function library makes available all protection, auto-
former; circuit-breaker switching devices) thereby simplifying
3.1 mation, monitoring and auxiliary functions for the SIPROTEC 5
the direct reference to the actual system. For example, if your
devices. The same functions are truly the same for all devices.
switchgear includes 2 circuit breakers, this is also represented by
Once established, configurations can be transferred from device
2 “Circuit breaker" function groups
to device. This results in substantially reduced engineering
effort. Instrument and protection-class current transformers
Predefined application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for The flexibility of the SIPROTEC 5 family enables even greater
every device type. These already contain basic configurations, functional integration and parallel processing of an extremely
required functions and default settings. In addition, you can wide range of functions. The modular hardware enables an
save a device as a master template in a user-defined library and application-specific device configuration. If you also want to use
use it again as such for your typical applications. This saves time the Synchrophasor measurement (phasor measurement) func-
and money. The capability of saving user-defined application tion, that is, the high-precision acquisition of current and
templates is in preparation. voltage phasors and the variables derived from them such as
power and frequency, this function can be assigned to the
Figure 3.1/2 shows an example of a transformer in a system
measuring input. Another possible application is monitoring
configuration in which the functions in the application template
power quality characteristics.
are combined into function groups (FGs). The function groups
SIPROTEC 5 System
Functional Integration – Instrument and protection-class current transformers
Figure 3.1/3 shows the connection to an instrument trans-

former and protection-class current transformer for a feeder.
The necessary protection functions are assigned to the protec-
tion-class current transformer and the measuring functions are
assigned to the instrument transformer according to the applica-
tion.
The high-precision measured values and status information
provided by the SIPROTEC 5 devices can be transmitted over the
high-performance communication system to automation
systems such as a SICAM substation automation technology and
power systems control or central analysis systems (for example,
SIGUARD PDP). In particular, the control and monitoring of intel-
ligent power systems require information from power genera-
tors (conventional or renewable energies) and from consumers
(lateral lines). The required information may be measured
values, switching statuses, or messages from protection and
monitoring functions. In addition to performing local protection,
control and monitoring tasks, the SIPROTEC 5 devices are an
excellent data source. The flexible communication among the
devices enables them to be combined in various communication
topologies. In this context, the widely used Ethernet-based
communications standard IEC 61850 offers many advantages.
[dw_Anschl_Feldgeraete, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.1/3 Connection of bay units to instrument transformers and

protection-class current transformers
The modular, flexible structure of the hardware and soft- 3.1

ware ensures perfectly customized solutions for all your
requirements in the network.
With SIPROTEC 5, you have flexibility throughout the entire
product lifecycle, and your investment is thus protected.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – The distance-protection function (ANSI 21, 21N) – classical method
Protection voltages and the use of a voltage memory make optimal direc-
tion determination possible.
Quadrilateral zone characteristics
The quadrilateral operate curve permits separate setting of the
reactance X and the resistance R. The resistance portion R can
be set separately for errors with or without ground involvement.
This characteristic is therefore best suited for detecting high-
impedance errors. Applications with ground-fault-dependent
reactance radius per zone can be covered as well by simply
using additional distance zones. Each distance zone can be set
separately to operate for ground faults only, for phase faults
only or for all fault types.
The distance zones can be set forward, backward or non-direc-
tional (Figure 3.2/2).
[dw_schutz, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.2/1 SIPROTEC 5 – functional integration – protection
SIPROTEC 5 provides all the necessary protection functions to

address reliability and security of power systems and their
components. System configurations in multiple busbars and
breaker-and-a-half layouts are both supported. The functions are
based on decades of experience in putting systems into opera-
tion, including suggestions from our customers.
The modular, functional structure of SIPROTEC 5 allows excep-
tional flexibility and perfectly matches the protection function-
ality to the conditions of the system and is still capable of
further changes in the future.
[Dw_polygonale-zone, 1, en_US]
The available device functions are described in the following
sections. Figure 3.2/2 Quadrilateral zone characteristics with the example of
4 zones
The distance-protection function (ANSI 21, 21N) – classical
method
MHO zone characteristics
SIPROTEC 5 provides 6-system distance protection featuring
With the MHO characteristics, the MHO circle expansion guaran-
algorithms that have been proven in previously supplied
tees safe and selective operation for all types of faults. The circle
SIPROTEC protection devices. This measuring method is referred
expands to the source impedance but never more than the
to as the “classical method”.
selected impedance radius. The Figure 3.2/3 shows the charac-
By parallel calculation and monitoring of all six impedance teristics for a forward fault.
3.2 loops, a high degree of sensitivity and selectivity is achieved for
all types of faults. All methods of neutral-point treatment (arc-
suppression-coil-ground, isolated, solidly or low-impedance
grounded) are reliably handled. Depending on the respective
device type, one-pole or three-pole tripping is possible. The
distance protection is suitable for cables and overhead lines with
or without series compensation.
The device offers quadrilateral as well as MHO zone characteris-
tics. The characteristics can be used separately for phase and
ground faults.
Thus, high-impedance ground faults can, for instance, be
covered with the quadrilateral characteristic and phase faults
with the MHO characteristic. The evaluation of quadrature
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) (ANSI 21, 21N)
Arrangements for breaker-and-a-half layout

When the cores of the two current transformers are connected
in parallel, the resultant measured current will be the sum of the
two currents flowing in the current transformers. This summa-
tion current corresponds to the current flowing into the feeder
and is therefore used for the power protection functions and
other functions. This method is commonly used. SIPROTEC 5
devices now provide sufficient measuring inputs to connect two
or several sets of current transformers separately to the device.
In this case, the summation is carried out in software internally.
The distance-protection function detects possible saturation of
only one of the current transformers and can thus prevent
unwanted pickup in case of an external error with high current
flowing. Through the separately measured currents, separate
circuit-breaker failure protection functions can be activated for
both switches. Moreover, the separately measured currents
allow a full-fledged differential protection for the “end zone”
between the current transformers if the feeder is switched off
(see STUB differential protection, ANSI 87-STUB).
Parallel-line compensation
[Dw_MHO-zone, 1, en_US] Wrong distance-protection measurements due to the effect of
parallel lines can be compensated by detecting the parallel-line
Figure 3.2/3 MHO zone characteristics, for example, with 6 zones
ground current. Parallel-line compensation can be used for
distance protection as well as for fault location.
Selectable number of distance zones
Load compensation
The number of distance zones can be freely adapted according
to the application requirements. The functions that use a The distance protection function provides options to compen-
dependent zone, such as the permissive overreach transfer trip sate the load influence on the radius measurement.
scheme, all parameterized zones from the distance protection Elimination of disturbance variables
are available (the use of the zone in the distance protection
Digital filters render the device immune to disturbance variables
itself is not affected by this). Each distance zone has its own
contained in the measured values. In particular, the influence of
timer, separately dedicated to 1-phase and multi-phase errors.
DC components, capacitive voltage transformers and frequency
The flexibility of the SIPROTEC 5 device family provides optimal
changes is considerably reduced. A special method of measure-
adaptation to each application. The distance protection will
ment is employed in order to assure selectivity of protection
always provide exactly the right number of distance zones.
during current-transformer saturation.
Load zone
Measuring-voltage failure detection
In order to guarantee reliable discrimination between load oper-
Tripping the distance protection is blocked automatically in the
ation and short circuit – especially on long lines under large
event of a measuring voltage outage, thus preventing unwanted
loads – an adjustable load range is used. Impedances within this
tripping. Distance protection is blocked if one of the voltage
load range do not result in unwanted tripping in the distance
monitoring functions or the auxiliary contact of the voltage-
zones.
transformer circuit breaker picks up and in this case the EMER-
Four pickup methods GENCY definite time-overcurrent protection can be activated.
The following pickup methods can be employed optionally: Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) (ANSI 21,
• Overcurrent pickup I>>> 21N)
Under extreme conditions, load currents and high fault resis-
• Voltage-dependent overcurrent pickup V/I tances can influence the selectivity. The distance protection 3.2
• Voltage-dependent and phase-angle-dependent overcurrent with reactance method (RMD) function reduces the unfavorable
pickup V/I j influence of high fault resistances at high loads.
• Impedance pickup Z< Load compensation is a part of the principle
Absolute phase selectivity If the electrical power system shows inhomogeneities, for
example, different impedance angles of the infeeds, this can
The distance-protection function incorporates a well-proven, also affect the radius of the distance protection. The reactance
highly sophisticated phase selection algorithm. The pickup of method compensates this influence via adjustable compensa-
healthy phases due to the negative effect of the short-circuit tion angles.
currents and voltages in other phases is reliably eliminated. This
phase selection algorithm makes appropriate tripping decisions
and ensures correct distance measurement in a wide field of
application.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Impedance protection for transformers (ANSI 21T)
The distance protection function with reactance method (RMD): Arrangements for breaker-and-a-half layout
• Works in power systems with a grounded neutral point The function RMD is just as suitable as the classical distance-
protection function for breaker-and-a-half layouts.
• Is a selective short-circuit protection for lines and cables
supplied from one or more ends in radial, looped, or meshed Parallel-line compensation
systems, Influences on the distance measurements as a result of parallel
• Is used as a backup protection for busbars, transformers, and lines can compensate for the RMD function by detection of the
other lines parallel line ground current.
• Is suitable for use at all voltage levels. Elimination of disturbance variables
The distance-protection function with reactance method (RMD) Digital filters make the RMD function insensitive to disturbance
can, as an alternative or additionally, be used for the distance- variables in the measured values. In particular, the influence of
protection function with the classical method. DC components, capacitive voltage transformers and frequency
changes is considerably reduced. A special method of measure-
Quadrilateral zone characteristics ment is employed in order to assure selectivity of protection
The quadrilateral operate curve permits separate setting for the during current-transformer saturation.
reactance X and the fault resistance RF. Each distance zone can Measuring-voltage failure detection
be configured separately to operate for ground faults only, for
phase faults only or for all fault types. All distance zones can be Tripping the distance protection is blocked automatically in the
set forward, backward or non-directional. event of a measuring voltage outage, thus preventing unwanted
tripping. The RMD function is blocked if one of the voltage
The RMD function calculates up to 7 impedance loops A-gnd, B- monitoring functions or the auxiliary contact of the voltage-
gnd, C-gnd, A-B, B-C, C-A, and A-B-C. The pickup method is the transformer circuit breaker picks up and the EMERGENCY defi-
impedance pickup Z<. The evaluation of healthy voltages, the nite time-overcurrent protection can be activated.
use of a voltage memory and the evaluation of delta values and
symmetric components make optimal direction determination Impedance protection for transformers (ANSI 21T)
possible. SIPROTEC 5 offers a 6-system impedance protection with up to
MHO zone characteristics 4 impedance zones, especially for the use as backup protection
on power transformers.
With the MHO characteristics, the MHO circle expansion guaran-
tees safe and selective protection behavior. The circle expands The function
to the source impedance but never more than the selected • protects transformers as backup protection for transformer
impedance radius. As an alternative to the quadrilateral zone differential protection
characteristics, the RMD function for phase errors with MHO
zone characteristics can be used if there are requirements for
• is used as backup protection for the generator transformer
and the generator in power plant units.
the compatibility with existing distance-protection systems.
Selectable number of distance zones
• functions as backup protection in the event of reverse power
flow to faults in the upstream electrical power system beyond
The number of distance zones can be freely adapted according one transformer
to the application requirements. Depending on the application, the loop selection can be
Load zone controlled. In active grounded power systems, all 6 measuring
loops work independently of each other. The general release is
In order to guarantee reliable discrimination between load oper-
performed via the minimum current criterion. In non-active
ation and short circuit – especially on long lines under large
grounded power systems (for example, generator protection),
loads – an adjustable load range is used. Impedances within this
the measuring loop selection is controlled by an overcurrent
load range do not result in unwanted tripping in the distance
pickup with undervoltage stability.
zones.
By using the frequency-tracking sampled values, the impedance
Absolute phase selectivity
is measured over a broad frequency range. This is advantageous
3.2 The distance-protection function with reactance method (RMD) for island networks or power plant units, for example, for
includes a highly sophisticated algorithm for the adaptive loop startup operations.
selection. Different loop-selection criteria are processed in
Quadrilateral zone characteristics
parallel. The loop-selection criteria work with jump detection,
delta value detection, symmetric components and current, The quadrilateral operate curve permits separate setting of the
voltage and impedance comparison methods. The pickup of reactance X and the resistance R for phase-to-ground and phase-
healthy phases due to the negative influence of short-circuit to-phase loops. The quadrilateral characteristic is a rectangle in
currents and voltages in other phases is thus reliably eliminated. the impedance plane. Within the function, a maximum of 4
This adaptive loop-selection algorithm makes appropriate trip- impedance zones can be operated simultaneously They can be
ping decisions and ensures correct distance measurement in a set forward, backward or non-directional. Each impedance zone
wide field of application. has its own timer.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Overexcitation protection (ANSI 24)
Direction determination conditions of the network always with the right synchronization
parameters.
The direction is determined with saved prefault voltages or with
negative-sequence system variables. Adjusting commands for the automatically synchronization
(ANSI 25)*
Measuring-voltage failure detection
The synchronization function ensures a synchronous switching
Tripping the impedance protection is blocked automatically in
of the generator circuit breaker. Automatic synchronization is
the event of a measuring voltage outage, thus preventing
possible via the output of the adjusting commands to the speed
unwanted tripping. Impedance protection is blocked if one of
or voltage controller. If the synchronization conditions are not
the voltage monitoring functions or the auxiliary contact of the
met, the function automatically outputs adjusting signals.
voltage-transformer circuit breaker picks up and the EMER-
Depending on the operating state, these are commands (step
GENCY protection can be activated (definite time-overcurrent
up/down) to voltage or speed controllers (frequency control-
protection).
lers). The adjusting signals are proportional to the voltage or
Overexcitation protection (ANSI 24) frequency difference. This means that with a greater voltage or
Overexcitation protection is used to detect impermissibly high frequency difference, longer adjusting commands are issued.
induction in generators and transformers. This function protects The gradient is adjustable. Between the adjusting commands,
these equipment from excessive thermal loads. there is a wait during a set dead time to settle the status
change. A quick adaptation of the generator voltage or
The induction is detected indirectly by evaluation of the V/f
frequency to the target conditions is achieved with this method.
ratio. An overvoltage results in excessive exciting currents and
If frequency equality is established during the synchronization
underfrequency results in higher magnetic reversal losses.
of generators with the power system (stationary synchro-
There is a risk of overexcitation on disconnection from the phasor), then a kick pulse ensures a status change.
power system if the voltage or frequency control in the rest of
If a voltage adaptation via the transformer tap position changer
the system does not respond quickly enough or the power
is desired, a defined adjusting pulse is output.
unbalance is too great.
Monitoring of the induction (V/f value) ensures that, when the
Within the function, no more than one stage with an inverse-
adjusting commands are output (for example, “increase”
time, user-defined characteristic and two definite-time stages
voltage, “reduce speed”), the continuously permissible limiting
can be operated at the same time.
value of V/f = 1.1 is not exceeded.
Synchrocheck, synchronizing function (ANSI 25)
*In preparation
When two partial networks are closed with a control command
Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27)
or 3-pole auto-reclosure of the circuit breaker, it must be
ensured that the networks are synchronous with each other. For The undervoltage protection monitors the permissible voltage
this purpose, synchronization functionalities are provided. range or protects equipment (plant parts and electrical
machines) against consequential damage from undervoltage. It
The synchronization function can be used for synchronous
can be used in the network for decoupling or load shedding
networks (electrically connected, no frequency difference) and
tasks.
asynchronous networks (electrically separated, frequency differ-
ence exists). Various undervoltage protection functions are available. By
default, two stages are preconfi gured. Up to three identical
It has three modes:
stages are possible.
• Synchrocheck (monitoring of voltage, frequency, and phase- The following functions are available:
angle difference)
Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage
• Synchrocheck (monitoring of voltage, frequency, and phase-
angle difference) • Optionally, measurement of phase-to-phase voltages or RMS
value phase-to-ground voltages
• Switching of asynchronous networks (voltage and frequency
difference, connection at the point of synchronization, taking • Measuring methods: optionally, measurement of the funda-
the make-time of the circuit breaker into account). mental component or of the effective value (True RMS).
By evaluating the frequency difference, the function automati- Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage 3.2
cally switches between the modes for synchronous and asyn-
chronous networks. The synchrocheck function can be used for • 2-pole short circuits or ground faults lead to an unbalanced
voltage collapse. In comparison with phase-related measuring
pure monitoring without switching.
systems, these events influence the positive-sequence voltage
The relevant variables used for synchronization are sensed via minimally. This makes this function particularly suitable for
voltage transformers (positioned to the left and right of the the assessment of stability problems.
circuit breaker). Depending on the available number of voltage
transformer inputs, one or two synchronizing locations (circuit
• Method of measurement: calculation of positive-sequence
voltage from the measured phase-to-ground voltages.
breakers) can be applied.
Several functions can be used per device for which up to two
parameter sets (stages) can be applied for synchrochecks and up
to six parameter sets (stages) can be applied for the synchroni-
zation. Thus, the device can react to different environmental-
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (QU-Protection)
Undervoltage protection with any voltage

• Capture of any 1-phase undervoltage with 3-phase voltage
measurement for special applications
• Measuring methods: optionally, measurement of the funda-
mental component or of the effective value (True RMS).
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (QU-
Protection)
The undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection protects
the system for mains decoupling purposes. To prevent a voltage
collapse in energy systems, the generating side, e.g. a gener-
ator, must be equipped with voltage and frequency protection
devices. An undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection is
required at the supply system connection point. It detects crit-
ical power system situations and ensures that the power genera-
tion facility is disconnected from the mains. Furthermore, it
ensures that reconnection only takes place under stable power
system conditions. The associated criteria can be parameterized.
Power protection (ANSI 32, 37)
The power protection works 3-phase and detects exceedance or
underrunning of the set effective power or reactive power
thresholds (see Figure 3.2/4). Pre-defined power limits are
monitored and corresponding warning alerts are issued.
The power direction can be determined via angle measurement
of the active power. Thus feeding back in the network or at elec-
tric machines can be detected. Idling machines (motors, genera-
tors) are detected and can be shut down via an indication.
The power protection can be integrated into any automation
solution, for example, to monitor very specific power limits
(further logical processing in CFC). The power protection func-
[dw_Wirk_Blind_KL, 1, en_US]
tion comes with one factory-set stage each for the active and
the reactive power. A maximum of four active power stages and Figure 3.2/4 Active-power and reactive-power characteristics
four reactive power stages can be operated simultaneously in
the function. The tripping stages are structured identically. Reverse-power protection (ANSI 32R)
Thresholds for exceedance or underrunning of the power lines The reverse-power protection is used in generators and power
can be defined. The combination of the different stages via CFC plant units. If the “mechanical” energy (for example, steam
result in various applications. supply at the turbine) fails, the generator obtains the driving
energy from the power system. In this operating state, the
turbine can be damaged, which is prevented by tripping of the
• Detection of negative active power. In this case reversepower- reverse-power protection. In order to react quicker if there is a
protection can be applied by using the CFC to link power steam outage, the position of the quick-stop valve is coupled
protection outputs to the “Direct trip” function. additionally via binary input. It is used to switch between two
• Detection of capacitive reactive power. In the case of over- time delays of the trip command. Furthermore, the function is
voltage being detected due to long lines under no-load condi- used for operational disconnection (sequential circuit) of gener-
tions it is possible to select the lines where capacitive reactive ators.
power is measured. For other applications, the “universal” power protection
3.2
(ANSI 32, 37) is recommended.
The reverse-power protection operates on a 3-phase basis and
monitors the absorbed active power (negative threshold value).
By evaluation of the positive-sequence system power as well as
the selection of a long measuring window, the function is insen-
sitive to disturbance variables and very precise (minimum
setting threshold: -0.3 % P/Srated). The measuring accuracy is
substantially affected by the angle error. Because the SIPROTEC
5 devices are compensated, the primary transformers affect the
measuring accuracy. The function can correct the angle error:
The angle error can be found in the test report of the trans-
former or be measured using the primary system. The problem
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Power plant decoupling (ANSI 32 dP/dt; 27, 50)*
with the angle error is bypassed if high-precision instrument Optionally, the auxiliary contacts of the local circuit breaker are
transformers are used as primary transformers (class 0.2 or 0.1). evaluated in order to prevent overfunction.
For this purpose, the reverse-power protection should be Temperature supervision (ANSI 38)
assigned to an independent measuring module.
The temperatures (e.g. winding or oil temperatures) are
Power plant decoupling (ANSI 32 dP/dt; 27, 50)*
acquired with an external temperature monitoring device.
Three-phase close-in short circuits result in mechanical stresses Typical sensors are Pt 100, Ni 100 and Ni 120. The temperatures
on the turbo-generator unit as well as electrical ones. The deter- are transmitted to the protection via serial interface or via
mining criterion for the magnitude of the mechanical stress on a Ethernet interface and the temperature monitoring function
turbo-generator unit to be expected is the negative active power monitors whether they exceed set limits. There are two thresh-
jump ΔP, because torque and active power are proportional to olds per temperature measuring point. The function is designed
each other. The sudden force release results in an acceleration so that up to 12 temperatures can be processed. The function
of the rotor. At the same time, the phase position and amplitude also includes integrated broken-wire monitoring which sends
of the synchronous generated voltage changes. These changes alarms referring to the measuring points.
occur on a delayed basis corresponding to the inertia constant Underexcitation protection (ANSI 40)
of the machine and the magnitude of the active power change.
The longer this state persists, the more critical the stress on the The generator power diagram describes the stability limits. In
generator becomes when there is a sudden voltage recovery. It the per-unit view it can easily be transformed into an admit-
is then possible to compare the effects of the subsequent opera- tance diagram by changing the axis labels. The underexcitation
tion more or less to a “missynchronization.” If the power system protection monitors the stability limits and prevents damage in
protection does not cut off the high-current short circuits close the generator from pulling out of synchronism (asynchronous
to the power plant within the allotted quick-operating time, the running) as a result of problems with the excitation or voltage
aforementioned stress can occur. control during underexcited operation.
The power plant decoupling function intervenes in this case and The protection function offers three characteristics for moni-
opens the main switch on the upper-voltage side. After fault toring the static as well as dynamic stability. A quick protection
clarification, the block can be re-synchronized with the paralle- reaction is achieved via binary trip initiation if there is an excita-
ling device. tion outage and short-time tripping is enabled. Alternatively, the
excitation voltage can be measured by a measuring transducer
The protection function evaluates the negative active power
and the release signal for falling below the threshold value can
jump of the positive-sequence system power. This is derived
be evaluated. The characteristic curve lines enable an optimal
from the three-phase voltage and current measured values.
adaptation of the protection to the generator diagram (see
After an approved time delay (to be specified by the turbo-
Figure 3.2/6). The setting values can be read directly from the
generator unit manufacturer), the trip command is issued. Over-
per-unit view of the diagram.
current and undervoltage pickups act as additional restraining
quantities. Additionally, the generator must be operated before- The admittance is calculated from the positive-sequence system
hand with a minimum active power and fall below an active quantities of the three-phase currents and voltages. This guar-
power threshold. antees correct behavior of the protection function even under
asymmetric power system conditions. If the voltage deviates
*In preparation from the rated voltage, the admittance calculation provides the
advantage that the characteristics run in the same direction as
the generator power diagram shifts.
[dw_7UM8_kraftwerksentkuppl, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/5 Setup of the function and principal logic
3.2
Undercurrent protection (ANSI 37)
Undercurrent protection detects the falling edge or dropping
current flow. This may be due to switching operations, such as
by a higher level circuit breaker, or by decreasing loads, such as
pumps running empty. [dw_charac-underexcitation-protection, 1, en_US]
In both situations, it may be necessary to open the local circuit Figure 3.2/6 Characteristic of the underexcitation protection
breaker in order to prevent consequential damage. The under-
current protection handles this task. Unbalanced-load protection (ANSI 46)
The function consists of an undercurrent stage with a current- Asymmetrical current loading of the three windings of a gener-
independent time delay. A maximum of two stages can be operator result in heat buildup in the rotor because of the devel-
ated in parallel. oping reverse field. The protection detects an asymmetric
loading of three-phase machines. It operates on the basis of
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Negative-sequence system overcurrent protection (ANSI 46)
symmetric components. The protection function evaluates the Directional negative-sequence protection with definitetime
negative-sequence current and prevents thermal overloading of delay (ANSI 46, 67)
the rotor of electric machines (generators, motors). The thermal
This function serves as the reserve short-circuit protection for
behavior is modeled using the integral method.
asymmetrical faults. With the negative-sequence system,
The following equation forms the basis of the protection func- various monitoring and protection tasks can be realized:
tion.
• Detection of 1 or 2-phase short circuits in the network with a
higher sensitivity than in classic overcurrent protection
• Detection of phase conductor interruptions in the primary
system and in the current transformer secondary circuits
[fo_Schieflastschutz, 1, en_US]
• Location of short circuits or reversals in the connections to the
current transformers
Where
• Indication of asymmetrical states in the energy system
K Constant of the machine (5 s to 40 s) • Protection of electrical machines following asymmetrical
I2 Negative sequence current loads that are caused by asymmetrical voltages or conductor
I N, M Rated current of the machine interruptions (for example through a defective fuse).
The function comes factory-set with 1 stage. A maximum of
A dependent characteristic results as the operate curve. Small 6 stages can be operated simultaneously. If the device is
unbalanced load currents result in longer tripping times. To equipped with the inrush-current detection function, the trip-
prevent overfunction when there are large unbalanced load ping stages can be stabilized against tripping due to transformer
currents (for example, with asymmetric short circuits), large inrush currents.
negative-sequence system currents (approx. 10*I permissible) Overvoltage protection functions (ANSI 59, 47, 59N)
are limited. In addition, the continuous additional unbalanced
load is monitored, and if the threshold is exceeded, an alarm Overvoltages occur, for example, in long lines with little or no
indication is issued after a time delay. load. Another cause can be faults in the voltage regulation
(controller faults, maloperation). The overvoltage protection
Negative-sequence system overcurrent protection (ANSI 46)
monitors the permissible voltage range, protects equipment
The protection function determines the negative sequence from subsequent damage through overvoltages and serves to
current out of phase currents. The negative sequence current decouple systems (e.g. wind energy infeeds).
can be referred to the object nominal current or to the positive
Various overvoltage protection functions are available. By
sequence current (convenient for broken wire monitoring).
default, two stages are preconfigured. Up to three identical
With the transformer, the negative phase sequence current stages are possible.
protection can be used as sensitive backup protection on the
The following functions are available:
supply side for detecting low-current single-phase short circuit
and double-phase faults. This application is well suited for Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 59)
detecting low voltage single-phase faults which do not generate • Optionally, measurement of phase-to-phase voltages or
high voltage zero sequence currents (e.g. vector group Dyn). phase-to-ground voltages
With the negative-sequence system, various monitoring and • Method of measurement: optionally, measurement of the
protection tasks can be realized: fundamental component or of the effective value (RMS
value).
• Detection of 1 or 2-phase short circuits in the network with a
higher sensitivity than in classic overcurrent protection Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage
(Setting lower than the object nominal current) (ANSI 59)
• Detection of phase current interruptions in the primary • Capturing symmetrical, stationary overvoltages with positive
system and in the current transformer secondary circuits sequence voltage
3.2
• Location of short circuits or reversals in the connections to the • Method of measurement: calculation of positive-sequence
current transformers voltage from the measured phase-to-ground voltages.
• Indication of unbalanced conditions in the energy system Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage and
compounding in line protection devices (ANSI 59)
• Protection of electrical machines following asymmetrical
loads that are caused by asymmetrical voltages or phase • By means of capacitive line impedances, stationary overvol-
currents (for example through a defective fuse). tages at the opposite end of the line can arise (Ferranti
The function comes factory-set with 1 stage. A maximum of 6 effect).
stages can be operated simultaneously. If the device is equipped • Method of measurement: The positive-sequence system of
with the inrush-current detection function, the tripping stages the voltage is calculated at the other end of the line by means
can be stabilized against tripping due to transformer inrush of the local, measured voltages and current using the equiva-
currents. lent circuit of the line.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Starting-time supervision (ANSI 48)
Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage IEC 60076-7 and IEEE C57.91 and calculates three relevant vari-
(ANSI 47) ables for the protection function:
• Monitoring the power system and electric machines for • Hot spot temperature
voltage unbalance (negative sequence voltage)
• Relative aging
• Method of measurement: calculation of negative-sequence
voltage from the measured phase-to-ground voltages. • Load reserve until warning / alarm indication.
Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage / residual These variables can be used to generate an alarm. The hot spot
voltage (ANSI 59N/64) temperature can also trigger tripping. Calculation of the hot
• Detection of ground faults in isolated or resonant-grounded spot temperature depends on the upper transformer oil temper-
systems and electric operational equipment (e.g. machines) ature, the cooling method, the load factor, the transformer
dimension, the oil and winding time constant and a number of
• Detection of the ground-faulted phase (optional) other factors according to IEC 60076-7 and IEEE C57.91.
• Measurement procedure: Measurement of the displacement The upper oil temperature is sensed via the temperature meas-
voltage directly at the broken-delta winding or calculation of uring points. Up to 12 temperature measuring points can be
the zero-sequence voltage from the phase-to-ground voltages transferred to the protection relay via an RTD box.One of these
• Measuring methods: Optionally, measurement of the funda- measuring points can be chosen for calculation of the hot spot
mental component (standard or with especially strong attenu- temperature in the oil.
ation of harmonics and transients) or of the RMS value. The customer can set additionally required factors, such as type
Overvoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 59) of cooling and dimension of the transformer, in the function.
The relative aging is acquired cyclically and summated to form
• Capture of any 1-phase overvoltage for special applications the total aging.
• Measuring methods: Optionally, measurement of the funda- Stator overload protection (ANSI 49S)
mental component or of the effective value (RMS value).
The function of the thermal stator overload protection protects
Starting-time supervision (ANSI 48) the motor against thermal overload by monitoring the thermal
The starting-time supervision protects the motor against too state of the stator.
long starting processes. In particular, rotor-critical high voltage The thermal stator overload protection calculates the overtem-
motors can quickly be heated above their thermal limits when perature from the measured phase currents according to a
multiple start-ups occur in a short period of time. If start-ups are thermal single body model. The RMS value is determined per
prolonged, e.g., in the event of excessive voltage drops when phase from the highly sampled measured current values (8 kHz).
starting the motor, excessive load torques, or a locked rotor, the All quantities which cause heating are taken into account
protection device initiates a trip signal. Figure 3.2/7 shows the through the wide frequency operating range.
thermal characteristic of the function. Different maximum
starting times are taken into account depending on the cold or Stages
warm condition of the motor. A current and thermal alarm stage is provided for the thermal
overload protection to initiate an alarm before tripping. The trip-
ping time characteristics are exponential functions according to
IEC 60255-8. The preload is considered in the tripping times /
operate time for overloads.
Startup overcurrent protection (ANSI 50)*
Gas turbines are powered up via starting converters. The startup
overload protection detects short circuits in the low frequency
range (from about 2-3 Hz) and is designed as a definite time-
overcurrent protection. The pickup value is set below the rated
current. The function is only active during startup (blocking by
open circuit breaker of the starting converter). At frequencies 3.2
higher than 10 Hz, the sampling-frequency tracking activates
[dwtherms-200712-03.tif, 1, en_US]
and then the other short-circuit functions are active.
Figure 3.2/7 Thermal characteristic of the starting-time supervision
*In preparation
Hot spot calculation (ANSI 49H) Circuit-breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
The hot spot calculation function protects the transformer wind- The circuit-breaker failure protection is circuit-breaker-related in
ings from thermal destruction by excessive load currents. Hot the function group circuit breaker. Each circuit breaker has to be
spot calculation takes account of the following standards provided with its own circuit-breaker failure protection. The
circuit-breaker failure protection incorporates a two-stage
design. If the fault current has not disappeared after a settable
time, a retrip command or the busbar trip command will be
generated. The correct circuit-breaker operation is monitored via
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – External trip initiation
current measurement and via additional circuit-breaker Circuit-breaker restrike protection (ANSI 50RS)
contacts. The current detection logic is phase-segregated and
The Circuit-breaker restrike protection function monitors circuit-
can therefore also be used in 1-pole tripping schemes.
breaker restrikes, e.g. caused by overvoltage at the circuit-
The circuit-breaker failure protection can be initiated by all inte- breaker poles following a capacitor bank shutdown. The func-
grated protection functions as well as by external devices via tion will generate a backup tripping signal in case of a circuit-
binary input signals or by communication with GOOSE message breaker restrike.
in IEC 61850 systems. To increase operational reliability, an Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault (SOTF)
external start can be applied with two binary inputs in parallel.
This function is available for applications where the overcurrent
For 1-pole and 3-pole starting separate delay times are available.
protection with rapid tripping (50HS) is insuffi cient or is not
For applications with two current transformers per feeder, e.g.
used at all. It also allows rapid tripping in the case of lower fault
breaker-and-a-half, ring bus or double circuit-breaker applica-
currents. The function has no own measuring function. It is
tions, the SIPROTEC 5 device can be configured with two inde-
linked at its input side with the pickup (measurement) of
pendent circuit-breaker failure protection functions.
another protection function, e.g. the element of an overcurrent
External trip initiation protection and it will trip if switched on to a short circuit. Typi-
cally, such protection levels are confi gured which trip with a
Any signals from external protection and monitoring devices can
delay themselves. The actual energization detection is made in
be used for trip initiation. These signals can be included in the
the switching state detection.
processing of indications and trip commands or for starting a
fault record. External trip initiation
The external trip initiation works like a protection function. This Any signal from an external or internal protection or supervision
allows easy integration of mechanical protection devices (e.g. function can be coupled into the trip logic of the device by
pressure or oil level monitors or Buchholz relays). means of binary inputs or by serial communication. The trip
The required number of external trip initiations can be selected command may be delayed. 1-pole tripping is available if device
depending on the application and circuit breaker are capable of 1-pole operation.
High speed instantaneous overcurrent protection Load-jam protection (ANSI 50L)

(ANSI 50HS) The load-jam protection function is used to protect motors
When a faulted line is switched on, undelayed tripping is during sudden rotor blocking. Damage to drives, bearings and
possible. In the case of high fault currents this overcurrent other mechanic motor components can be avoided or reduced
protection with instantaneous tripping effects a very rapid trip- by means of quick motor shutdown.
ping when switching on to faults. Rotor blocking results in a current jump in the phases. The
The function is factory-set with one stage. Within the function, a current jump is used as a distinguishing criterion by the func-
maximum of two stages can be operated at the same time. All tion.
stages are of identical design The actual switch-on detection The thermal overload protection can pickup as soon as the para-
takes place in the switching state detection. This is either meterized threshold values of the thermal replica are exceeded.
directly activated when switching on manually, or automatically The load-jam protection, however, is able to detect a locked
determined from the measured values (current, voltage) or by rotor quicker and in this way to reduce possible damage to the
means of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts. motor and driven equipment.
The current stage must be set via the maximum through- Overcurrent protection, phases and ground
flowing short-circuit current or the inrush current if used in the (ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N)
transformer application.
The overcurrent protection functions for phases and ground
End-fault protection (ANSI 50EF) detect short circuits on electrical equipment. The non-direc-
Without special measures the installation location of the current tional overcurrent protection is suitable as main protection for
transformer deter mines the measuring zone of the differential single-sided infeed radial power systems or open-circuited ring
protection. If the circuit breaker is open, the zone between the systems. As a backup or emergency overcurrent protection, it
current transformer and the circuit breaker can be optimally can be used alongside the main protection, for example, on
3.2 lines or transformers. With transformers, the preferred applica-
protected by the end-fault protection. A current detected with
an open circuit breaker indicates a fault in the relevant zone. tion is the backup protection for downstream power supply
The fault can be cleared by tripping the surrounding circuit units.
breakers. Two independent overcurrent-protection stages (definite time-
In conjunction with the busbar protection, the response to a overcurrent protection stages) and a dependent overcurrent-
fault depends on the installation location of the current trans- protection stage (inverse time-overcurrent protection stage) are
former. In the case of busbar-side current transformers, imme- preconfigured. Additional definite time-overcurrent protection
diate and selective tripping of the busbar section is performed. stages, as well as one stage with a user-defined characteristic
On line-side current transformers, the end-fault protection can curve, can be configured within this function.
cause tripping of the circuit breaker at the opposite end through All the usual characteristic curves according to IEC and ANSI/IEEE
a transmission facility. are available for the inverse time-overcurrent protection stages,
see for example Figure 3.2/8.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Overcurrent protection, single-phase (ANSI 50N/51N)
The stages of the overcurrent protection are, apart from the be used for special applications which require a very sensitive
characteristic, structured identically. current measurement. Pickup and trip signals can be stored in
the separate ground fault buffer.
• They can be blocked individually via binary input or by other
functions (for example, inrush-current detection, automatic Intermittent ground-fault protection
reclosing, cold-load pickup detection)
Intermittent (re-striking) faults occur due to insulation weak-
• Each stage can be stabilized against over-responding because nesses in cables or as a result of water penetrating cable joints.
of transformer inrush currents Such faults either simply cease at some stage or develop into
lasting short-circuits. During intermittent activity, however, star-
• Each stage can be operated as an alarm stage (no operate point resistors in networks that are impedance-grounded may
indication)
undergo thermal overloading. The normal ground-fault protec-
• You can select between the measurement of the fundamental tion cannot reliably detect and interrupt the current pulses,
component and the measurement of the RMS value for the
some of which can be very brief.
method of measurement
The selectivity required with intermittent ground-faults is
• The ground function evaluates the calculated zero-sequence achieved by summating the duration of the individual pulses
current (3I0) or the measured ground current
and by triggering when a (settable) summed time and a fault
• Dropout delays can be set individually. state is reached. The response threshold IIE > evaluates the
r.m.s. value, referred to one systems period.
Transformer inrush current detection
If the device is used in a transformer feeder, high inrush
currents can be expected when the transformer is switched on.
These can reach many times the rated current and flow for
several tens of milliseconds to several seconds, depending on
the size and design of the transformer. The inrush current detec-
tion function detects the transformer energizing and generates
a blocking signal for protection functions that would spuriously
respond to the transformer inrush current. This enables these
protection functions to be sensitive.
To detect transformer energizing reliably, the function uses the
"harmonic analysis" and "CWA methods" (current waveform
analysis) measuring methods. The two methods work in parallel
and combine the results with a logical OR. The result is a "1-
outof- 2 decision," which increases the availability of the elec-
trical installation.
Switching protection (ANSI 50/27)
The protection function has the task of limiting harm, due to
accidental switching of the circuit breaker, to generators that
are stationary or already started but not yet excited or synchron-
ized. The voltage prescribed by the power system allows the
[IEC Kennlinien, 1, en_US] generator to start with a great amount of slip as an asynchro-
Figure 3.2/8 IEC characteristic curves of the “normal inverse” type nous machine. As a consequence, unacceptably high currents
are induced in the rotor. Logic, consisting of sensitive current
Overcurrent protection, single-phase (ANSI 50N/51N) measurement for each phase, instrument transformers, time
control and blocking starting at a minimum voltage, causes an
In the case of transformers, the preferred application is backup immediate trip command. If the fuse-failure monitor responds,
protection for power system components connected to the this function is inactive.
grounded neutral winding. The neutral point current of the 3.2
transformer is processed directly. Alternately, the function can Shaft-current protection (ANSI 50GN)
also be used for differential high-impedance ground fault The protection function is required in particular for hydro gener-
protection. ators. Because of design constraints, hydro generators have rela-
A further application is tank protection on transformers installed tively long shafts. Due to different causes, such as friction,
on insulating mountings. magnetic fields of the generators and still others, a voltage can
develop through the shaft, which then acts as a voltage source.
The structure and scope of the protection function is identical to This induced voltage of approximately 10 to 30 V is a function of
the time-overcurrent protection ground function (ANSI 50N/ load, plant and machine. If the oil film on a bearing of the shaft
51N). is too thin, this can result in electric breakdown. Due to the low
Sentitive ground protection (ANSI 50Ns/51Ns) impedance (shaft, bearing and ground), greater currents can
flow that would result in the destruction of the bearing. Experi-
The sensitive ground-current protection function detects ground
ence shows that currents greater than 1 A are critical for the
currents in systems with isolated or resonant neutral. It can also
bearing. Because different bearings can be affected, the current
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection (ANSI 51V)
flowing in the shaft is detected by a special core balance current The arc protection function contains a self-monitoring function.
transformer (folding transformer). This function monitors the optical arc sensors and the fiber-optic
cables.
The shaft-current protection processes this current and trips
when there is a threshold-value violation. In addition to the Peak overvoltage protection for capacitors (ANSI 59C)
fundamental component, the 3rd harmonic as well as the
The dielectric of a capacitor is stressed by the applied peak
current mixture (1st and 3rd harmonic) can be evaluated. The
voltage. Excessive peak voltages can therefore destroy the
measurand as well as the threshold value are set during
dielectric. IEC and IEEE standards defi ne for how long capacitors
commissioning. A high degree of measuring accuracy (minimum
can withstand what overvoltages.
secondary threshold is 0.3 mA) is achieved by the selected
measurement technology. The function calculates the peak voltage phase-selectively from
the fundamental and the superimposed harmonics. The peak
Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection (ANSI 51V)
voltage is calculated from the phase currents by integration.
Short-circuit and backup protection are also integrated here. It is The function provides various types of stage with different delay
used where power system protection operates with current- times:
dependent protection equipment.
There are 3 different forms of the function (stage types)
• Stage with an inverse characteristic, according to IEC and IEEE
standards
• Controlled • Stage with a user-defi ned characteristic
• Voltage-dependent • Stage with a defi nite-time characteristic
• Undervoltage stability. Up to four stages of the type with a defi nite-time characteristic
can be set up concurrently.
The current function can be controlled via an evaluation of the
machine voltage. The “controlled” version triggers the sensi- Interturn fault protection (ANSI 59N (IT))*
tively set current stage. In the “voltage-dependent” version, the The interturn fault protection is used to detect short circuits
current pickup value drops in a linear relationship with dropping between the turns within a winding (phase) of the generator. In
voltage. The fuse-failure monitor prevents overfunction. this case, relatively high ring currents flow in the short-circuited
IEC and ANSI characteristics are supported (Table 3.2/1). turns and result in damage to the winding and stator. The
protection function is distinguished by high sensitivity. The
Supported inverse-time characteristic curves residual voltage across the broken-delta winding is detected via
Characteristic curve ANSI / IEEE IEEE / IEC 60255-3 3 two-pole isolated voltage transformers. In order to be insensi-
Inverse • •
tive to ground faults, the isolated voltage transformer neutral
point must be connected via a high-voltage cable to the gener-
Moderately inverse •
ator neutral point. The neutral point of the voltage transformer
Very inverse • •
must not be grounded; otherwise, also the generator neutral
Extremely inverse • • point would be grounded and every ground fault would result in
Fully inverse • a single-pole ground fault. In the case of an interturn fault, the
result would be a drop in voltage in the affected phase. This ulti-
Table 3.2/1 Supported inverse-time characteristic curves mately leads to a residual voltage that is detected across the
broken-delta winding. The sensitivity is limited more by the
For generator protection applications, the function “under- winding asymmetries and less by the protection device. The
voltage stability” is frequently used. If the exciting transformer is protection function processes the voltage across the broken-
connected directly to the generator bus and a short circuit delta winding and determines the fundamental component. The
occurs, the excitation voltage drops. As a result, the synchro- selected filter design suppresses the effect of higher frequency
nous generated voltage and with it the short-circuit current are oscillations and eliminates the disruptive influence of the 3rd .
reduced and can drop below the pickup value. With the under- In this way, the required measuring sensitivity is achieved.
voltage stability feature, the pickup is maintained. If an external
error is cleared according to protective grading, the voltage *In preparation
3.2 recovery results in the dropout of the pickup maintenance. If the
voltage fails due to an error in the voltage transformer circuit,
this does not result in an overfunction. A pickup additionally
causes an overcurrent.
Arc Protection
The arc protection function detects electric arcs in switchgears
through optical sensors. Arcs are detected reliably and quickly as
they develop, and the protective device can trip immediately
and without delay times.
Detection of arcs is either purely optical, or optionally using an
additional current criterion to avoid overfunctioning.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Direct voltage / direct current protection (ANSI 59N (DC), 50N (DC))*
former. The direction of the error is determined from residual

voltage and ground current. The vector can easily be adapted to
the plant conditions. An effective protection of a generator in
bus connection is realized in this way. During startup, the
residual voltage measurement must also be activated because in
some cases the ground current source (connected power system
or loading device on the busbar) is absent. The stator ground-
fault protection function is therefore realized so that it has
different stage types. These are to be loaded in the devices
depending on the application (block or bus connection).
Stage types:
• Residual voltage measurement (evaluation of the zero-
[dw_7um85-Ausf-bsp, 1, en_US]
sequence voltage) V0>
Figure 3.2/9 Implementation example • Directional 3I0 stage with φ(V0, 3I0) measurement (freely
adjustable direction straight line)
Direct voltage / direct current protection (ANSI 59N (DC), • Non-directional 3I0 stage
50N (DC))*
Stator ground-fault protection with 3rd harmonic
Hydro generators or gas turbines are started via starting (ANSI 27TH/59TH, 59THD)
converters. A ground fault in the intermediate circuit of the
starting converter results in the direct voltage shift and thus a Due to design constraints, a generator can produce a 3rd
direct current. Because neutral-point or grounding transformers harmonic voltage that forms a zero-sequence system. It is verifi-
have a lower ohmic resistance than the voltage transformers, able by a broken-delta winding on the generator bus or by a
the majority of the direct current flows through them. There is voltage transformer or neutral-point transformer on the gener-
therefore a danger of destruction from thermal overload. The ator neutral point. The voltage amplitude depends on the
direct current is detected via a shunt transformer (measuring machine and operation.
transducer or special transformer). Depending on the version of A ground fault in the vicinity of the neutral point results in the
the measuring transducer, currents or voltages are fed to the voltage shift of the 3rd harmonic voltage (drop within the
7UM85. neutral point and increase on the outgoing line). In combination
The measuring algorithm filters out the DC component and with the 90 % stator ground-fault protection (V0>) 100 % of the
makes the threshold value decision. The protection function is stator winding is protectable.
active starting at 0 Hz. If a voltage is transmitted by the meas- The protection function is designed in such a way that different
uring transducer for protection, the connection must be measuring methods can be selected for different applications
designed in an interference-immune and short manner. Trans- are possible.
mission as a 4 to 20 mA signal brings advantages because
applied currents are insensitive to disturbances and at the same
• A 3rd harmonic undervoltage protection at the generator
neutral point
time broken-wire monitoring is possible.
The function can also be used for special applications. There-
• A 3rd harmonic overvoltage protection at the generator bus.
fore, for the quantity present at the input the RMS value is eval- • A 3rd harmonic differential voltage protection (with measur-
uated over a broad frequency range. ands of the neutral point and the outgoing line)
*In preparation A typical application is the 3rd harmonic undervoltage protec-

tion at the generator neutral point. The protection function is
90% stator ground-fault protection (ANSI 59N, 67Ns)
only usable with a unit connection.
With generators that operate on an isolated basis, a ground fault
To prevent overfunctions, a release is issued if a minimum active
is expressed by the occurrence of a residual voltage. In a unit
power is exceeded and the generator voltage is within the
connection, the residual voltage is a selective protection crite-
permissible voltage range.
rion. If generator and busbar (bus connection) are directly 3.2
connected to each other, the direction of the flowing ground The final protection setting can only be made through a primary
current must also be evaluated for a selective sensitive ground- testing of the generator. If the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic is
fault detection. The protection function measures the residual too small, the protection function cannot be used.
voltage either at the generator neutral point via a voltage trans- 100% stator ground-fault protection with 20-Hz coupling
former or neutral-point transformer or one the outgoing line via (ANSI 64S)
the broken-delta winding of a voltage transformer or grounding
The coupling of a 20-Hz voltage has proven to be a safe and reli-
transformer. Alternatively, the residual voltage (zero-sequence
able method for detecting errors in the neutral point or in the
voltage) can also be calculated from the phase-to-ground
vicinity of the neutral point of generators in unit connection. In
voltages. 85 % to 95 % of the stator winding of a generator can
contrast to the 3rd harmonic criterion, it depends on the gener-
be protected depending on the selected load resistor.
ator properties and the operating mode. Moreover, a measure-
For the ground current measurement, a sensitive current input ment during plant standstill is possible. The protection function
is used. It should be connected to a core balance current trans- is designed in such a way that it detects ground faults in the
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Current-unbalance protection for capacitor banks (ANSI 60C)
entire generator (true 100 %) as well as in all electrically

connected plant components.
The protection function detects the coupled 20-Hz voltage and
the continuous 20-Hz current. The interfering quantities, such as
the stator capacitances, are eliminated and the ohmic fault
resistance is determined through a mathematical model. This
ensures, on the one hand, a high sensitivity and, on the other
hand, the use of generators having ground capacitances, such
as in hydropower plants.
Angle errors or contact resistances through the grounding trans-
former or neutral-point transformer are detected during
commissioning and corrected in the algorithm. The protection
function has a warning and tripping stage. In addition, there is
[dw_CapBank_SLE_vereinfacht, 1, en_US]
measuring circuit monitoring and the detection of an outage of
the 20-Hz generator. Furthermore, the protection function has Figure 3.2/10 Protection of a capacitor bank in H connection
an independent frequency measurement function and in plants
that are started via frequency converter (for example, gas Measuring-voltage failure detection (ANSI 60FL)
turbines) can control the function in such a way that an over- This function monitors the voltage transformer secondary
function is prevented circuits:
Independent of the ground resistance calculation, the protec-
• Non-connnected transformers
tion function as a backup function additionally evaluates the
magnitude of the current RMS value. • Pickup of the voltage transformer circuit-breaker (in the event
of short circuits in the secondary circuit)
If a parallel load resistor (grounding transformer with load
resistor on the undervoltage side of the power unit) is also • Series faults in one or more measuring loops.
present in plants with generator switches, this is automatically
All these events cause a voltage of 0 in the voltage-transformer
corrected. The control is via a binary input that receives its signal
secondary circuits, which can lead to failures of the protection
from the circuit breaker auxiliary contact.
functions.
Current-unbalance protection for capacitor banks (ANSI 60C)
The following protection functions are automatically blocked in
Capacitor banks are often implemented in "H conections" (see the case of a measuring-voltage failure:
Figure 3.2/10). In such implementations, failure of a single
capacitor element unbalances the capacitor bank and therefore • Distance protection
results in a low unbalance current via the cross-connection. • Directional negative-sequence protection
The function measures the unbalance current in the crosscon-
nection phase-selectively. The overcurrent stage will pick up
• Ground-fault protection for high-resistance faults in
grounded-neutral systems.
after a threshold value is exceeded and will trip after a time
delay. The counter stage causes an alarm or tripping if a speci- Rotor ground-fault protection (ANSI 64F)
fied number of faulty C elements has been determined. The protection function detects ground faults in the rotor
To meet the requirements that even the smallest unbalance (including rotor circuit). High-impedance faults are already
current, resulting from a defective capacitor element, must be signaled by a warning stage. The operational crew can respond
detected, it is necessary to compensate for operational unbal- accordingly (for example at the slip rings). When there is a low-
ance, which also results in unbalance currents. The function impedance ground fault, tripping occurs and the machine is
permits both static and dynamic compensation. The latter must stopped. Thus, the critical case of a 2nd Ground fault that is a
be used if dynamic environmental influences such as tempera- turn-to-turn fault of the rotor winding is prevented. The turn-to-
ture fluctuations are already causing relevant operational unbal- turn fault can produce magnetic imbalances that result in a
ances. destruction of the machine due to the extreme mechanical
3.2 forces
Moreover, the measured unbalance can optionally be normal-
ized with the current of the capacitor bank to ensure constant Depending on the application, you can select from 3 different
sensitivity even at different powers. implementations.
Rotor ground-current measurement I>, fn
In this method, a power-frequency voltage (50 Hz, 60 Hz) is fed
into the rotor circuit via a coupling apparatus (7XR61 +
3PP1336). Through the protection function, the current
threshold is monitored via a sensitive current input. Two current
stages can be set (warning, tripping). In addition, the rotor
circuit is monitored for open circuit by an undercurrent stage.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Restart inhibit (ANSI 66)
Rotor resistance measurement R<, fn

In this method, a power-frequency voltage (50 Hz, 60 Hz) is also
fed into the rotor circuit via a coupling apparatus (7XR61 +
3PP1336). In addition to the current measurement via the sensi-
tive current input, the coupled voltage is also evaluated. The
rotor grounding resistance is calculated using a mathematical
model. This procedure eliminates the interfering influence of
the rotor capacitance to ground and increases the sensitivity. In
the case of interference-free excitation voltage, fault resistances
of up to 30 kΩ can be detected. The function has a two-tier
design (warning and tripping stages). In addition, the rotor
circuit is monitored for open circuit by an undercurrent stage.
Rotor resistance measurement R<, 1-3 Hz *
In this method, a low-frequency, square-wave voltage (typically, [Dw_PrReLo_02, 1, en_US]
1 – 3 Hz) is coupled into the rotor circuit through a ballast Figure 3.2/11 Temperature curve of the rotor and repeated motor start-
(7XT71) and resistor device (7XR6004). Through this method, up
the interfering influence of the rotor capacitance to ground is
eliminated and a good signal-to-noise ratio for the harmonic Directional overcurrent protection, phases and ground
components (for example, 6th harmonic) of the exciter device is (ANSI 67, 67N)
achieved. A high sensitivity in the measurement is possible.
The functions directional time-overcurrent protection for phases
Fault resistances up to 80 kΩ can be detected. The rotor ground
and ground sense short circuits in electrical equipment. With
circuit is monitored for continuity by evaluation of the current
directional time-overcurrent protection, the units can also be
during polarity reversal.
used in power systems in which not only the overcurrent crite-
Due to the high sensitivity, this function is recommended for rion but also the direction of power fl ow to the fault location is
larger generators. a selectivity criterion, e.g. in single-feed parallel lines, in double-
The function requires a hardware configuration of the 7UM85 feed lines, or in looped lines.
with a IO210. Two defi nite time-overcurrent protection stages (DTL stages)
and one inverse time-overcurrent protection stage (IDMTL
*In preparation
stage) are preconfi gured. Further defi nite time-overcurrent
Restart inhibit (ANSI 66) protection stages and one stage with a user-defi ned character-
The restart inhibit prevents the motor from restarting if the istic can be confi gured within the function.
permitted temperature limit would thus be exceeded. For the inverse time-overcurrent protection stages, all common
The rotor temperature of a motor is far below the permissible characteristics according to IEC and ANSI/IEEE are available.
temperature limit during normal operation and also under The Figure 3.2/12 shows how the direction characteristic of the
increased load conditions. High starting currents required when ground function can be freely configured. The characteristic can
starting the motor increase the risk of the rotor being thermally be rotated for the phase function.
damaged rather the stator due to overheating. This is related to
the short thermal constant of the rotor. To avoid tripping of the
circuit breaker due to multiple motor start-up attempts, the
restart of the motor has to be inhibited if it is obvious that the
temperature limit of the rotor has been exceeded during a
startup attempt (siehe Figure 3.2/11).
3.2
[dw_DwDirRot, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/12 Direction characteristics of the extended ground function
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Directional ground-fault protection with phase selector (ANSI 67G, 50G, 51G)
Apart from the characteristics, the stages have an identical 5 mA to 100 A with a rated current of 1 A and from 5 mA to
structure. 500 A with a nominal current of 5 A. Thus the ground-fault over-
current protection can be applied with extreme sensitivity.
• Blocking functions of the stage: on measuring voltage failure,
via binary input signal, or by other functions (automatic reclo- The function is equipped with special digital fi lter algorithms,
sure, cold load pickup) providing the elimination of higher harmonics. This feature is
particularly important for low zero sequence fault currents
• Every stage can be restrained against over-response caused by which usually have a high content of 3rd and 5th harmonics.
transformer inrush currents
• The direction can be set for each stage Dynamic setting change
Dynamic setting change of pickup values and delay time settings
• The stage can optionally be used for directional comparison can be activated depending on the status of an auto-reclosure
protection. Both a release and a blocking method can be
function. An instantaneous switch-on to fault is applicable for
implemented
each stage.
• Each stage can be used as an alarm stage (no trip signal) Phase selector
• For the measuring method, measurement of the fundamental The ground-fault protection is suitable for 3-phase and, option-
or the rms value can be selected
ally, for 1-phase tripping by means of a sophisticated phase
• The ground function evaluates the calculated zero-sequence selector. It may be blocked during the dead time of 1-pole autor-
current (3I0) or the measured ground current eclose cycles or during pickup of a main protection function.
• Logarithmically inverse characteristics are also available for Directional sensitive ground-fault detection (ANSI 67Ns,
the ground stages. ANSI 51Ns, 59N)
Directional ground-fault protection with phase selector The directional sensitive ground-fault detection function detects
(ANSI 67G, 50G, 51G) ground faults in isolated and arc-suppression-coil-ground power
In grounded systems, it may happen that the main protection systems. Various function stages are available for this purpose
sensitivity is not sufficient to detect high-resistance ground that can also be used in parallel. Thus, the working method of
faults. The SIPROTEC 5 device therefore has protection functions the function can best be adapted to the conditions of the power
for faults of this nature. system, the user philosophy and different manifestations of the
error:
Multiple stages
Overvoltage elements with zero-sequence system / residual
The ground fault overcurrent protection can be used with 6 defi- voltage
nite-time stages (DT) and one inverse-time stage (IDMTL).
The zero-sequence voltage (residual voltage) is evaluated as to
The following inverse-time characteristics are provided: threshold-value violation. In addition, the faulty phase can be
• Inverse acc. to IEC 60255-3 determined when the phase-ground voltages are connected.
Directional ground-current elements with direction determina-
• ANSI/IEEE inverse tion using cos φ and sin φ measurement
• Logarithmic inverse This is the “classical“ wattmetric (cos φ, in the arc-suppression-
• V0-inverse coil-ground power system) or varmetric (sin φ, in the isolated
power system) method of measurement for the directional
• S0-inverse. detection of static ground faults. For direction determination,
the current component which is perpendicular to the set direc-
Appropriate direction decision modes
tion-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive (3I0dir.),
The direction decision can be determined by the residual current see Figure 3.2/13. The stage is adaptable to the power system
I0 and the zero sequence voltage V0 or by the negative conditions by a corresponding setting (position of the direction-
sequence components V2 and I2. Using negative-sequence characteristic curve). Therefore, very sensitive and precise meas-
components can be advantageous in cases where the zero urements are possible.
sequence voltage tends to be very low due to unfavorable zero
3.2
sequence impedances.
In addition or as an alternative to the directional determination
with zero sequence voltage, the ground current of a grounded
power transformer may also be used for polarization. Dual polar-
ization applications can therefore be fulfi lled. Alternatively, the
direction can be determined by evaluation of zero sequence
power. Each stage can be set in forward or reverse direction or
both directions (non-directional).
High sensitivity and stability
The SIPROTEC 5 devices can be provided with a sensitive neutral
[dwcosphi-171012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
(residual) current transformer input. This feature provides a
measuring range for the ground current (fault current) from Figure 3.2/13 Direction determination with cos φ measurement
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Power-swing blocking (ANSI 68)
Directional ground-current element with direction determina- A subsequent network fault is reliably detected and results in
tion using φ (V, I) measurement phase-selective reset of the distance protection blocking by the
power-swing detection.
This method can be applied as an alternative to the cos φ or sin
φ method if this is desired because of user philosophy. The
direction is found by determining the phase angle between the
angle-error compensated ground current and the rotated zero-
sequence voltage V0. To take different system conditions and
applications into account, the reference voltage can be rotated
via an adjustable angle. This moves the vector of the rotated
reference voltage close to the vector of the ground current
3I0com. Consequently, the result of direction determination is as
reliable as possible (see also Figure 3.2/12).
Transient ground-fault method
This transient method operates only during the first 1 to
2 periods after fault inception. It determines the direction via
the evaluation of the active energy of the transient process. It is
[power-swing, 1, en_US]
especially appropriate if direction information is required for
errors that expire again very quickly (after 0.5 to a few periods). Figure 3.2/14 Power-swing detection during 1-pole open condition
Thus, a use parallel to the stage with cos φ measurement lends
itself. Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
This method can also be operated in meshed power systems. It The circuit breaker coil including its feed lines is monitored with
is also especially well-suited for closed rings because circulating two binary inputs. An alarm will be generated if there is an inter-
residual currents are eliminated. Due to additional logic, the ruption in the trip circuit.
function can also optionally clear a static error. Out-of-step protection (ANSI 78)
Non-directional ground-current stage In electric power transmission systems electrical stability must
If necessary, a simple, non-directional ground-current stage can be maintained at all times. If system conditions arise that
be configured. threaten the stability measures must be taken to avoid an esca-
lation. One such system is the out-of-step protection. The func-
General information
tion can be applied as out-of-step protection or can be inte-
In particular in arc-suppression-coil-ground power systems, the grated into more complex systems for supervision and load
result is a high angular accuracy. For this purpose, the measured control, i.e. system integrity protection systems (SIPS).
ground current is corrected via the stored error characteristic of
The out-of-step function constantly evaluates the impedance
the core balance current transformer (angle error as a function
trajectory of the positive sequence impedance. The response
of the current).
characteristic is defined by impedance zones in the R/X plane.
A special algorithm is capable of quickly detecting the fault Accumulators are incremented depending on the point at which
extinction. With this detection, the directional ground-current the impedance trajectory enters or exits the associated impe-
stages, the direction determination of which is based on the dance zone. Tripping or signaling occurs when the set accumu-
phase angle relationship between zero-sequence current and lator limits are reached. The out-of-step protection provides up
zero-sequence voltage, can be blocked. Thus, the stability is to four independent impedance zones which can be adjusted
increased during the decay process of the zero-sequence system and tilted according to the requirements of stability in the
in the resonant-grounded power system. Responses of protec- power network (see Figure 3.2/15
tive devices and trippings can be saved in the separate ground-
fault log.
Power-swing blocking (ANSI 68)
Dynamic transient incidents, for instance short-circuits, load 3.2
fluctuations, auto-reclosures or switching operations can cause
power swings in the transmission network. During power
swings, large currents along with small voltages can cause
unwanted tripping of distance protection devices. The power-
swing blocking function avoids uncontrolled tripping of the
distance protection. Power swings can be detected under
symmetrical load conditions as well as during 1-pole auto-
reclose cycles
No settings required
The function requires no settings. The optimal computation is
always obtained by automatic adaptation. During a power-swing
blocking situation all swing properties are constantly supervised.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Automatic reclosing (ANSI 79)
modes are provided in addition to the above mentioned

features:
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase short circuits, no reclosing
for multi-phase faults
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and for 2-phase faults
without ground, no reclosing for multi-phase short circuit
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase fault and 3-pole autore-
closing for multi-phase faults
1-polige AWE bei 1-poligen Fehlern, 3-polige AWE bei mehr-
poligen Fehlern
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and for 2-phase faults
without ground and 3-pole auto-reclosure for other faults
• Appropriate evolving fault response
• 3-pole coupling (positive 3-pole tripping) in case of circuit-
breaker pole discrepancy.
Voltage-dependent supplementary functions
[impedance zones, 1, en_US] The integration of auto-reclosure in the feeder protection allows
Figure 3.2/15 Impedance zones for out-of-step protection evaluation of the line-side voltages. A number of voltagede-
pendent supplementary functions are thus available:
Automatic reclosing (ANSI 79) • DLC
About 85% of the arc faults on overhead lines are extinguished By means of a dead-line check, reclosure is effected only
automatically after being tripped by the protection. The over- when the line is de-energized (prevention of asynchronous
head line can therefore be re-energized. Reclosure is performed circuit-breaker closure), if no synchrocheck can be used
by an automatic-reclosing function (AR). Each protection func- • ADT
tion can be confi gured to start or block the auto-reclosure func- The adaptive dead time is employed only if auto-reclosure at
tion. the opposite end was successful (reduction of stress on equip-
ment)
Basic features and operating modes
• Tripping controlled start with action time or without action • RDT
Reduced dead time is employed in conjunction with autore-
time
closure where no teleprotection is used: When faults within
• Pickup controlled start with action time or without action time the overreach zone, but external to the protected line, are
switched off for short-time interruption, the RDT function
• 3-pole auto-reclosing for all types of faults; different dead decides on the basis of measurement of the reverse polarity
times are available depending on the type of fault
voltage from the opposite end, which has not tripped,
• Multiple-shot auto-reclosure whether or not to reduce the dead time.
• Cooperation with the internal or an external synchrocheck Frequency protection (ANSI 81O, 81U)
• Cooperation with external devices via binary inputs and Frequency deviations are caused by an unbalance between
outputs or via communication with GOOSE message in generated and consumed the active power. Causes are, for
IEC 61850 systems example, load shedding, network disconnections, increased
• Monitoring of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact need for active power, generator failures or faulty functioning of
the power and frequency regulation.
• Dynamic setting change of overcurrent protection elements, The frequency protection detects frequency deviations in the
depending on the AR status.
3.2 network or in electric machines. It monitors the frequency band
Two auto-reclosure (AR) functions and outputs failure indications. In case of critical power
For applications with two circuit breakers per feeder, e.g. frequency entire generation blocks can be isolated or networks
breaker-and-a-half, ring bus or double circuit-breaker applica- can be decoupled. To ensure network stability, load shedding
tions the devices can be confi gured to operate with two inde- can be initiated.
pendent auto-reclosure functions. Different frequency measuring elements with high accuracy and
1-pole auto-reclosure short pickup times are available. Tripping by frequency meas-
uring elements can be effected either at the local circuit breaker
In electrical power systems with grounded system neutral-point
or at the opposite end by remote tripping.
and if the circuit-breaker pole can be operated individually, a 1-
pole auto-reclosure is usually initiated for 1-phase short circuits. The following measuring elements are available:
1-pole auto-reclosure functionality is available in SIPROTEC 5
devices with 1-pole tripping capability. The following operating
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R)
Overfrequency protection (ANSI 81O) • Unblocking method

- Each scheme in permissive mode can be extended with
Two preconfigured stages, can be increased up to three stages.
unblocking logic
All stages are of identical design.
Underfrequency protection (ANSI 81U) • Blocking method
Three preconfigured stages, can be increased up to five stages. • Backward Interlocking
All stages are of identical design.
• Bus section protection
Each frequency measurement procedures two measurements:
The send and receive signals are available as general signals or
• Angle difference method: Angle change of the voltage phasor as phase-selective signals. The phase-selective signals are
over a time interval advantageous as they ensure reliable 1-pole disconnection,
• Filter method of measurement: Evaluation of immediate especially if 1-phase faults occur on different lines. The protec-
voltage values with special filters. tion schemes with automatic remote tripping are suitable also
for power lines with more than 2-ended lines, for example teed-
For all measuring methods the specific protection functions are
feeder lines. Up to 6-ended configurations are possible.
provided in the DIGSI 5-library.
Transient blocking (current reversal monitoring) is provided for
Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R)
all release and blocking methods in order to suppress interfer-
Frequency changes can be detected quickly with the rate-offre- ence signals during tripping of parallel lines.
quency- change protection. The function is able to prevent
Weak or no infeed: Echo and tripping (ANSI 85/27)
unsafe states of the system caused by unbalance between
generated and consumed active power. It is therefore used in To prevent delayed tripping of distance protection permissive
power system disconnection and load shedding measures. schemes and ground-fault directional comparison scheme
during weak or zero infeed situations, an echo function is
The function provides two types of stages:
provided. If no fault detector is picked up at the weak-infeed
• df/dt rising end of the line, the signal received here is returned as echo to
allow accelerated tripping at the strong infeed end of the line. It
• df/dt falling is also possible to initiate phase-selective tripping at the weak-
Of each type of stage, up to 5 stages can be set up in the func- infeed end. A phase-selective 1-pole or 3-pole trip is issued if a
tion. send signal is received and if the measured voltage drops corre-
spondingly. This feature is available for all permissive under-
By defining the measurement window length, either the meas-
reach and overreach schemes. As an option, the weak infeed
uring accuracy or the starting time can be optimized for the
logic can be equipped according to a French specification.
specific application.
Teleprotection for directional ground-fault protection
On undervoltages, the function is automatically blocked to
(ANSI 85/67N)
exclude imprecise or incorrect measurements.
For fast clearance of faults up to 100% of the line length the
Teleprotection scheme for distance protection (ANSI 85/21)
directional ground-fault protection can be expanded with a tele-
A teleprotection scheme is available for fast clearance of faults protection scheme.
up to 100% of the line length.
The following schemes are available:
For conventional signal transmission, the required send and
receive signals can be freely distributed to binary inputs and
• Directional comparison
outputs. The signals can also be transferred via the protection • Blocking
interface, a system-wide feature of the SIPROTEC 5 product
family. Transmission via GOOSE messages with IEC 61850 • Unblocking
system interfaces is provided as well, if the available communi- The send and receive signals are available as general signals or
cation structures in the switchgear fulfill the requirements as as phase-selective signals in combination with the phase
per IEC 61850-90-1. selector of the directional ground-fault protection. For conven-
The following teleprotection schemes are available for the tional signal transmission the send and receive signals can be 3.2
distance protection: freely assigned to binary inputs and outputs. The signals can
certainly be transferred via the serial protection data interface, a
• Distance protection with underreaching (permissive under- SIPROTEC 5-wide system feature. The transmission via GOOSE
reach transfer trip)
messages with IEC 61850-system interfaces is provided as well,
- Grading time reduction with overreaching zone (transfer
if the available communication structures in the substations
tripping via expanded measuring range)
fulfill the intra-substation requirements according to
- Grading time reduction with pickup (intertripping via pickup)
IEC 61850-90-1.
- Intertripping scheme (intertripping underreach protection)
The “transient blocking” (current reversal guard) function can be
• Distance protection with underreaching (permissive overreach enabled in order to suppress the interference signals during trip-
transfer trip)
- Overreaching zone (permissive overreach transfer trip ping of parallel lines. Communication of the teleprotection func-
scheme) tions for distance protection and ground-fault protection can
- Directional comparison with directional pickup
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Line differential protection (ANSI 87L, 87T)
use the same signaling channel or separate and redundant

channels.
Line differential protection (ANSI 87L, 87T)
Line differential protection is a selective short-circuit protection
for overhead lines, cables, and busbars with single-side and
multi-side infeed in radial, looped, or meshed power systems. It
can be used at all voltage levels. Line differential protection
works strictly phase-selectively and allows instantaneous trip-
ping of 1-phase or 3-phase errors at up to six line ends.
Depending on the device variant, one-pole/three-pole
(7SD87/7SL87) or only three-pole tripping
(7SD82/7SD86/7SL82/7SL86) is possible. The devices in a differ-
ential protection topology communicate with each other via
protection interfaces (protection communication). The flexible
use of available communication media saves investment in
communication infrastructure and guarantees the protection of
lines of all lengths.
Adaptive measurement
An adaptive measurement method ensures a maximum of sensi- [AuslöseChar, 1, en_US]
tivity to detect internal faults under all conditions. To guarantee Figure 3.2/16 Tripping characteristics
highest stability, any measurement or communication errors are
taken into account (see Figure 3.2/16). Simple settings and Charging-current compensation
supervision functions shorten time of engineering and commis-
sioning: Particularly with long cables and very long extra-high-voltage
lines, ground capacitances can cause considerable, permanently
• A sensitive measurement stage (IDiff >) detects high-impe- flowing capacitive load currents. These must be taken into
dance errors. Special algorithms ensure high stability even account by the tripping threshold of the sensitive differential
with high-level DC-components in the short-circuit current. protection stage because they generate a differential current.
The tripping time of this stage is about 30 ms when standard
output contacts are used • The charging-current compensation serves to improve the
sensitivity so that maximum sensitivity can be protected even
• A high-current differential stage (IDiff >>) offers high-speed at high charging currents.
fault clearance with very short tripping times when high-
speed contacts are used.
• The charging-current compensation requires that local
voltage transformers are connected.
• No external matching transformers are needed by taking • The principle of distributed compensation guarantees
different current-transformer ratios into consideration. maximum availability, since with local outage of measuring
• With the setting of current-transformer error data, the differ- voltages of a device, the remaining devices continue to guar-
ential protection device automatically calculates the restraint antee their part of the compensation.
current and sets its permissible sensitivity. Thus, no protection Transformer in the protection range
characteristic has to be parameterized. Only IDiff > (sensitive
Apart from normal lines, line differential protection can also
stage) and IDiff >> (high-current differential stage) must be set
protect lines with a transformer in block connection. The current
according to the charging current of the line/cable transformers selectively delimit the protection range.
• Enhanced communications features guarantee stability and • A separate transformer protection device can therefore be
accuracy even under disturbed or interrupted connections on
omitted, since line differential protection acts as transformer
all kinds of transmission media, like optical fibers, control
protection with measuring points that may lie far away from
lines, telephone cables or communication networks.
one another
3.2
• Monitoring and display of differential and restraint currents • With few additional transformer parameters such as rated
during normal operation
apparent power, primary voltages, connection symbols and
• High stability during external short circuits, even with any neutral-point groundings of the respective windings,
different current-transformer saturation levels. there is no need for external matching transformers
• When long lines or cables get switched on, large transient • The sensitivity of differential protection can be further
charging current peaks occur. To avoid higher settings and increased by capturing the ground currents of grounded
less sensitivity of the IDiff >> differential current stage, the neutral-point windings
response threshold of the IDiff > stage may be increased for a • The inrush-current detection function stabilizes the differen-
settable time interval. This offers higher sensitivity under tial protection against tripping due to transformer inrush
normal load conditions. currents. This can occur phase-selectively or in 3-phase by
means of the crossblock function.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Line differential protection (ANSI 87L, 87T)
Breaker-and-a-half layouts
Differential protection can easily be integrated into breaker-and-
a-half layouts. With corresponding hardware extension (see
standard variants), two 3-phase current inputs per device are
configurable. Thus, ultimately topologies of up to 12 measuring
points with 6 devices can be configured. The protection of a
STUB-BUS can be assumed by the separate STUB differential
protection.
Enhanced communications features
The line differential protection uses the protection interfaces in
the "Differential protection" configuration (Type 1, see Protec-
tion communication). Different communication modules and
external converters allow the interfacing and use of all available
communication media.
• Direct fiber-optic data transmission is immune to electromag-
netic disturbances and offers the highest transmission speed
to achieve the shortest tripping times [dw_ring, 2, en_US]
• External communication converters enable communication Figure 3.2/17 Differential protection in ring topologies
via existing control cables, telephone lines or communication
networks.
The data required for the differential calculations are cyclically
exchanged in full-duplex mode in the form of synchronous,
serial telegrams between the protection devices. Comprehen-
sive supervision functions ensure stability in operation in any
communication environment:
• Telegrams are secured with CRC checksums to detect trans-
mission errors immediately. Differential protection processes
only valid telegrams.
• Supervision of all communication routes between the device
without the need for additional equipment
• Unambiguous identification of each device is ensured by the
assignment of settable communication addresses for each
unit within a differential protection topology
• Detection of telegrams reflected back to the sending device in
the communication network
• Detection of time delay changes in communication networks
[dw_Ketten, 2, en_US]
• Dynamic compensation of runtimes in the differential meas-
urement and supervision of the maximum permissible signal- Figure 3.2/18 Differential protection in chain topologies
transit time
Phase-selective circuit-breaker intertripping and remote trip/
• Indication of disturbed communication connections. Faulty- indications
telegram counters are available as operational measured
values. • Normally, the differential current is calculated for each line
end at the same time. This leads to fast and uniform tripping
• Switched communication networks can lead to unbalance in times. Under weak infeed conditions, especially when the
the runtimes in receive and transmit directions. The resulting 3.2
differential current is taken into account by the adaptive differential protection function is combined with an overcur-
measuring techniques of the differential protection rent pickup, a phase-selective breaker intertripping offers a
tripping of all line ends. Therefore high-speed transfer-trip
• With a high-precision 1 s pulse from a GPS receiver, the device signals get transmitted to the other line ends. These transfer-
can be synchronized with an absolute, exact time at each line trip signals can also be initiated by an external device via
end. In this way, time delays in receive and transmit path can binary inputs. Therefore, they can be used to indicate, for
be measured exactly. Thus, the differential protection can also example, a direction decision of the backup distance protec-
be used in communication networks with a maximum of tion.
sensitivity even under massive runtime unbalance conditions.
• The protection interfaces can exchange freely configurable,
binary inputs and output signals and measured values with
each other (see protection communication).
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – STUB differential protectionANSI 87 STUB)
Communication topologies/modes of function The following properties are essential for the protection func-
tion:
Differential protection devices may be arranged in a ring or
daisy-chain topology. A test mode offers advantages during • Restraint tripping characteristic with freely settable character-
commissioning and service operations. istic sections in accordance with Figure 3.2/19
• In a ring topology, the system tolerates the outage of a data • Integrated adaptation to the transformer ratio with different
connection. The ring topology is converted within 20 ms into rated currents of the current transformer (primary and secon-
a daisy-chain topology, so that the differential protection dary) taken into account
function continues to work without interruption.
• Flexible adaptation to the different transformer vector groups
• When a daisy-chain topology is specified by the communica- Flexible Anpassung an die unterschiedlichen Transformator-
tion infrastructure, cost effective relays with only one protec- schaltgruppen.
tion interface can be used at both daisy-chain ends.
• Adaptive adjustment of the trip characteristics by detection of
• For important two-end lines, a hot standby transmission is the transformer tapping
possible by a redundant communication connection to ensure
high availability. When the main connection is interrupted,
• Additional consideration given to neutral point currents with
grounded winding and thus increase of the sensitivity by one
the communication switches over from the main path to the third
secondary path.
• Redundant stabilization procedure (2nd harmonic + curve
• For service or maintenance reasons, individual differential wave analysis) to detect safely inrush procedures at the trans-
protection devices within multi-end topologies can be former
removed from the differential protection topology using a
binary input. Switch positions and load currents get checked • Further stabilization options through the evaluation of the 3rd
before a such a “logoff” takes effect. The remaining devices or 5th harmonic in the differential current. The 5th harmonic is
can continue to operate in this reduced topology. suitable for detecting safely a steady-state overexitation of
the transformer and thus for avoiding an overfunction
• The whole configuration can be shifted into a differential
protection test mode. All functions and indications continue • Additional stabilization procedures against external faults
to be available except the breakers will not trip. In this way, with current transformer saturation. The first procedure
the local relay can be tested with disconnection or intertrip- responds to high-current faults and monitors the differential
ping of the other relays. current curve (differential current detected outside the add-
on stabilization characteristic for a limited time, see Figure
STUB differential protectionANSI 87 STUB) 3.2/19). Changeover to an internal fault is safely detected.
STUB differential protection is a full-fledged line differential The second procedure works with low-current faults. Phase-
protection, but without communication between the line ends. angle shifts can occur in the secondary current due to the DC
It is used with a teed feeder or a breaker-and-a-half scheme, component in the short-circuit current and remanence of the
when a feeder of the line section can no longer be selectively current transformer. If jumps occur in the stabilization current
protected by opening the disconnector (example distance and if DC components are detected in the differential current
protection). at the same time, the tripping characteristic is increased for a
limited time
The activation of the STUB differential protection occurs through
the feedback of the disconnector position. The SIPROTEC 5 line • If asynchronous motors are connected to transformers, differ-
protection device must be equipped with two 3-phase current ential currents can occur due to the distorted transmission of
inputs in its hardware for this. The STUB differential protection the starting current. The start detection (jump in the stabiliza-
corresponds structurally and with regard to the setting parame- tion current and DC component evaluation) will raise the trip-
ters to the line differential protection (ANSI 87L) in all regards, ping characteristic
with the exception of protection data communication. It guaran- • High-power internal faults are detected safely and quickly
tees the selective protection of the remaining line section and with the high-current stage IDiff-fast (see Figure 3.2/20). In
rapid tripping times up to 10 ms. order to avoid an overfunction due to q-axis currents (e.g. use
Transformer differential protection (ANSI 87T) in one-and-a-half layout), the instantaneous values of the
differential and stabilization current are evaluated. Internal
3.2 The transformer differential protection is a selective short-circuit
and external faults are safely detected within a few millisec-
protection for power transformers with different types of design
onds.
(standard transformers and autotransformers) and different
connection designs. The number of protectable windings (sides) The protection function was adapted to the special conditions of
and the number of usable measuring points depends on the the autotransformer in order to ensure the protection of auto-
device type (see above explanations). transformers. The pure node point protection can be used as an
additional sensitive protection of the autotransformer winding.
The node point protection works parallel to the classical differ-
ential protection. The autotransformer banks become highly
sensitive to ground faults and interturn faults with it. Figure
3.2/21 shows the basic idea.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Differential Protection for Phase-Shifting Transformers
stability, an even load distribution in parallel transmission lines

and to avoid unbalance currents in the transmission system
loops. The main function of a phase-shifting transformer is to
change the effective phase shift between the input and output
voltage of a transmission line. In doing this, the function
controls the current load that can be transmitted with one line.
Phase-shifting transformers are integrated in series in the
system to influence the active power flow with additionally fed
voltage. This situation occurs, for example, when the increase in
transmission capacity requires building an additional line.
Specific control of the angle between line current and voltage
enables maximum possible utilization of both lines. A further
typical application is the control of the load flow or of the
energy fl ow direction at the coupling point of 2 systems.
[dwdifaus-030912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/19 Restrain tripping characterisitc of the function Idiff
[dw_PST_DIFF_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/22 Power output distribution between 2 lines with different

phase angle values
There are 3 function blocks for adapting the differential protec-

[dwidfast-300114-01.tif, 1, en_US] tion to different types of phase-shifting transformers:
Figure 3.2/20 Characteristics of the function Idiff-fast • Single-core PST are phase-angle transformers with a
maximum phase shift of 60°
• Two-core PST are transformers with regulation in quadrature
with a maximum phase shift of 90°
• Special transformers are transformers with fixed wiring of
windings, which result in a non-integer vector group digit
(e.g. SG 0.25 = 7.5°). They can be used as converter trans-
formers, for example.
The transformer differential protection automatically considers
the resulting value and angle changes. This means that the
changes do not need to be considered in the settings of the
pickup characteristic of the differential protection. The reversing
switch enables sign inversion between negative and positive
idling phase shift also under full load. In this case, the blocking
settings of the I-DIFF stage of the differential protection are 3.2
adjustable.
Ground fault differential protection (on the transformer)
[dw_spartrafobank, 1, en_US]
(ANSI 87N T)
Figure 3.2/21 Protection of an autotransformer through two differential The longitudinal differential protection can detect ground faults
protection in one device
close to the neutral point of a grounded star winding only to a
limited extent. The ground fault differential protection assists
Differential Protection for Phase-Shifting Transformers you with this. The neutral-point current and the calculated zero-
The differential protection function for phase-shifting trans- sequence current of the phase currents are evaluated according
formers function (PST) adds to the existing transformer differen- to Figure 3.2/23 and Figure 3.2/24. Overfunction in response to
tial protection function (ANSI 87T). external ground faults is prevented by stabilizing measures. In
addition to the differential and restraint currents, based on the
Phase-shifting transformers serve for controlling the reactive
zero-sequence variables, the phase angles of the zero-sequence
and active power in high-voltage systems. Their goal is voltage
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Differential motor protection (ANSI 87M)
currents between each other are monitored. The tripping vari-

able is the zero-sequence current in the neutral point.
[dwgrdpri-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/23 Ground-fault differential protection basic principle

[dw_fault_M1 side, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/25 Measuring point selection for multiple infeeds on the

neutral side
Differential motor protection (ANSI 87M)

• Detects ground faults and multiphase short circuits in motors
• Detects short circuits during the operation of motors on
power systems with a grounded neutral point
• Is stable during startup processes with current-transformer
saturation through intelligent saturation recognition methods
• Triggers safely in the case of internal high-current faults
through an additional high-current element
Differential motor protection is based on a comparison of
currents (Kirchhoff node method). The basic principle is that the
currents add up to zero in the protected object when it is in the
undisturbed operating state. If a differential current occurs, this
is a sure sign of a fault within the protected object.
The calculation of the difference is determined through the
current direction definition. The current direction is defined as
positive to the protected object. The current difference results
from the vector addition of the currents.
[dwausken-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US] In the protection function, the following properties become
Figure 3.2/24 Operate Curve important:
• Error-current stabilized operate curve with freely adjustable
For use in auto transformers, an additional measure was characteristic curve sections in accordance with Figure 3.2/20
adopted in order to prevent a failure in response to external
ground faults. The protection function independently deter- • Additional stabilization procedure against external errors with
current-transformer saturation. The first procedure reacts to
mines the side of the auto winding that is necessary for reliable
high-current errors and monitors the history of the differential
3.2 operation of the protection function. A measuring point is
current (time-limited occurrence of a differential current from
selected that results in the greatest restraint current (see also
the additional stabilization area, see Figure 3.2/20). A shift to
Figure 3.2/25).
an internal error is reliably detected. The second procedure
This method is also used if multiple three-phase current meas- works for low-current errors. Due to the DC component in the
uring points are present on the neutral side, such as in breaker- short-circuit current and remanence of the current trans-
and-a-half layouts (see Figure 3.2/23 and Figure 3.2/24). former, phase angle rotations in the secondary current can
In the differential protection devices, other protection functions result. If jumps in the restraint current occur and if DC compo-
are available that can be used as supplemental protection and nents are simultaneously detected in the differential current,
monitoring functions as well as backup protection for the an elevation of the operate curve is carried out on a time
upstream and downstream power system. It is also possible to limited basis.
monitor limiting values.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Generator differential protection (ANSI 87G)
• In the case of asynchronous motors, distorted transmission of few milliseconds, interior and exterior errors are reliably
the starting current may result in differential currents. Due to differentiated.
a startup detection (jump within the restraint current and DC Busbar differential protection (ANSI 87B)
component evaluation), the operate curve is raised.
Busbar protection is selective, reliable, and fast protection
• High-current internal errors are reliably and quickly detected against busbar short circuits in medium-voltage, high-voltage,
by the high-current stage Idiff-fast (see Figure 3.2/19). In
and extra-high-voltage installations with the most varied busbar
order to prevent an overfunction by quadrature-axis current
confi gurations.
components (for example, use in breaker-and-a-half layouts),
the instantaneous values from the differential and restraint The protection is suitable for switchgear with closed-core or
currents are evaluated. In a few milliseconds, interior and linear-characteristic current transformers.
exterior errors are reliably differentiated. It short tripping time is especially advantageous with high short-
Generator differential protection (ANSI 87G) circuit powers or if the power system stability is at risk.
Generator differential protection is a selective short-circuit The modular structure of the hardware enables the protection to
protection for generators of different designs. It processes the be optimally adapted to the configuration of the installation.
currents from the three-phase neutral point transformers and The protection function has the following features:
output side current transformers (see Figure 3.2/26).
• Phase-selective measurement and display
• Selective tripping of defective busbar sections
• Additional disconnector-independent check zone as a further
tripping criterion
• Shortest tripping times (<10ms)
• Excellent stability on external faults, even on instrument
transformer saturation, by means of stabilization with
through-fault currents
• Tripping characteristic with freely settable characteristic
[dw_anschaltung, 1, en_US] sections as shown in XXX
Figure 3.2/26 Generator differential protection interface • Sensitive tripping characteristic for low-current faults can
additionally be activated, for example, in impedance-
In the protection function, the following properties become grounded systems as shown in
important:
• Low requirements of the non-saturated time of the current
• Error-current stabilized operate curve with freely adjustable transformers due to fast detection of internal or external
characteristic curve sections, in accordance with Figure faults within 2 ms
3.2/19. • Three intermeshing measuring methods permit very short
• Automatic correction of a current transformer mismatch tripping times on busbar faults or ensure maximum stability
during large through-fault currents
• Additional stabilization procedure against external errors with The integrated circuit breaker failure protection detects failure
current-transformer saturation. The first procedure reacts to
of circuit breakers during busbar short circuits and provides a
high-current errors and monitors the history of the differential
trip signal for the circuit breaker at the opposite end of the line.
current (time-limited occurrence of a differential current from
On failure of a bus coupling circuit breaker, the adjacent busbar
the additional stabilization area, see Figure 3.2/19). A shift to
is tripped.
an internal error is reliably detected. The second procedure
works for low-current errors. Due to the DC component in the Capacitor bank differential protection (ANSI 87C)
short-circuit current and remanence of the current trans-
former, phase angle rotations in the secondary current can
• Acquires ground faults and multiphase short-circuits at capac-
itor banks
result. If jumps in the restraint current occur and if DC compo- 3.2
nents are simultaneously detected in the differential current, • Acquires ground faults during the operation of capacitor
an elevation of the operate curve is carried out on a time banks in systems with earthed star point
limited basis. • Features the required stabilization procedures for closing
operations
• Jump monitoring in the restraint current (typically during
startup operations for motors) can also be used to prevent • Secure and very fast tripping in case of internal high-current
overfunction in response to external errors. If a jump is faults using an additional high-current stage.
detected, the operate curve is raised on a time-limited basis. Voltage differential protection for capacitor banks (ANSI
• High-current internal errors are reliably and quickly detected 87V)
by the high-current stage Idiff-fast (see Figure 3.2/20). In The voltage differential protection function is used to detect C-
order to prevent an overfunction, the instantaneous values element faults within a capacitor bank. It can be used if a
from the differential and restraint currents are evaluated. In a voltage tap occurs within the capacitor installation. The function
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Fault locator (FL)
calculates the differential voltage based on phase selectivity accuracy on long lines under high load conditions and high fault
between the input voltage multiplied with a scale factor and the resistances is considerably increased.
busbar voltage. Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
Fault locator (FL)
Phasor Measurement Units (PMUs) make a valuable contribution
Single-ended fault locator to the dynamic monitoring of transient processes in energy
supply systems. The advantage over standard RMS values is for
The integrated fault locator calculates the fault impedance and
one thing that the phasor values of current and voltage are
the distance-to-fault. The result is specifi ed in ohms, miles, kilo-
transmitted. Secondly, each measured value includes the exact
meters or in percent of the line length. Parallel line and load
time stamp and therefore should be assigned within the trans-
current compensation are also available.
mission path in which it originates independent of the time
Double-ended fault locator (in preparation) delay. The phasors and analog values are transmitted by the
Due to the load current there is an angular displacement PMU with a configurable repetition rate (reporting rate). Due to
between the voltages of both line ends. This angle and possible the high-precision time synchronization (via GPS), the measured
differences in the source impedance angle cause the angular values from different substations that are far removed from
displacement between both line end currents. As a result, the each other are compared, and conclusions about the system
voltage drop across RF (resistance of failure) is affected by this state and dynamic events, such as power fluctuations, are
angle between the currents RF. The single ended measurement drawn from the phase angles and dynamic curves.
cannot compensate for this. The PMU function transmits its data via an integrated Ethernet
As an option for a line with two ends, a fault locator function module using a standardized protocol IEEE C37.118. The evalua-
with measurement at both ends of the line is available. The full tion can be done with a Wide Area Monitoring System (Figure
line model is considered. Thanks to this feature, measuring 3.2/27) for example SIGUARD PDP (Phasor Data Processor).
3.2
Figure 3.2/27 Use of SIPROTEC 5 devices as Phasor Measurement Units on a SIGUARD PDP evaluation system
SIPROTEC 5 System
Control – Transformer voltage controller (ANSI 90V)
Control Transformer voltage controller (ANSI 90V)

The transformer voltage controller functionality (ANSI 90V) is
used to control power transformers (two-winding transformers),
three-winding transformers, interconnecting transformers) and
auto transformers using a motor-operated tap changer. This
function is designed to control the following:
• For two-winding transformers: the voltage on the secondary
circuit of the power transformer
• For three-winding transformers: the voltage of the secondary
winding 1 or winding 2
• For grid coupling transformers: voltage of winding 1 or
winding 2, selectively depending on the power direction
The function offers automatic voltage control, within a preset
voltage band, on the secondary side of the transformers or alter-
natively at a remote load point (Z compensation or R/X compen-
sation) in the system. To compensate voltage fl uctuations in
the meshed system, use the LDC-Z procedure (Z compensation).
For voltage drops in the line, you can use the LDC-X and R proce-
dure (R/X compensation).
The control principle is based on the fact that an up or down
command to the tap changer causes a rise or fall in voltage,
depending on the voltage change (Δ V) for each step.
[dw_steuerung, 2, en_US]
The voltage control functions in each step and compares the
Figure 3.3/1 SIPROTEC 5 – functional integration – control
measured actual voltage (Vact) with the defi ned target voltage
(Vtarget). If the difference is greater than the set bandwidth (B),
SIPROTEC 5 includes all bay level control and supervision func-
tions that are required for efficient operation of the switchgear. an up or down command is output to the tap changer after the
defi ned delay (T1) has elapsed.
The large, freely configurable graphics display for control
diagrams is available for convenient local control. Frequent The voltage control function additionally monitors the current
operating actions, such as starting switching sequences or on the primary and secondary sides to block the controller in
displaying the message list, can be called up via one of the 9 impermissible operating conditions (overcurrent/undercurrent,
function keys. The required security is guaranteed by the key overvoltage/undervoltage, reverse power).
switches for local/remote and linterlocked/uninterlocked switch-
over.
The application templates supplied provide the full functionality
that you need for your application. Protection and control func-
tions access the same logical elements. From the perspective of
switching devices, protection and control are treated with equal
priority.
The modular, scalable hardware can be optimized for the system
conditions. You can easily put together the desired hardware
quantity structure. For example, a single SIPROTEC 5 device can
be used to control and monitor an entire breaker-and-a-half
diameter.
A new level of quality in control is achieved with the application
of communication standard IEC 61850. For example, binary
information from the bay can be processed very elegantly and 3.3
data (such as for interlocking across multiple fields) can be
exchanged between the devices. Cross communications via
GOOSE enable efficient solutions, since here the wiring is
replaced with data telegrams.
All devices already have up to 4 switching objects (switches,
disconnectors or grounding switches) via the base control
package. Optionally, additional switching objects and switching
sequence blocks (CFC switching sequences) can be activated.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Automation
Automation Of course, SIPROTEC 5 provides a substation automation system,

such as SICAM PAS/PQS, with all necessary information, thus
ensuring consistent, integrated and efficient solutions for
further automation.
[dw_automation, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.4/1 SIPROTEC 5 – functional integration – automation
The integrated CFC (Continuous Function Chart) graphical auto-

mation editor enables you to create logic diagrams clearly and
simply. DIGSI 5 supports this with powerful logic blocks based
on the standard IEC 61131-3. All devices already have a
powerful base automation package. This makes it easy to
provide specific functions for automating a switching cell or
switchgear.
Various stages of expansion for the continuous function charts
are available for the realization of your solutions.
• Function chart (CFC) basic
• Function chart (CFC) arithmetic
With the base package continuous function chart, you can
graphically link all internal digital information, such as internal
protection signals or operation states, directly to the logic blocks
and process them in real time. With the arithmetic function
chart (CFC) package you can also link measured values or
monitor them with respect to limiting values.
Examples of automation applications are:
• Interlocking checks
• Switching sequences
• Message derivations or the tripping of switching operations
3.4
• Messages or alarms by linking available information
• Load shedding in a feeder
• Management of decentralized energy feeds
• System transfers depending on the network status
• Automatic power system disconnections in the event of
power system stability problems
SIPROTEC 5 System
Monitoring
Monitoring Power Quality

Besides availability, the ultimate consumers demand that the
electrical energy they receive is also of high quality. The
increasing use of power electronic components can have
loading effects on power quality. Poor power quality can cause
interruptions, production outages, and high follow-up costs.
Accordingly, it is essential to capture and evaluate the power-
system variables reliably according to generally valid quality
criteria as defined in EN 50160.
For this, SIPROTEC 5 provides corresponding Power Quality
recorders, for example SIPROTEC 7KE85. These can be used to
detect weak points early so that corrective measures can be
taken. The large volume of data is archived centrally and
analyzed neatly with a SICAM PQS system.
Equipment
Condition monitoring is an important tool in asset management
and operational support from which both the environment and
the company can benefit. Equipment that typically requires
monitoring includes for example: Circuit breakers, transformers
and gas compartments in gas-insulated switchgear (GIS).
The measuring transducer inputs (0 mA to 20 mA) enable
connection to various sensors and monitoring of non-electrical
[dw_Monitoring, 2, en_US] variables, such as gas pressure, gas density, temperature. Thus,
Figure 3.5/1 SIPROTEC 5 – functional integration – monitoring SIPROTEC 5 enables a wide range of monitoring tasks to be
carried out.
SIPROTEC 5 devices can take on a wide variety of monitoring SIPROTEC 5 provides the process interfaces, logs, recorders and
tasks. automation functions necessary for monitoring equipment:
These can be divided into the following groups: • Process values are stored together with a time stamp in the
operational log
• Self Monitoring
• Monitoring power-system stability • The circuit-breaker statistics provide essential data for condi-
tion-based maintenance of switchgear
• Monitoring Power Quality • Process variables (for example, pressure, SF6 loss, speed, and
temperature) are monitored for limit violations via measuring
• Monitoring of equipment (condition monitoring) transducers connected to the sensors.
Self-monitoring • Using external 20 mA or temperature measurement devices
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with many monitoring proce- that are connected serially or by Ethernet, other measured
dures. These detect faults, internal as well as external, in secon- values can be captured and processed.
dary circuits, store them in logs, and report them. This informa-
tion is used to record the device fault and helps to determine
the cause of the error in order to take appropriate corrective
actions.
Power-system stability
Grid Monitoring combines all of the monitoring systems that are
necessary to assure power-system stability during normal opera-
tion. SIPROTEC 5 provides all necessary functionalities, such as
fault recorders, continuous recorders, fault locators and
synchrophasor measurement (Phasor Measurement Units, PMU)
for Grid Monitoring. This functionality allows you to monitor
power-system limit violations (such as dynamic stability assess-
ment via load angle control) and actively trigger the appropriate
3.5
responses. This data in the network control systems can also be
used as input variables for online power-flow calculation and
enable significantly faster response if statuses in the power
system change.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Data Acquisition and Recording
Data Acquisition and Recording in the power frequency. They can be transmitted to central anal-
ysis systems via the high-performance communication system.
Measured values are displayed per-unit quantity both in primary
and secondary values, and also in reference values. These values
are also made available to other applications, for example,
transferred to the systems control or automation tasks.
Up to 40 analog inputs can supplied to each device. Up to
80 analog inputs are supported in the busbar protection
SIPROTEC 7SS85.
The analog inputs of the SIPROTEC 5 devices can be selected
with a corresponding accuracy class and dynamic range suitable
for connection to both protections and measurement cores. The
innovative current terminal technology enables these to be
simply changed later on-site if needed. All analog inputs are
factory calibrated and thereby ensure maximum accuracy.
The following accuracies are typical:
• V, I ≤ 0.1% at frated
• V, I ≤ 0.3% in the expanded frequency range
(frated -10Hz, frated+10Hz)
• P ≤ 0.3% at frated
[dw_data, 2, en_US] • P ≤ 0.5% in the expanded frequency range
(frated -10Hz, frated+10Hz)
Figure 3.6/1 SIPROTEC 5 – functional integration – data acquisition and
logging
• Q ≤ 1.0% at frated
The recorded and logged bay data is comprehensive. It repre- • Q ≤ 1.5% in the expanded frequency range
sents the image and history of the bay. It is also used by the (frated -10Hz, frated+10Hz)
functions in the SIPROTEC 5 device for monitoring, inter-bay and
Separate measuring transducers (analog inputs) are therefore
substation automation tasks. Thus, they represent the basis both
unnecessary. The high-precision measured data enables
for the functions available today and for future applications.
extended energy management and makes commissioning much
Measurement and PMU easier. SIPROTEC 5 thus provides the following measured values
A large number of measured values are derived from the analog for analysis and further processing:
input variables, which supply a current image of the process. • The base measured values with high dynamic range and high
Depending on the device type, the following base measured accuracy (protection-class current transformer)
values are available:
• The base measured values with very high accuracy (instru-
• Operational measured values ment transformer)
• Fundamental phasor and symmetrical components • Synchrophasor measured values with high-precision time
stamping for subsequent tasks such as grid stability moni-
• Protection-specific measured values, for example differential toring.
and restraint current for differential protection
• Detection of current and voltage signals up to the 50th
• Mean values harmonic with high accuracy for selected protection functions
(for example, thermal overload protection, peak overvoltage
• Minimum values and maximum values protection for capacitors) and operational measured values.
• Energy measured values Recorder
• Statistic values In SIPROTEC 5, various data logs and recorders provide recording
large volumes of data. They feature a large number of analog
• Limiting values and binary inputs, and a high sampling frequency. An extremely
Besides the base measured values, synchrophasor measured wide range of records can be converted. Either continuously or
values can also be activated in the devices (application as PMU, as determined by various trigger criteria.
Phase Measurement Unit) Besides storing the data fail-safe on internal storage devices,
3.6 Synchrophasor measured values support a range of applications SIPROTEC 5 devices can also transfer the data to central analysis
for monitoring grid stability. For this purpose, SIPROTEC 5 systems. Consequently, you are able to monitor networks with
devices record the necessary PMU data. These high-precision, regard to typical characteristics.
time-stamped phasors indicate power frequency and the change
SIPROTEC 5 System
Fault recorder The time synchronization is optionally realized via:

The fault recording in protection devices and bay controllers • DCF77 signal
stores analog and binary data during a fault event, for example,
in the event of short circuits or ground faults, and preserves the • IRIG-B signal
records, including high-precision time stamps for subsequent • SNTP protocol
analysis. Calculated measurands, for example power or
frequency, can also be incorporated into the fault recording • Substation automation protocol (for example,
function. Analysis takes place after the data is read out from the IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850)
device by DIGSI using SIGRA. Recorded data is archived to • IEEE 1588 protocol (accuracy: 1μs)
prevent data loss in the event of supply voltage failure. Analog
and binary signal traces for recording are freely configurable, • Seconds pulse (for special high-precision applications)
and pre-trigger record duration and seal-in time can be
programmed within a very wide range. SIPROTEC 5 fault
• DIGSI 5 protocol (not cyclical)
recording provides long recording times with outstanding accu- • Timing master of a protection interface
racy.
• Internal time with integrated quartz crystal
• Recording of all analog channels
Time synchronization in the device has a battery back-up. Thus,
• Sampling frequencies from 1 kHz to 8 kHz the internal clock continues to run with the quartz accuracy of
the device even in case of outage of the auxiliary voltage.
• High recording capacity for individual records of 20 s for
24 channels at an 8 kHz sampling frequency
• Storage capacity for up to 128 fault records
• The recording duration for all records is limited by the avail-
able storage capacity of the device, and depends on the
number of configured channels and sampling frequency.
Example
- Line protection with 8 analog channels (4 I, 4 V),
- Sampling frequency 1 kHz, 6 measured value and 20 binary
channels: resulting recording capacity of the device about
890 s!
• Up to 100 freely configurable binary and 50 additional meas-
ured value tracks
• Due to the high number of up to 120 measured values, a
different record duration results for SIPROTEC 7SS85
• The SIPROTEC 7KE85 Fault Recorder has yet more proper-
ties:
– Expanded trigger criteria: Gradient trigger (ΔM/Δt), binary
[Time_settings, 1, --_--]
trigger, network trigger, etc.
– Higher sampling frequency of 16 kHz for up to 40 analog Figure 3.6/2 Time settings in DIGSI 5
channels
GPS time signal receiver for IRIG-B, DCF77
– Substantially longer record duration due to the additionally
installed mass storage. The recommended GPS time signal receiver from Meinberg
(Figure 3.6/3) synchronizes the internal time of all connected
The descriptions for the fast-scan, slow-scan, and continuous
protection devices. The internal clock of the protection devices
recorder as well as for the trigger functions are in the
are updated using the respective telegram (IRIG-B, DCF77).
"SIPROTEC 7KE85 Fault Recorder".
Optical fiber can also be used to transmit time signals (tele-
Time synchronization grams or second intervals) without interference even over larger
In order to be able to compare the recordings of fault recorders distances and in electromagnetically polluted environments.
at different locations to each other, a very exact time synchroni- SIPROTEC 5 devices generally support redundant time synchroni-
zation of all devices is necessary. Thus, the time synchronization zation. The time information can be provided by two external
is an important property and must be done with a high degree timers. One functions as the primary time source. If it fails,
of accuracy. In particular, the use of the Phasor Measurement switchover to the second (secondary) timer is performed.
Unit (PMU) function requires a precise time stamping Figure
3.6/2.
3.6
The time synchronization can be done using 1 or 2 timers.
Depending on time source, an accuracy from 1 ms to 1 μs is
attained. Events are logged with a date and time with 1 ms reso-
lution.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Maintainability
Hardware and software are constantly monitored and irregulari-
ties are detected immediately. In this way, extremely high levels
of security, reliability and availability are achieved at the same
time. Important information about essential maintenance activi-
ties (for example, battery supervision), hardware defects
detected by internal monitoring or compatibility problems are
separately recorded in the diagnostic log. All entries include
specific take-action instructions. The following table provides an
overview of the typical log.
The log entries and fault records are retained even if there is an
outage of the auxiliary and battery voltage.
Operational log 2000 messages Cyclical logging of operational

indications (for example,
control processes)
Fault log 1000 messages per Event-driven recording of
fault faults. A maximum of
128 faults can be stored. A
maximum of 1000 messages
can be recorded for each
fault.
User-specific log 200 messages Option of cyclical or event-
driven recording of user-
defined signals
Sensitive Ground- 100 messages per Event-driven recording of
Fault Log ground fault ground faults. A maximum of
10 ground faults can be
stored. A maximum of
100 messages can be
recorded for each ground
fault.
Parameterization 200 messages Logging of all parameter
history log changes and configuration
(cannot be downloads
deleted)
Communication 500 messages Logging the status of all
Log configured communication
connections, such as distur-
bances that arise, testing and
diagnostic operation and
communication loads
[dw_7KE85_GPS, 2, en_US] Security log 500 messages Logging the successful and
(cannot be unsuccessful attempts to
Figure 3.6/3 SIPROTEC 5 device with IRIG-B or DCF77 time synchroniza- deleted) access areas of the device
tion with conditional access rights.
Diagnostic log 500 messages Logging and display of
Event-log buffer specific take-action instruc-
tions in case of necessary
Event-log buffers mark important events with a time stamp
maintenance (for example,
(accurate to 1 ms) for subsequent analysis. battery supervision), detected
The long recording length is achieved with large event-log hardware defects or compati-
buffers and separate logs for different event categories. The bility problems.
events to be logged are freely configurable and provide
improved manageability. Configuration of user-specific event- Table 3.6/1 Overview of typical logs
log buffers for cyclical or event-driven recording is also
supported.
Convenient, thorough analysis
3.6
Event-log buffers of different categories enable easier, targeted
analysis. Changes to parameters and configuration data are
recorded.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication – Plug-in module positions of the device
Serial plug-in modules

SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with high-performance
communication interfaces. These interfaces are integrated Serial electrical plug-in modules are used for asynchronous serial
or extendable via plug-in modules to offer a high degree of protocols, e.g. IEC 60870-5-103, DNP 3. Optical 820-nm/1300-
flexibility. The concept of plug-in modules and loadable nm and 1550-nm modules can also be configured as protection
protocols enables exchangeability and retrofitting. interface for the point-to-point connection.
Serial electrical RS485 module
Communication
This module has either 1 (USART-AB-1EL) or 2 (USART-AC-2EL)
RS485 interfaces. The use of RJ45 sockets enables the construc-
tion of an economical serial RS485 bus with patch cables, which
are simply looped through. This saves on wiring time and cable
costs. Figure 3.7/2 shows an electrical serial module with 2
interfaces on which 2 independent serial protocol applications
are executed.
[dw_Communication, 2, en_US]
[E_CC_USART-AC-2EL_sRGB, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.7/1 SIPROTEC 5 – functional integration – communication
Figure 3.7/2 Serial electrical double module (USART-AC-2EL)
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with high-performance
communication interfaces. These are integrated interfaces or Serial optical 820-nm module
interfaces that are extendable with plug-in modules to provide a
This module exists with 1 (USART-AD-1FO) or 2 (USART-AE-2FO)
high level of security and flexibility. There are various communi-
optical 820-nm interfaces (Figure 3.7/3), with which distances
cation modules available. At the same time, the module is inde-
between 1.5–2 km can be bridged via 62.5-/125-μm multimode
pendent of the protocol used. This can be loaded according to
optical fibers. The optical connection is made via ST connectors.
the application. Particular importance was given to the realiza-
Apart from serial protocols, the synchronous serial protection
tion of full communication redundancy:
interface can be operated on the module, and enables optical
• Several serial and Ethernet-based communication interfaces direct connections via multimode optical fibers. 2 devices can
thus either exchange data, e.g. of the differential protection via
• A large number of serial and Ethernet-based logs (for a short direct connection, or they can be connected through
example, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 serial and TCP, Modbus TCP,
communication networks via a 7XV5662 converter. Additionally,
IEC 60870-5-104 and IEC 61850 Ed1 and Ed2)
the module can be connected directly with an optical multi-
• Full availability of the communication ring when the plexer input in accordance with standard IEEE C37.94.
switching cell is enabled for servicing operations
• Ethernet redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
• A large number of plug-in modules having various communi-
cation protocols.
Plug-in module positions of the device
The base module can be extended via module slots E and F. All
available modules can be installed there. The expansion module
CB202 is designed for 3 additional plug-in modules if the two
slots in the base module are not suffi cient. Any additional plug-
3.7
in modules can be installed in slots N and P. Analog expansion
modules can be plugged into slot M. This slot does not support
serial or Ethernet modules.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication – Plug-in modules for Ethernet
[E_CC_USART-AE-2FO_sRGB, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.7/3 Serial optical 820 nm double module (USART-AE-2FO)

[E_CC_ETH-BB-2FO_sRGB, 1, --_--]
Serial optical 1300 nm/1550 nm module Figure 3.7/4 Serial, optical double module for wide-range connections
Long distance modules are used for synchronous serial data via optical fibers ((for module designation see tables "Long
distance modules")
exchange of protection communication via multimode optical
fibers or single mode fibers. They are available with 1 or 2 inter-
faces (Table 3.7/1). The optical connection is made via LC Plug-in modules for Ethernet
duplex plugs.
Ethernet modules are used for Ethernet-based protocol applica-
tions e.g. IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 TCP, time synchro-
Optical wavelength Module designation Application
nization via SNTP, network management via SNMP, DIGSI 5 via
with 1 or 2 interfaces
TCP etc. Several applications can run in parallel, whereby
1300 nm USART-AF-1LDFO, max. 24 km via 2
unused applications can be switched off for security reasons.
USART-AU-2LDFO single mode fibers or
max. 4 km via 2 multi- Electrical Ethernet module
mode optical fibers
Electrical Ethernet module The ETH-BA-2EL module has 2 RJ45
1300 nm USART-AG-1LDFO, max. 60 km via single
interfaces (Figure 3.7/5). It can be configured with or without
USART-AV-2LDFO mode fibers
an integrated switch. The maximum electrically permitted
1550 nm USART-AK-1LDFO, 100 km via single
distance via CAT 5 patch cables is 20 m.
USART-AY-2LDFO mode fibers
Table 3.7/1 Long distance modules for different distances for point-to-
point connections with 2 fi bers
Use of modules in pairs

Special modules enable bi-directional data exchange via one
optical fiber. This saves one fiber per data connection on optical
fiber lines, without functional limitations in comparison with
connections with two fibers. These modules transmit at 1300
nm or 1550 nm, but must be used in pairs (seeTable 3.7/1 and
Figure 3.7/4). The optical connection is made via LC simplex
plugs.
Optical wave- Module designation with Application

length 1 or 2 interfaces
1300 nm / USART-AH-1LDFO <-> max. 40 km via a single
USART-AJ-1LDFO mode fiber (with inte-
1550 nm
grated fiber optic multi- [E_CC_ETH-BA-2EL_sRGB, 1, --_--]
USART-AX-2LDFO <->
plexer)
USART-AY-2LDFO Figure 3.7/5 Electrical Ethernet module (ETH-BA-2EL)
Table 3.7/2 WAN modules for point-to-point connections with one fi Optical Ethernet module
ber
3.7 The ETH-BB-2FO module has 2 optical LC duplex 1300 nm inter-
faces (Figure 3.7/6). It can be configured with or without an
integrated switch. The maximum optically permitted distance
via 50/125-μm or 62.5/125-μm multimode optical fibers is 2 km.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication – Plug-in modules for Ethernet
The optical transmission and receiving level is measured in the

module and can be displayed with DIGSI 5.
[E_CC_ETH-BB-2FO_sRGB, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.7/6 Optical Ethernet module (ETH-BB-2FO)
3.7
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication – Plug-in modules for the communication
Plug-in modules for the communication
Module Type: Plug-In Module USART-AD-1FO

Port G: Time Synchronization
Module Type: USART-AE-2FO

Module Type: USART-AC-2EL
Module Type: USART-AB-1EL
Port J: Integrated Ethernet
Module Type: ETH-BB-2FO

Module Type: ETH-BA-2EL
Port or plug-in modules
Front interface
Physical Connection
USB-A ■
9-pin D-sub socket ■
1 x electrical Ethernet 10/100 Mbps, RJ45 ■
1 x electrical serial RS485, RJ45 ■
2 x electrical serial RS485, RJ45 ■
1 × optical serial, 1.5 km, 820 nm, ST connector ■
2 × optical serial, 1.5 km, 820 nm, ST connector ■
2 x electrical Ethernet 10/100 Mbps, RJ45, 20 m ■
2 × optical Ethernet 100 Mbps, 2 km, 1300 nm, LC duplex plug ■
Applications
DIGSI 5 protocol ■ ■ ■ ■
IRIG-B, DCF77, high-precision 1 pps ■
IEC 61850-8-1 server (including GOOSE, reporting to 6 clients) ■ ■ ■
IEC 60870-5-103 ■ ■ ■ ■
IEC 60870-5-104 ■ ■
IEC 60870-5-104 + IEC 61850-8-1 server (including GOOSE, reporting ■ ■
to 2 clients)
DNP3 serial ■ ■ ■ ■
DNP3 TCP ■ ■
DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850-8-1 server (including GOOSE, reporting to ■ ■
2 clients)
Modbus TCP ■ ■
Modbus TCP + IEC 61850-8-1 server (including GOOSE, reporting to 2 ■ ■
clients)
Synchrophasor (IEEE C37.118-IP) ■ ■
Protection interface (Sync. HDLC, IEEE C37.94) * ■ ■
Slave unit protocol (connection to 20 mA box or temp. box) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Additional Ethernet protocols and services
DHCP, DCP (automatic IP configuration) ■ ■ ■
RSTP, PRP, and HSR (Ethernet redundancy) ■ ■
SNTP (time synchronization over Ethernet) ■ ■ ■
SNMP V3 (network management protocol) ■ ■
IEEE 1588 (time synchronization via Ethernet) ■ ■
Diagnosis: Ethernet module homepage (http) ■ ■
Note: The USART and ETH plug-in module types may be used in slots E and F in the base module as well as in slots N and P in the CB202 expansion
module. They are not intended for use in slot M in the CB202 expansion module.
* Additional plug-in modules for protection interface: see next table
3.7 Table 3.7/3 Communication applications and plug-in modules
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication – Plug-in modules for the communication
Plug-in modules for the communication
Module Type: USART-AW-2LDFO 3)

Module Type: USART-AH-1LDFO 1)
Module Type: USART-AX-2LDFO 4)

Module Type: USART-AJ-1LDFO 2)
Module Type: USART-AG-1LDFO
Module Type: USART-AU-2LDFO
Module Type: USART-AV-2LDFO
Module Type: USART-AK-1LDFO
Module Type: USART-AY-2LDFO

Module Type: USART-AF-1LDFO
Plug-in modules for applications with the protection interface
Physical Connection
1 × optical serial, 1300 nm, LC duplex plug, 24 km (single-mode fiber), 4 km ■
(multi-mode fiber)
2 × optical serial, 1300 nm, LC duplex plug, 24 km (single-mode fiber), 4 km ■
(multi-mode fiber)
1 × optical serial, 1300 nm, LC duplex plug, 60 km (single-mode fiber) ■
1 × optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber, 1300 nm / 1550<nm, LC ■
simplex plug, 40 km (single-mode fiber) 1)
1 × optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber, 1550 nm / 1300 nm, LC ■
simplex plug, 40 km (single-mode fiber) 2)
2 × optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber, 1300 nm / 1550 nm, ■
2 x LC simplex plug, 40 km (single-mode fiber) 3)
2 × optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber, 1550 nm / 1300 nm, ■
2 x LC simplex plug, 40 km (single-mode fiber) 4)
Application
Protection Interface ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Notes:
The USART plug-in module types can be used in slots E and F in the base module as well as in slots N and P in the CB202 expansion module. They are not
intended for use in slot M in the CB202 expansion module.
The plug-in modules of types ANAI and ARC can be used in both slots in the base module (ports E and F), as well as in all slots in the expansion module
CB202 (ports M, N and P).
1) USART-AH-1LDFO only pairs with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO
2) USART-AJ-1LDFO only pairs with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO
3) USART-AW-2LDFO only pairs with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO
4) USART-AX-2LDFO only pairs with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO
Table 3.7/4 Plug-in modules for applications with the protection interface and for other applications
3.7
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication – Plug-in modules for additional applications
Plug-in modules for additional applications
Plug-in module for additional applications Module type: ANAI-CA-4EL Module type: ARC-CD-3FO
Physical Connection
8-pin screw-type terminal strip ■
3 x optical (for point sensor) ■
Applications
Measuring transducer, 4 inputs, DC ±20mA ■
Arc protection ■
Table 3.7/5 Plug-in modules for additional applications
Logs tions. Redundant solutions can be realized with 2 Ethernet

modules.
Plug-in modules are delivered without a protocol application.
According to the table “Communication applications and plug-in IEC 61850 GOOSE
modules,” a module can be initialized via DIGSI 5 with a protocol Areas of use inside and outside switchgear
application. Every interface is assigned the desired application
via DIGSI 5. Assignments can be erased and re-configured. This GOOSE has been established as a worldwide standard for cross
enables a high degree of flexibility when configuring the communication between devices in order to transfer messages
modules. and measured values between devices. In addition to GOOSE
between devices within switchgear, GOOSE is also supported
DIGSI 5 protocol
between devices in different switchgear. The exchanged infor-
The DIGSI 5 protocol works with TCP services, which can be mation is described in data terms via standard-conforming SCL
routed via IP networks. Worldwide remote access to devices via files, which are defined in Edition 2 of IEC 61850. The exchange
secure connections is an integral component of the communica- itself occurs via high-performance IP network connections or
tion concept. Notes on secure access via networks can be found Ethernet network connections. This data exchange can also be
in the next chapter "Cyber security" of this catalog. The protocol realized via an Ethernet module used exclusively for this
is available on the USB interface and all Ethernet interfaces. purpose.
Optionally, DIGSI 5 can also be operated via its own Ethernet
GOOSE messages can be used to exchange time-critical informa-
module if systems control functions and access for operating
tion that must be transmitted in a few milliseconds. In this case,
and main-tenance are to be kept strictly separate.
GOOSE connections replace transmitted via contacts and binary
IEC 61850 client-server communication inputs; for protection signals, transfer times under 10 ms are
required, and under 20 ms for switch positions and interlock-
via the integrated Ethernet interface (port J)
ings. Measured and metered values are transmitted in less than
This interface can be used in addition to DIGSI 5 as a simple 100 ms. GOOSE applications are generated in the system config-
IEC 61850 systems control interface. It supports a client-server urator for this purpose. These data are exchanged by the devices
connection with a reporting function (GOOSE is not supported in a high-performance manner via GOOSE messages.
on port J). Messages, measured values and fault records can be
Receivers of GOOSE messages can constantly monitor the
read from an IEC 61850 client. Parameters in the device can be
receipt of indications and measured values for an outage of the
changed via the client and the time of the device can be set via
connection. The state of missing indications is automatically
an SNTP server.
updated at the receiver in order to attain a secure state. This
On SIPROTEC 7Sx82 and SIPROTEC 5 with CP300, this interface allows a constant, high-quality monitoring of GOOSE communi-
also supports GOOSE messages of IEC 61850. cation to be realized. GOOSE messages transmitted during the
On Ethernet modules test mode of a device are ignored by the receivers if these are in
normal operation. A test of a device can be performed without it
Messages, measured and metered values can be transferred via
being disconnecting from the communication network.
the client-server communication in static and dynamic reports to
a maximum of 6 clients (substation controllers). Dynamic
reports are created and read by the client without resetting the
parameters of the device. The static reports are created via
the IEC 61850 system configurator and are permanently saved
in the device as indication lists. Fault records can also be
retrieved in binary Comtrade format. Extensive control functions
are available from the client, such as for the safe switching of a
circuit breaker. The setting parameters of the device can be read
and also changed via the IEC 61850 protocol. The devices can
be integrated in interoperable, intelligent Smart Grids without
3.7 difficulty. Changing the device parameter settings during opera-
tion is possible through substation controller equipment in order
to adapt selected setting parameters to the operating condi-
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication – Serial IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
way, for example, connection to a DNP 3 via a redundant optical

Ethernet ring can be established. Information about a device,
and the fault records of the device, can be routed and trans-
ferred using the DNP 3 protocol. Switching commands can be
executed in the control direction (Figure 3.7/8).
Redundant connection to 2 serial substation controllers can be
established via 2 modules or 1 serial double module. With
Ethernet, 2 Ethernet modules that can work independently of
one another via 1 or 2 networks are to be provided for a redun-
dant connection. Settings values in the device cannot be read or
changed via the protocol.
For DNP 3, the network topologies shown in Figure 3.7/17 to
Figure 3.7/19 can also be used for Ethernet-based or serial
[dw_SIP5-0046, 2, en_US]
communication.
Figure 3.7/7 Separate client-server and GOOSE communication via

IEC 61850 with another serial connection to an
IEC 60870-5-103 master
Serial IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

The serial protocol is transferred via RS485 or an optical 820 nm
interface. The compatible or Siemens specifi c extended IEC
60870-5-103 protocol is supported. The implementation is
compatible with existing solutions, e.g. with SIPROTEC 4
devices, which will enable a trouble-free exchange and exten-
sion of devices even in the very long term. In addition to indica-
tions, measured values and fault records, metered values and
customer-specifi cally defi ned indications of control functions
are also available in protocol extensions. Control commands for
switching devices can also be transferred via the protocol. [dw_SIP5-0057, 2, en_US]
Setting values in the device can also be read or changed via the
Figure 3.7/8 DNP3 TCP/IEC 60870-5-104 communication with further
generic services of the protocol. Information about the device
serial connection with an IEC 60870-5-103 master
can be routed to the protocol interface by the user with DIGSI 5.
Information types and function numbers can be freely config-
Protocol Modbus TCP
ured here. This enables adaptation to existing solutions and the
interchangeability of devices without changes in the substation The Modbus TCP communication protocol is supported by the
controller. This is an important contribution to investment electrical or optical Ehternet module. Modbus TCP and Modbus
security. RTU are very similar, with Modbus TCP using TCP/IP packets for
data transfer.
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol
Modbus TCP can be used to transmit indications (single- and
The IEC 60870-5-104 substation and power system automation
double-point indications), measured values, metered measur-
protocol is supported via the electrical and optical Ethernet
eands to one or two (redundant) masters. Switchgear can be
module. Indications (single and double), measured values,
switched in command direction via the protocol.
metered values can be transmitted to one or two (redundant)
masters. IEC 104 file transfer is also supported and fault record- Time synchronization can be implemented via SNTP or IEEE1588
ings can be read out of the device in Comtrade format. In the via the network, supporting redundant time servers. All addi-
command direction, secured switching of switching objects is tional services on Ethernet like the DIGSI 5 protocol, network
possible via the protocol. Time synchronization can be redundany or SNMP for network monitoring can be activated at
supported via the T104 master or via SNTP across the network. the same time as Modbus TCP and GOOSE messages of IEC
Redundant time servers are supported. All auxiliary services on 61850 can be sent over the network between the devices.
Ethernet such as the DIGSI 5 protocol, network redundancy, or Synchrophasors – protocol via Ethernet (IEEE C37.118)
SNMP for network monitoring can be activated concurrently
with T104. Moreover, GOOSE messages of IEC 61850 can be SIPROTEC 5 devices optionally calculate synchrophasors and
exchanged between devices. work as a Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU). These measured
values, which are synchronized across large geographic areas
Serial DNP3 or DNP3 TCP via a high-precision second pulse, allow for assessment of
DNP 3 is supported as a serial protocol via RS485 or an optical power system stability. These values are transferred via an
820 nm interface, and as an Ethernet-based TCP variant via the Ethernet network with the IEEE C37.118 protocol to a data
electrical or optical Ethernet module. In conjunction with concentrator. Transfer occurs via an optical or electrical Ethernet 3.7
Ethernet, the switch integrated in the module can be used such module. SIPROTEC 5 devices also offer these synchrophasors via
that redundant ring structures for DNP 3 can be realized. In this the IEC 61850 protocol in special, logical measured-value nodes
(Figure 3.7/9).
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication – SUP – Slave Unit Protocol
[dw_central.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.7/9 Central evaluation of fault records and phasors
SUP – Slave Unit Protocol second server. In addition to Ethernet modules, SNTP can also
be used via the integrated Ethernet interface (port J).
This Siemens-specific protocol is used to read out external
20 mA devices (20 mA Box) or temperature sensing devices Time synchronization with IEEE 1588
(thermo box) serially or via Ethernet. These devices are available
For greater precision of time synchronization via Ethernet, the
as accessories to expand SIPROTEC 5 devices with analog inter-
IEEE 1588 protocol is available. It can be activated on electrical
faces. The measured values of these devices can be further
or optical Ethernet modules. The precondition is that the
processed in the SIPROTEC 5 device or are used for protection
network components, e.g. switches, support the protocol and
functions such as overload protection or hot spot calculation of
special IEEE 1588 time servers are present in the network. With
transformers.
IEEE 1588, the signal propagation times of the time synchroni-
Further Ethernet-based protocols and services zation telegrams in the Ethernet network are measured so that
the terminal devices, e.g. SIPROTEC 5 receive time information
Besides the actual protocol application, these services can run in
that is corrected by the signal propagation time, providing more
parallel on an Ethernet module, and can be switched on and off
precise timing than SNTP. The Power Profi le IEEE 1588 C37.238
by the user with DIGSI 5.
is supported and the devices function as ordinary clocks (termi-
Ethernet redundancy with RSTP, PRP and HSR nals) in the network.
The electrical and optical Ethernet module supports with the Network monitoring with SNMP
redundancy protocol (RSTP, HSR) the construction of redundant
The device can be integrated in network monitoring or network
ring structures. With HSR, uninterruptible ring redundancy is
management systems via the SNMP V3 protocol. Extensive
achieved with up to 50 devices in the ring. PRP enables uninter-
monitoring variables, e.g. the state of the Ethernet interfaces,
ruptible communication via parallel networks. These methods
their data throughput etc., can be made known to the moni-
can be activated via parameters. They are independent of the
toring system via MIB (Management Information Base) fi es.
substation automation protocol or the chosen auxiliary services.
These variables are described in data-specific terms in MIB files
Time synchronization with SNTP and can be cyclically read out and monitored by the monitoring
The device can poll the absolute time from 1 or 2 time servers system. No values can be changed in the device via SNMP. It
via an SNTP server, e.g.in the hardened unit 7SC80. In redun- serves exclusively as a diagnosis interface.
dant operation, both servers are read and the time of the 1st Transfer of data via the protection communication
3.7
server is used for setting the device clock with a precision of
The protection interface and protection topology enable data
1 ms. If this server fails, time synchronization takes place via the
exchange between devices via synchronous serial point-to-point
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication – Transfer of data via the protection communication
connections from 64 Kbps to 2 Mbps. These connections can be

directly via optical fiber or via other communication media such
as via leased lines in communication networks.
A protection topology consists of 2 to 6 devices, which commu-
nicate point-to-point via communication links. It can be struc-
tured as a redundant ring or as a chain structure (see Figure
3.7/10), and within a topology the protection interfaces can
have different bandwidths. A certain amount of binary informa-
tion and measured values can be transmitted bi-directionally
between the devices depending on the bandwidth. The connec-
tion with the lowest bandwidth establishes this quantity. The
user can route the information with DIGSI 5.
This information has the following tasks: [dw_Wirkkom-IEEE-interface-lwl-anschl, 2, en_US]
• Topology data and values are exchanged for monitoring and Figure 3.7/11 Protection communication via a communication network
testing the connection. with X21 or G703.1 (64 Kbps / G703.6 (2 Mbit)) interface
• Protection data, for example, differential protection data or

directional comparison data of the distance protection, is
transferred
• The devices can be synchronized in time via the connection,
whereby a device of the protection topology assumes the role
of the timing master.
• The link is continuously monitored for data faults and failure,
and the runtime of the data is measured.
[dw_Wirkkom-Kupferverbindung, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/12 Protection communication via a copper connection
[dw_wirkkom-diff-BI, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.7/10 Protection communication of the differential protection

and transmission of binary signals
Protection interfaces integrated in the device have previously

been used for differential protection (Figure 3.7/10) and the
permissive overreach transfer trip scheme for the distance
protection. In addition to these protection applications, you can
configure protection interfaces in all devices for SIPROTEC 5. At [dw_Wirkkom-IEEE-interface-lwl-anschl, 2, en_US]
the same time, any binary information and measured values can Figure 3.7/13 Protection communication via an IEEE C37.94 (2 Mbps)
be transferred between the devices. Even connections with low interface – direct optical fiber connection to a multiplexer
bandwidth, such as 64 Kbps, can be used for this. Protection
interfaces that mainly serve to transfer data for the differential
protection are designated type 1 links and are used in the
SIPROTEC 7SD8 and 7SL8 devices. Connections for transferring
any data that can be configured in the other devices (for
example, SIPROTEC 7SA8, 7SJ8) are type 2. The protection inter-
faces must be of the same type on both sides.
The figures Figure 3.7/11 to Figure 3.7/16 show possible
communication variants for establishing protection communica-
tions. 3.7
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication – Ethernet – network topologies
standby) and the connection to the switch is monitored. In the

case of an outage of interface 1, a switch is made to interface 2
within just a few milliseconds (Figure 3.7/17).
[dw_Wirkkom-Singlemodefaser-Repeater.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/14 Protection communication via single-mode fiber and

repeater
[dw_SIP5-0031, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/17 Single or redundant connection to external switches
Electrical or optical rings with a maximum of 40 devices can be

established with an integrated switch (RSTP) (Figure 3.7/18).
Both interfaces of the module transmit and receive simultane-
ously. Mixed operation with SIPROTEC 4 devices is possible in
the ring with a maximum of 30 devices. A special ring redun-
dancy process, based on RSTP, ensures short recovery times in
the event of the outage of a device, so that the protocol applica-
tions continue running nearly interruption-free. This configura-
tion is also independent of the protocol application that runs on
[dw_Wirkkom-direkt-lwl-verb.vsd, 2, en_US]
the Ethernet module.
Figure 3.7/15 Protection communication via direct optical fiber connec-
tions
[dw_Wirkkom-Singlemodefaser.vsd, 2, en_US]
[dw_SIP5-0032, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/16 Protection communication via a single-mode fiber
Figure 3.7/18 Ring operation with integrated switch and ring redun-
dancy
Ethernet – network topologies
Regardless of the selected protocol (IEC 61850, DNP3 TCP), the Serial redundancy
electrical and optical Ethernet module are supported by
Redundant connection to 2 substation controllers, for example,
different network topologies.
SICAM PAS, is possible via 2 independent, serial plug-in modules
If the module works without an integrated switch that can be or a serial double module. For example, the serial protocol
switched off through DIGSI 5, it is connected to external IEC 60870-5-103 or the serial protocol DNP3 can run on the
3.7 switches individually or redundantly. In the case of a double modules. Also mixed operation is possible. Figure 3.7/19 shows
connection, only one interface processes the protocol applica- a serial optical network that connects each of the serial protocol
tions (for example, IEC 61850). The 2nd interface works in (hot interfaces of the device to a master. The transfer occurs interfer-
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication – Redundancy in communication
ence-free via optical fibers. For the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol,

special redundancy processes are supported in the device. Thus,
a primary master can be set that is preferred over the 2nd
master in the control direction. The current process image is
transferred to both masters.
[dw_SIP5-0046, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/20 Separate client-server and GOOSE communication via

IEC 61850 with another serial connection to an
IEC 60870-5-103 master
Seamless redundancy with PRP and HSR

[dw_SIP5-0033, 2, en_US]
New technologies decisively shorten the time for the reconfigu-
Figure 3.7/19 Redundant optical connection of devices to ration of communication networks in the event of interruptions.
IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 master (for example, These technologies include:
SICAM PAS)
• PRP = Parallel Redundancy Protocol
Redundancy in communication
• HSR = High Available Seamless Ring Redundancy
You as the user can implement different levels of redundancy.
The number of independent protocol applications running in Both systems operate according to the same principle and
parallel is limited by the 4 plug-in module positions. conform to the standard IEC 62439-3.
A serial protocol can be run 2 times on a double module. But it The same information (Ethernet telegram) is thus transmitted
can also be implemented on 2 modules. Different serial proto- via two different information routes. The receiver utilizes the
cols can be run in the device simultaneously, for example, DNP3 first telegram to arrive and discards the second. If the first tele-
and IEC 103. Communication occurs with one or more masters. gram does not arrive, the second one is still available and is
used. This mechanism is based on the Ethernet stack, which
The Ethernet module can be plugged into the device one or assigns the same MAC address to the two telegrams.
more times. This allows the same or different protocol applica-
tions to be executed multiple times. For IEC 61850, several • PRP uses two independent Ethernet systems. Although this
networks are possible, for example, one for client-server doubles the effort for equipping the network along with the
communication to a system controller and a second for the associated costs, the design is simple.
GOOSE connections between the devices that could be assigned • HSR operates according to the same principle, but one of the
to the process bus (Figure 3.7/20). Through the client-server Ethernet networks is designed in a ring configuration. The
architecture of IEC 61850, one server (device) can simultane- same information (Ethernet telegram) is transmitted in both
ously send reports to a maximum of 6 clients. The doubling of directions of the ring, and the receiver receives it from both
the interfaces on the Ethernet module enables the establish- sides of the ring. This means somewhat greater expenditure
ment of redundant network structures, for example, optical on equipment, but saves on the costs for a second Ethernet
rings or the redundant connection to 2 switches. network.
Protection interfaces can be implemented in double. If one The procedures can be activated via a setting parameter and do
connection fails, a switch is made to the second connection. not have any other parameters. They are therefore easy to set
up. The number of network users is limited in both procedures
to a maximum of 512.
HSR and PRP can be combined using so-called Redboxes (redun-
dancy boxes). This cost efficient solution according to can be
designed in the following manner:
• 2 switches in the control center
• 2 switches in the bay
• 2 Redboxes (RB) per HSR ring 3.7
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication – Process bus – IEC 61850-9-2
• Up to 50 devices per HSR ring

• Easy expansion using two additional PRP switches
[Kom_Communication Mapping_en-US_W, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.7/22 Communication assignment with DIGSI 5 for the

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Process bus – IEC 61850-9-2

The process bus measures current and voltage in a device
(merging unit). The measured values are digitalized in the
merging unit and transported to the protection devices via
optical Ethernet connections with help of the IEC 61850-9-2
communication protocol. The protection devices no longer work
with analog measured values, but directly use the digitalized
[dw_stossfreie-n-1-struktur, 2, en_US] measured values from the sampled values data stream.
Figure 3.7/21 Economical seamless n-1 structure The merging units are positioned in close proximity to the trans-
former to minimize wiring work. The sampled values data
stream generated by the Merging Units can be transmitted to
Integrated setting of communication in DIGSI 5
one or several protection devices.
A communication protocol is configured with DIGSI 5. According
The PB201 Extension Module for SIPROTEC 5 enables simple
to module type, DIGSI 5 offers the user the selection of the
upgrading from SIPROTEC 5 devices to process bus solutions.
respective, permissible protocols/applications. The protocol
parameters are set (e.g. baud rate, IP address etc.). Then the
module is initialized with the protocol application and, for
example, a serial module with the IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3
protocol and the communication parameters are loaded.
For an application template of a device there is an appropriate
communication mapping Figure 3.7/22. In a communication
matrix, the user modifies this mapping and erases and
completes his own information. This mapping file is finally
loaded by DIGSI 5 into the device, and determines the scope of
information that is provided via the protocol. Protocol mappings
can be copied between devices, if they contain the same func-
tions, and can be exported into substation control applications.
[Sip5_Prozessbusloesung_front, 1, --_--]
3.7
Figure 3.7/23 Process bus solution IEC 61850-9-2: SIPROTEC 5 device
with merging units SIPROTEC 7SC805
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication – Arrangement relative to parallel operation in the feeder with process bus
Arrangement relative to parallel operation in the feeder

with process bus
To test the process bus, a simple protection can be used for a
feeder. Modern protection devices such as the SIPROTEC 5 series
have a modular expandable design. For instance, an existing
SIPROTEC 7SJ85 overcurrent protection device can be expanded
with process bus inputs. This enables a cost efficient piloting. As
another benefit, state-of-the-art protection devices are capable [dw_prozessbus_eines_wdl_7sj85_200115, 1, en_US]
of effi ciently protecting more than one object. One SIPROTEC
Figure 3.7/24 Arrangement relative to parallel operation in the feeder
7SJ85, for example, is sufficient to protect up to seven feeders. with process bus
These two features and the fact that overcurrent protection only
requires the currents of a merging unit enable effective parallel
operation. If a system with less than seven feeders is protected Design to communicate means:
with one device, this device will still have available capacity. This
allows for a parallel arrangement with the process bus. For this
• Adaptation to the topology of your communication struc-
ture using settings (ring, star or network)
purpose, the device is fi tted with a process bus input module
and the feeder current is simultaneously measured in a merging • Scalable redundancy in hardware and software (proto-
unit. The current measured by the merging unit is subsequently cols) to match your requirements
connected to the protection device via the process bus. The • Pluggable, upgradeable communication modules
protection device receives the measured current values twice.
Once, it measures the values itself and the second time it • Extensive routines for testing connections, functions and
operating workflows
receives the current values via the process bus. The protection
function is instantiated twice. The protection device protects the
same feeder via the conventional setting and via the process
bus. This enables direct comparison of the process bus and the
direct measurement.
[dw_Komm-protokoll_Stationsleittechnik, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/25 Communication protocols in the substation automation technology and in network control systems
3.7
SIPROTEC 5 System
Safety and Security Concept – Safety
load, prolongs service life and enables error-free operation in

Safety for personnel and equipment are first priority, but
a wide ambient temperature range.
availability is also critically important. And as the plant
landscape becomes more and more open and complex, the • High availability is achieved with the auxiliary power supply
conventional security mechanisms are no longer adequate. concept. Central wide range supply ensures the provision of a
common voltage to all components. Individually required
For this reason, a security concept has been implemented
voltage levels are created in the modules concerned. Thus,
in the SIPROTEC 5 device architecture that is designed to
the possible outage of a local voltage level causes only one
address the multidimensional aspects of security in a
module to malfunction, not the entire device. This selective
holistic approach.
outage is reported.
Multilayer safety mechanisms in all links of the system
safety chain provide you with the highest possible level of
• Crossover wiring of internal analog/digital converters enables
the device’s analog inputs to be monitored effectively and
safety and availability. potentially threatened functions to be blocked early, like
Safety and Cyber Security includes: differential protection if a current channel fails.
• Security concept in device design • Storage of calibration data in the analog acquisition module
enables completely safe exchange or extensions within the
• Information security against IT attacks (IT threats from module unit.
the outside)
• Fully pluggable terminals and plug-in module mean that a
wiring test is no longer necessary when devices or modules
Safety
are replaced.
Multilayer safety mechanisms
• Now that the current transformer is integrated in the terminal
Safety comprises all aspects of protection for personnel and block (Safety CT-Plug), open secondary current circuits cannot
primary equipment installations. The devices and DIGSI 5 occur anymore during replacement of a device or a module.
support this from the functional standpoint. Cyber security When the terminal is pulled out, the transformer is always
measures ensure secure operations in networks. The manufac- opened on the safe, secondary circuit.
turer can support the user with these measures. The responsi-
bility to implement a comprehensive cyber security concept lies
• The device does not need to be opened to adjust binary input
thresholds or adapt them to the rated current of the trans-
with the operator of the system. The concept must consider all former (1 A, 5 A). The device does not need to be opened to
system components with regards to all technical aspects of replace the battery or change the plug-in modules.
Cyber security.
Safety in the hardware design
• The device system consisting of configured hardware building
blocks, each with its own cooling system, reduces thermal
[dw_safety-security, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.8/1 Graphic of distinction between safety and security
Monitoring functions Hardware monitoring

Comprehensive monitoring functions ensure secure operation All hardware in the device is continuously monitored. This
by fast detection of irregularities and automatic initiation of includes for example the CPU, the auxiliary voltage, the battery
appropriate measures to avert incorrect responses. Depending status, the internal clock, the storage modules, the analog
on the severity of the irregularity detected, a warning may be inputs, the bus connections, the expansion and communication
issued, the functions concerned be blocked, or the entire device modules.
may be isolated by disconnecting the life contact. In all cases,
Monitoring of the analog inputs
the diagnostic buffer outputs the cause and appropriate take-
3.8 action instruction. As a data source for the protection functions, monitoring of the
analog inputs is assured in multiple stages. Some monitoring
SIPROTEC 5 System
Safety and Security Concept – Safety
functions are primarily dedicated to the commissioning (incor- Monitoring of protection interfaces
rect or missing connections) and only generate a warning indi-
cation. These include:
• 32-bit CRC checksum monitoring compliant with CCITT/ ITU
for detecting corrupted telegrams
• Current and voltage balance • Invalid telegrams are fl agged and are not used by the protec-
tion system
• Current and voltage sum
• Phase-rotation supervision. • Sporadic interference is ignored, persistent interference trig-
gers blocking of the affected protection (differential protec-
Other monitoring functions detect outages during operation tion) and control functions
and rapidly initiate blocking of the affected functions: • Propagation times are measured and taken into account for
purposes of differential protection
• Fuse failure monitor (loss of voltage)
• The topology of the protected area is monitored. Outages in
• Fast current sum supervision and broken wire monitoring for the communication connections automatically trigger
the power circuits. switching to other communication paths (ring to chain opera-
In addition, the proper working method of all analog-digital tion or hot standby), or otherwise to blocking the entire
converters is assured by plausibility monitoring at the sampling protected area. The same applies if outage of a device in the
level. topology is detected.
Tripping circuit monitoring (ANSI 74TC) Monitoring of IEC 61850 GOOSE messages
The circuit-breaker coil and its feed lines are monitored via two • CRC checksum monitoring, sequence number monitoring and
binary inputs. If the tripping circuit is interrupted, and alarm repetition time monitoring for detecting incorrect or missing
indication is generated. telegrams
Communication connections • Applications consider the state of GOOSE messages that are
corrupt or transmitted under test conditions and switch to
Telegrams are monitored for correct transmission. Faults are
safe mode.
reported via warning messages. Data associated with protection
and control is transmitted via protection interfaces and IEC
61850 GOOSE messages. The transmitted information is also
monitored constantly on the receiving side.
[dw_ueberw-analog-eingang-bei-ADU, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.8/2 Monitoring of analog input circuits for malfunctions during analog-to-digital conversion
Load management and guarantee secure operation. This is particularly critical when
protection and control-related data is transmitted via protection
The free confi gurability of protection functions and function
interfaces and IEC 61850 GOOSE messages. But it applies
charts (CFC) enables them to be adapted to an enormous range
equally for signal processing in the function charts (CFC).
of applications. During engineering with DIGSI 5, the integrated
load model calculates the resulting device load. This ensures
that only viable confi gurations can be loaded into the device.
Standardized management of device modes
Test modes and the health status of information are forwarded
and handled uniformly and consistently throughout the entire 3.8
system. Analysis functions take the modes into consideration
SIPROTEC 5 System
Safety and Security Concept – Cyber Security
Cyber Security transmitted data are ensured. This hinders manipulation and
unauthorized access of the data.
Establishment of connection after password verification
Optionally, a connection password can be set up on the device.
Remote access via the Ethernet cannot take place until the user
enters the password. Only after the connection has been estab-
lished does the user have read/write access to the device. This
connection password conforms to the cyber security require-
ments for assigning passwords defined in NERC CIP. It has 8 to
30 characters and must include upper and lower case letters,
digits and special characters. Through this secure transmission
protocol, the integrity and confidentiality of the transmitted
data are ensured. This hinders manipulation and unauthorized
access of the data.
Greater safety via confirmation ID
Safety prompts must be answered for safety-relevant actions,
such as changing parameters, in order to obtain write access to
the device. These safety prompts can be configured by the user,
and may be different for different fields of application.
Secure logging
Unsuccessful and unauthorized access attempts are also
recorded and an alarm can be triggered by an independent tele-
[dw_cyber-security, 2, en_US]
control link. The execution of safety-critical actions is logged.
Figure 3.8/3 SIPROTEC 5 – functional integration – Cyber security These log entries are safeguarded against deletion. They can be
transmitted to the substation automation unit and archived
With the increasing integration of bay devices in Ethernet-based there.
communication networks, communication must be secured
Integrity protection for files
against internal disturbances and attacks from outside. Stand-
ards and directives such as NERC CIP (North American Electric All files that can be loaded into the device via DIGSI 5 are digi-
Reliability Corporation – Critical Infrastructure Protection) and tally signed. In this way, corruption from outside by viruses or
the BDEW white paper (Requirements for Secure Control and trojans, for example from maliciously manipulated firmware
Telecommunications Systems of the Bundesverband der files, is reliably prevented.
Energie- und Wasserwirtschaft e.V) contain requirements for the Secure standard configuration
safe operation of devices in the critical communications infra-
structure, and are directed at both manufacturers and operators. By default only the connection of DIGSI 5 is enabled in the
device. All other Ethernet services and their ports are deacti-
Cyber Security must be incorporated into the design of devices vated by default in the device and can be enabled with DIGSI 5.
right from the start. This has been carried out systematically in If, for example, only the ring redundancy protocol RSTP is used,
the case of SIPROTEC 5. Measures in the hardware ensure that then as the user you enable this with DIGSI 5 (Figure 3.8/4). The
key material for protecting the communication and datasets of a secure standard configuration provides a potential attacker no
device is stored in absolute security. Communication stacks that open interfaces and only services that are really in use are acti-
are hardened against cyber attacks, a multistage access concept vated in a network.
in operation and permanent logging of all authorized and unau-
thorized access attempts and of critical cyber security actions It is often not desirable to have to enter connection passwords
provide the operator with a high degree of cyber security when and confirmation IDs during the configuration and testing
the devices are integrated in the operator's network. phase. During operation, however, the focus is on the reading
of data. Comprehensive access security can be deactivated in
By default only the connection of DIGSI 5 is enabled in the the device until commissioning has been completed and then
device. All other Ethernet services and their ports are deacti- reactivated for operation.
vated by default in the device and can be enabled with DIGSI5 .
If, for example, only the ring redundancy protocol RSTP is used,
then as the user you enable this with DIGSI 5 (Figure 3.8/4). The
secure standard configuration provides a potential attacker no
open interfaces and only services that are really in use are acti-
vated in a network.
Authentication
Secure authentication takes place between the device and
DIGSI 5. This precludes another program from accessing the
devices and reading or writing data there. Through this secure
3.8
transmission protocol, the integrity and confidentiality of the
SIPROTEC 5 System
Safety and Security Concept – Cyber Security
[onlyRSTP_de, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.8/4 Isolatable communication services during access via

Ethernet networks
Product Security Blueprint

The Product Security Blueprint in conjunction with the "Applica-
tion Note – SIP5-APP-009" for SIPROTEC 5 devices provide you [dw_schaltanlage-mit-remote-zugriff, 2, en_US]
with valuable hints in integrating devices in your network and Figure 3.8/5 Secure operation of devices within switchgear with remote
operating them securely. An overall security concept should be access from an external network
drawn up and maintained in a "Spanning Security Blueprint".
This documents typical network configurations, the services The technical control network and the network for remote
used, and their ports. Measures for updating the components access can also be separated entirely by appropriate selection of
that are critical for cyber security, password protection and anti- an independent Ethernet port for communication between the
virus protection are also described. device and DIGSI 5. This falls within the scope of the operator's
Figure 3.8/5 shows a recommendation of this kind for philosophy. With their concept of pluggable modules, the
protecting switchgear. The SIPROTEC 5 devices are integrated in devices also enable solutions with separate networks. An exten-
optical Ethernet rings via switches. In these rings, each Ethernet- sive range of cyber security features have been integrated in
based substation automation protocol, for example, IEC 61850 SIPROTEC 5 and DIGSI 5, and these are described in the next
or DNP3 TCP and the systems control run without loss of section.
performance. Accesses from a non-secure external network are Security patch management (security updates) for DIGSI 5
allowed via a gateway that is responsible for safeguarding the
network. The accessing party is authenticated, for example, by In response to the requirements for protecting power plants,
DIGSI 5, in the gateway, and communication is encrypted via “patch management” was introduced for DIGSI 5. This means
VPN. This is fully supported by the communication services of that regular security updates for the software components from
DIGSI 5. third-party vendors integrated into DIGSI 5 or used by DIGSI 5
are tested for compatibility with DIGSI 5. A list of available
security updates and compatibility notes is made available for
downloading in the Internet and is updated at monthly intervals
Safety and Cyber Security means:

• Long-lasting, rugged hardware with outstanding EMC
immunity and resistance to weather and mechanical
loads
• Sophisticated self-monitoring routines identify and
report device malfunctions immediately and reliably
• Conformance with the stringent Cyber Security require-
ments defined in the BDEW Whitepaper and NERC CIP
• Encryption along the entire communication segment
between DIGSI 5 and the device
• Automatic recording of access attempts and security-crit-
ical operations on the devices and systems
3.8
SIPROTEC 5 System
Test – DIGSI 5 Test Suite
in a simulation mode. For this, the analog and binary inputs are
3.9 SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with extensive test and
decoupled from the process and connected to the integrated
diagnostic functions. These are available to users in
test sequencer.
SIPROTEC 5 in conjunction with DIGSI 5, and they shorten
the testing and commissioning phase significantly. The tester uses DIGSI 5 to create a test sequence, for example, a
short-circuit sequence, loads it into the device and runs it in
The DIGSI 5 Test Suite offers:
simulation mode. The test sequencer in DIGSI 5 is capable of
• Simulation of binary signals and analog sequences by combining up to six test steps in one test sequence. When
integrated test equipment loaded into the device, this test sequence is run in real time and
• Hardware and wiring test simulates the functions of the device like a real process at binary
and analog inputs. Protection functions, control, logic functions,
• Testing device functionality and protection functions and communication can thus be tested in real time without
secondary test equipment.
• Circuit-breaker test and AR test functions
The test sequence is started manually from DIGSI 5 or controlled
• Communication test including loop test via a binary input. This also makes it possible to test the interac-
tion between several devices.
• Analysis of logic diagrams
Hardware and wiring test
DIGSI 5 Test Suite In the hardware test, the state of the binary inputs can be read
The objective of the extensive test and diagnostic functions that out by DIGSI 5, and contacts and LEDs can be switched or routed
are made available to the user with SIPROTEC 5 together with through DIGSI 5 for test purposes.
DIGSI 5 is to shorten testing and commissioning times. All test The parameters measured at voltage and current inputs are
functions are integrated in DIGSI 5. This enables engineering represented in phasor diagrams – divided according to magni-
including the device test to be carried out with one tool. The tude and phase angle (Figure 3.9/2). Thus it is easy to detect
most important functions should be listed as examples here. and check if the connections in the measurand wiring are trans-
There are also other specific test functions depending on the posed, as well as the vector group or the direction between
device type. current and voltage. In devices that are connected via protection
interfaces, even analog measurement points of remote ends can
be represented as vectors. This makes it easy to check the
stability of a differential protection.
In the wiring test, the wiring connections between devices are
tested. If the devices are connected to a network via Ethernet,
this test can be carried out with unprecedented ease. For this,
the contact on a device is closed with the aid of DIGSI 5. This
contact is connected to a binary input of one or more
SIPROTEC 5 devices via a wire connection. These automatically
send a report to DIGSI 5 to the effect that the binary input has
been picked up by the closing of the contact. The tester can
then log this test and check the wiring between the devices.
[dw_test, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.9/1 SIPROTEC 5 – functional integration – test
Integrated test sequencer

The integrated test sequencer enables functions to be tested via
the test sequencer integrated in the device. Normally, the device
receives analog and binary signals from the process or from an [Analog_Inputs, 1, en_US]
external secondary test equipment. Previously, the protection
Figure 3.9/2 Display of analog measuring points in phasor diagrams
functions and communication were tested with variables such
as these. With SIPROTEC 5 devices these variables can now be
substituted with values supplied from integrated test equipment
SIPROTEC 5 System
Test – Testing device functionality and protection functions
Testing device functionality and protection functions transmitting side Tx of an interface, and these are measured
3.9
again at the receiving interface Rx. The user thus has the capa-
The graphical representation of characteristic curves or
bility to insert loops at various points in the communication
diagrams of protection functions not only help the engineer
network and to test the connection of the loop. The number of
who parameterizes the test functions, but also the engineer
telegrams sent, received and corrupted is displayed continu-
who tests them (Figure 3.9/3).
ously in DIGSI 5, so that the quality of the connection can be
In this test, the operating point of a protection function is repre- monitored.
sented graphically in the diagrams, e.g., the calculated impe-
dance of a distance protection in the zone diagram. Additionally,
messages relating to the protection function are logged, e.g.
pickup or operate.
This test can be carried out with signals from the process or with
the test equipment integrated in the device.
[dw_loop-test, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.9/4 Loop test for protection interfaces
Online monitoring of communication connections

The data flow at communication interfaces can be constantly
monitored. To do this, the number of telegrams that are sent,
received and corrupted per time unit for serial connections and
Ethernet interfaces during operation is constantly measured and
displayed. If faults occur, an alarm can be issued. A network
management and monitoring system performs detailed moni-
toring of Ethernet modules via the SNMP protocol.
For protection interfaces the delay time of the signals is also
monitored, and it is calculated during synchronization by means
of a highly precise second pulse in the transmit and receive
directions. Additionally, the communication topology is also
[Protection_test_curve_Fault_EN, 1, en_US]
monitored constantly there and displayed in DIGSI 5. GOOSE
connections can be monitored permanently at the receiving site
Figure 3.9/3 Test of protection function with operating point of the during operation. This means that an outage is detected within
protection function in response characteristic curve
a few seconds.
Circuit-breakter test and AR test function Protocol test
Switching sequences can be initiated via DIGSI 5 to test the For the protocol test, specific signal values are set and reset
automatic reclosing (AR). However, this is only possible if using DIGSI 5 (Figure 3.9/5). The test mode itself is configu-
remote switching via the key switch is permitted. In addition, a rable. The device sends the selected value to the client using the
safety prompt (confirmation ID) must be entered for switching configured communication protocol, for example IEC 61850. In
authorization via DIGSI 5. this case, a report is generated or a GOOSE message is sent
automatically when this information is switched correspond-
There are additional safety prompts for non-interlocked
ingly.
switching. This provides protection against unauthorized use or
inadvertent actuation during operation. A circuit-breaker test The device can be used to test systems control information for
can also be deactivated and activated without an interlocking all protocols (for example, IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103, serial
check. DNP3, DNP3 TCP) without the going through the process of
generating signal states with test equipment. Signals that that
Communication testing
are transmitted across protection interfaces can also be tested.
Since communication is an integral component of the devices
and they are interconnected either directly or via substation
control system, they must be thoroughly tested at commis-
sioning and monitored continuously during operation. The inte-
grated test tools assist the user in ensuring that the communica-
tion routes are tested and monitored efficiently.
Loop test for the communication connections
This test is launched by DIGSI 5 for a communication module
and a selected interface if a protection interface is configured at
a remote line end. It is used to detect disturbances in subsec-
tions when inspecting the physical connection of the communi-
cation route (Figure 3.9/4). Test telegrams are sent from the
SIPROTEC 5 System
Test – Test and display of external timers
tion charts (CFC) can thus be created offline in the office and
3.9
tested without using a device.
[Protokolltest, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.9/5 Protocol test for substation automation technology or for

GOOSE and protection interfaces
[Interlocking, 1, en_US]
Test and display of external timers
Figure 3.9/7 Easy analysis of function charts
If the system time of the device is set externally using 1 or 2
timers, this time can be read out in the device or with DIGSI 5.
When the time protocol returns these values, it indicates which Using the DIGSI 5 Test Suite means:
timer is setting the system time and issues a statement
regarding the quality of the time source. Synchronization via
• Considerably shorter testing and commissioning time
external clocks can thus be monitored and displayed during • Having commissioning support personnel in the adjacent
operation (Figure 3.9/6). substation is not absolutely necessary
• All test routines performed are documented
• Testing using secondary test equipment is for the most
part unnecessary
[DIGSI5_TimeSynch, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.9/6 Test of external timers
Analysis of logic diagrams (CFC debugging)

Logic diagrams prepared in the form of function charts (CFCs)
can be tested offline in DIGSI 5. To this end, test sequences can
be generated with the DIGSI 5 sequencer to act on logical inputs
of the function chart or the analog and binary inputs of the
device. This makes it possible to test not only the function chart
but also its interaction with upstream and downstream func-
tions. During this test, the values of variables are displayed and
their changes over time are logged in records that can be
analyzed later, for example, with SIGRA. This enables even
complex temporal dependencies to be analyzed with ease. Func-
SIPROTEC 5 System
Engineering – Product selection via the order configurator
In project engineering with SIPROTEC 5, your workflow is

the central focus – from the beginning with the single-line
diagram of the primary system on to ordering, engineering 3.10
and parameter setting all the way through to testing and
commissioning. For you, this means: fewer errors, higher
quality and higher efficiency.
For you, holistic workflow means optimal, integrated
support for all project phases:
• Project specification
• Device engineering
• System engineering
• Commissioning
• Operation and service
Product selection via the order configurator
The order configurator assists you in the selection of SIPROTEC 5
products. The order configurator is a Web application that can
be used with any browser. The SIPROTEC-5 configurator can be
used to configure complete devices or individual components,
such as communication modules or expansion modules.
At the end of the configuration process, the product code and a
detailed presentation of the configuration result are provided. It
clearly describes the product and also serves as the order
number.
All functions from the library
The SIPROTEC 5 devices always have a basic functionality avail-
able depending on device type. You can extend these flexibly [Konfiguration_1, 1, en_US]
with any desired functions from the library. Additional functions

Figure 3.10/1 Representation of configuration result (hardware details)
are paid with your credit balance, which is reflected in function
points. The function-point calculator assists you in finding the
correct function point value for your application. This guaran-
tees that the selected device has the required functionality.
In the SIPROTEC 5 system, the main function is determined by
the selection of the device type, while the scope of the addi-
tional functionality is determined by a single property, the func-
tion points value. This means that the functionality does not
have to be fixed in detail during product selection. In the later
engineering phase, any optional additional function can be
selected from the device-specific function library. You must
simply ensure that your balance of function points ordered for
the device is not exceeded. Extra function points can simply be
reordered at any time.
Clearly presented result representation
The successful configuration of a device is represented on a
clearly organized result page. You can also save the result as
a .pdf file (see Figure 3.10/2). The specified product code can
then be adopted directly into the information system or the
ordering system or DIGSI 5 (www.siemens.com/siprotec).
SIPROTEC 5 System
Engineering – Product selection via the order configurator
3.10
[Konfiguration_2, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/2 Representation of configuration result (functional scope)
SIPROTEC 5 System
Engineering – DIGSI 5
3.10
[DIGSI 5_BO, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/3 Structure of the DIGSI 5 user interface
DIGSI 5 consistency checks enable rapid project engineering. Then the

system configuration (routings, implementation of corre-
The product code calculated with the SIPROTEC 5 configurator
sponding logic into function charts (CFC)) and the parameteriza-
can be adopted directly into the engineering program DIGSI 5. In
tion must also be performed.
this way, you create your selected devices directly in DIGSI 5.
Since all device characteristics are unambiguously specified via The new program structure of DIGSI 5 is designed to optimally
the product code, engineering work with DIGSI 5 starts on a support the required work steps during a project. The applica-
consistent basis without the need for a time-consuming re-entry tion-oriented engineering approach guarantees that you are
of the device characteristics. always focused on the workflow. DIGSI 5 makes you more
From planning to engineering up to testing – DIGSI 5 productive – from design to engineering and even with installa-
tion, commissioning and operation.
The engineering tool DIGSI 5 assists you in your workflow from
The project view guides you through the entire workflow
planning to operation of your systems with SIPROTEC 5 devices.
With DIGSI 5 you have full control over the engineering. The In DIGSI 5 processing and maintenance of all components of
functional scope of the tool covers all tasks – from device IEDs and of all associated data is carried out in a project-oriented
configuration and device setting to commissioning and evalua- fashion. This means that the topology, devices, parameter
tion of fault data. values, communication settings, process data and much more
are stored in one project.
This is how a modern, efficient engineering process looks in
short form: All devices are available in one central location. By simply
opening the device in the project tree, the entire contents are
In the rough planning, the system layout is documented using
made available. When you begin with a device, you can edit
CAD. This system layout is prepared as the basis for the detail
your tasks simply and intuitively.
planning in the Single-line Editor. Depending on the application,
the required functionality (protection functions, control and The user interface of DIGSI 5 is divided into several areas (Figure
automation scope as well as auxiliary functions) is defined and a 3.10/3). In the project tree on the left, everything that belongs
device is selected. In the next step, the device is assigned an to your project is displayed, for example devices and global
application template tailored to the application. Function adap- settings. Double-clicking on an entry opens up an editor in the
tations are possible at any time after the selection of the appli- main panel of the window. This can be, for example, an editor
cation template. The high-performance copy functions with
SIPROTEC 5 System
for changing protection parameters, for configuring communi- well as circuit breakers). Thus, a topological reference is created.
cation mappings or for creating function charts (CFC). Setting values of the transformers (primary and secondary rated
values, as well as the neutral point formation with current trans-
3.10 In the lower area of the screen view, you can quickly and
formers) can then be adopted from the single-line diagram.
conveniently access the properties of all elements (for example,
with circuit breakers or signals). This area also contains lists with Design of user-defined control displays
warnings and errors.
With the display editor you can create or change the factory-set
The libraries are particularly important in DIGSI 5. They are displays, known as control displays. The editor assists you in a
located on the right and contain everything that is used in the typical workflow. You simply decide which fields of your already
editors. Here you select the required scope and insert it into created single-line diagram are to be used for the display pages
your project. When configuring the hardware, you can select – and that is all there is to it. Naturally, the displays can also be
different hardware components, for example, a communication completely newly created or imported. To do this, drag a signal
module. On the other hand, if you are working with function from the library to a dynamic element in the display and the
charts (CFC), you select the corresponding logical building connection is created. Besides the use of icons in accordance
blocks and select the required functionality while configuring with the IEC and ANSI standards, you can create your own static
the protection scope. For this purpose, you move the elements or dynamic icons in an icon editor.
to the position of the editor where you need them. Routing and assignment
Visual definition of the primary topology in single lines
The routing matrix is one of the most important functionalities
The single-line diagram describes the primary topology of your of DIGSI 5. It is conveniently divided between 2 editors: "Infor-
system. (Figure 3.10/4). For this, simply select the correct mation routing" and "communication mapping". Both views are
single-line template from the library. Further processing, for designed such that you can quickly complete your task. With
example, an extension, is possible without difficulty. DIGSI 5 pre-defined or user-defined filters, you reduce the displayed
contains a library with elements that are familiar to you from information to a minimum. As in Excel, you can select which
the ANSI and ISO standards. information is to be displayed for each column (Figure 3.10/6).
In the matrix, all signals are sorted according to function and
function groups. Sources and targets are displayed as columns.
The scope reaches from the compressed form of representation
to a detailed representation of information in which you can
view and change each piece of information (routing to binary
inputs and outputs, LEDs, logs, etc.) in different columns. In this
way, all information can be configured very simply.
For communication mapping all necessary settings are already
populated for the selected protocol. You can adapt these simply
and quickly to your needs.
With a large selection of filters and the option to open and close
rows and columns, you will find it easy to display only the infor-
mation that you need.
Saving time is a priority with DIGSI 5. All table-based data
displays furnish the functionality to fill adjacent cells with a
single mouse-click – in the same way you know from Excel.
[SLE_two_bays, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/4 Graphical definition of the topology of a substation in the

single line
From the application to the solution: Application templates

and their modification
After the topology has been defined, the next step is to add the
required device. You simply use the ordering code from the
configurator in DIGSI 5 and your device specification is already
known. In the next step, you select the application template
appropriate for your application and adapt it according to your
requirements. Remove functions that are not needed and add
the desired functions. The library offers you an extensive selec-
tion that you can use for this. The consistency of the device
configuration is continually checked. Finally, you can graphically
connect the application template with the primary elements of
the single-line diagram (voltage and current transformers as
SIPROTEC 5 System
modes offer you a compressed view of the building blocks and

connection points, so that you can see all the information you
need without having to scroll through it.
3.10
Even the use of signals in a function chart (CFC) is designed to
be simpler. Drag a signal via drag and drop from the signal
library to the input or output port of a building block – and you
are finished. Created logic plans can be tested even without
devices (offline) with DIGSI 5. This ensures the necessary quality
for commissioning and gives you a time advantage.
[Change_CT_ratio, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/5 Graphical linkage of primary and secondary equipment
[CFC, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/7 Simple creation of automations with the CFC editor
Setting the parameters of the device

All parameter settings are represented in the same way. This
occurs in the parameter editor, which displays all parameters of
a function. Here you have the choice between different views of
the settings. On the one hand there is a primary view where you
can directly enter the primary setting values.
In this way, you can avoid using conversion factor ratios, which
[Information_routing_long, 1, en_US]
can lead to setting errors. The same applies for the "per unit"
Figure 3.10/6 The entire flexibility of the information routing editor view where setting parameters refer to object rated values. If
you decide on the secondary view, the setting parameters must
Protecting your plant better against invalid operations be converted to secondary values.
A PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) where, for example, For setting special protection characteristics, the graphical
standard interlockings can be executed, is integrated in representation of the characteristics is advantageous. In the
SIPROTEC 5 devices. If you want to change or adapt these, use parameter editor, all characteristic variants of the function are
the function chart (CFC) editor that is included as a component represented. Through this, you can graphically check the effects
in DIGSI 5 Standard and Premium. Thanks to the fully graphical of changes in the settings immediately. Setting values of
user interface, even users without programming knowledge can different settings groups can quickly and easily be compared in
fully utilize the functional scope and thus flexibly adapt the a common window, differences can be detected and compen-
functionality of the device (Figure 3.10/7). sated for (Figure 3.10/8).
For this, an entire library is available to you with building blocks
that are compatible with IEC 61131-3. This library contains
simple logical operators, such as AND, but also complex func-
tions such as timers, command chains for switching sequences,
and much more.
The use of the editor is more efficient than ever before. You
thus need fewer building blocks in order to achieve your objec-
tives. This decisively improves the readability of the function
chart (CFC). New display modes also increase clarity. The new
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.10
[Function Settings_with_diagram, 1, en_US] [Test sequence, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/8 Easy parameter setting Figure 3.10/9 Definition of test sequences for comprehensive tests of
device configurations
Cooperating in teams
Improve your engineering performance by cooperating in
teams. Using extensive export and import functions, one crew
can define the protection parameters and work on the routing
settings while others set system interface parameters. The indi-
vidual areas can be updated at any time with new entries of
colleagues. For example, when the protection parameter crew
has updated its data, this data can be adopted into the project.
Comprehensive testing support during commissioning and
operation
The testing and diagnostic functions assist you in the commis-
sioning phase. You can thus quickly and simply test the wiring
or observe the effect that a message carried over the system
interface has in the superordinate station. The error messages
that are recorded in the event of a disturbance of the protected
object in the relay are listed in DIGSI 5 and can be displayed,
saved and printed for documentation purposes.
The new testing options are an innovation. Multi-level test [Grafische_Konfiguration, 1, en_US]
sequences can be defined (even for phasor factors) via a
Figure 3.10/10 Graphical configuration of network connections
sequence functionality. These are loaded into the device with
between devices
DIGSI 5 and simulate the physical inputs there. These are then
executed in the device via the integrated test sequencer, which
Direct online access of all accessible devices
simulates the analog process values. In this way, you can define
and execute complex checks for testing your project engi- DIGSI 5 also assists you in your workflow if your devices engi-
neering and logic at an early stage. neered offline are connected to the devices in your plant in your
system. In DIGSI 5, all devices accessible via communication
With the test and diagnostic functions, extensive test equipment
interfaces are displayed immediately next to your offline
is no longer necessary or its tests are reduced to a minimum.
devices. The preferred communication in networks is Ethernet.
Processes that were developed for testing special protection
Naturally, you can individually access devices via a USB inter-
principles, such as for line differential protection, can be found
face. In order to work with a physical device, connect the online
in the appropriate device manual. The function chart (CFC)
device and offline configuration via drag and drop, and you are
editor also offers new analysis functions. DIGSI 5 thus enables
done.
offline debugging of logic plans as well as tracing of measured
values – both in the representation of the logic plan and in the Besides transferring the device configuration to individual
representation of lists. This reduces overall testing effort during devices, you can also automatically transfer all device configura-
commissioning. The results of the function chart (CFC) analysis tions to your devices.
can also be represented after completion of the test sequence, Besides online access, in addition to reading fault records and
for example, with the assistance of SIGRA. Thus, even complex message logs, you can also display measured values and
runtime relations can easily be analyzed. messages. You can save snapshots of measured values and
SIPROTEC 5 System
Engineering – IEC 61850 - Ethernet-based substation automation protocol
messages in archives for subsequent analysis or for docu- neering of the devices. Similarly, you can export the settings
menting tests of temporary operating states or commissioning. data to other applications for further processing. It is thus easy
Openness through import and export to exchange data with other power distribution applications, for
3.10
example, network calculations, protection data administration/
DIGSI 5 offers a broad spectrum of exchange formats. These evaluation and data for the protection function test.
include the standard formats of IEC 61850 as well as the
With Siemens ENEAS Generic Solutions, Siemens is taking the
uniform data exchange format TEAX of Siemens Energy Auto-
next step forwards and offers a modular system with defined
mation Tools. This XML-based format is the foundation for all
templates, consisting of precise definitions and ready-made
import-export scenarios and ensures efficient workflows in the
project engineering and documentation solutions for configura-
engineering process. Since data must only be entered once,
tions, SIPROTEC bay devices, SICAM station units, operating
engineering effort is reduced and you profit from consistent
management, for functions and communication. The result is
data quality at all levels of automation.
that all project phases from planning to commissioning, as well
Besides efficient data exchange for the levels of power automa- as all upgrades, expansions and maintenance, are more effi-
tion, the XML data format also supports easy exchange of data cient.
with other applications.
Via the import interface, you can read data from other applica-
tions into DIGSI 5. This thus enables external project engi-
[dw_engineering_appl, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.10/11 Open exchange formats allow reuse of data at all levels
IEC 61850 - Ethernet-based substation automation protocol • Flexible object modeling, freedom in addressing objects and
flexible communication services assure the highest possible
IEC 61850 is more than just a substation automation protocol.
degree of interoperability and effective exchange and expan-
The standard comprehensively defines data types, functions and
sion concepts.
communication in station networks. In Edition 2, the influence
of the standard is extended to more sectors of the energy supply • Full compatibility and interoperability with IEC 61850 Editions
industry. Siemens actively participated in designing the process 1 and 2
of adapting Edition 1 to Edition 2 for the purposes of the stand-
ardization framework. Edition 2 fills in certain omissions and The internal structure of SIPROTEC 5 devices conforms to IEC
defines additional applications. As a global market leader with 61850. The net result is that for the first time an integrated,
Edition 1 SIPROTEC 4 devices, we have resolved the issues of end-to-end system and device engineering, from the single
interoperability, flexibility and compatibility between Editions 1 plant line to device parameterization, conforming to the guiding
and 2: Cooperation with Edition 1 devices is possible without principles of IEC 61850 is possible.
difficulties.
IEC 61850
• Converting the complexity of the IEC 61850 data model into
your familiar user language
• Integrated, consistent system and device engineering (from
the single line of the plant to device parameterization on the
basis of the IEC 61850 data model)
SIPROTEC 5 System
ices assure the highest possible degree of interoperability and

effective exchange and expansion concepts.
3.10 The name of the logical device (ldName) is freely editable. For
example, the standard-conforming name CTRL can be changed
to CONTROL. Structural changes can also be made by changing
the logical device (LD), so that the interface structure can be
flexibly adapted to the user's own requirements. Rigid manufac-
turer specifications are a thing of the past. Prefix and instance of
the logical node (LN) can also be edited.
The standard prescribes the length and rules that are checked by
DIGSI 5 when they are entered.
Function levels of a device, which the standard maps to logical
nodes (LN), can be deleted, copied, and extended with the
user's own objects. Messages can be added to a switching object
such as the LN XCBR, for example, monitoring messages for a
circuit breaker that have not been defined in the original LN. As
the user, you can route all of the information associated with a
[IEC_Change_CT_ratio, 1, --_--]
given switching object into a logical node (LN).
Figure 3.10/12 System specification and configuration in DIGSI 5 – the Logical nodes (LN) can be added from a library. These instruc-
complexity of IEC 61850 is transparent
tions can be supplemented with your own objects. You can also
define and create generic nodes. For example, there are logical
DIGSI 5 with integrated IEC 61850 engineering covers the nodes (LN) whose functionality you as the user create for your-
complexity of the standard with a sophisticated user interface. self through logic functions. These user-defined functions can
In standard engineering, you as the user will not be required to be loaded into the device and run there. Monitoring functions
deal with the details of IEC 61850; you get to use your user can be created and expanded as required.
language.
A high degree of flexibility in communication is offered for
In the user language, distance protection is distance protection configuration of GOOSE messages and reports.
with zones and dependent functions, not a collection of logical
nodes. Reports are message lists in which information about the Addresses, dataset names, etc., can be set by you, the user.
systems control is configured. In the system configurator, Flexible engineering offers a high degree of design freedom on
GOOSE connections are simply configured in a table with source many levels, enhancing interoperability for more complete
and target information. You work in your language, with func- communication interchangeability. This in turn safeguards
tions and messages associated with a device. If you wish, you investments in model devices in accordance with IEC 61850.
can view the allocated IEC 61850 objects in the IEC 61850
With the single-line diagram, you as the customer can view the
protocol language. This bilingualism is supported throughout
topological structure of the system. DIGSI 5 has been prepared
the user interface by DIGSI 5 and the export files on the substa-
so that it can export this topological structure of a system to the
tion control system. As the user, you can even add helpful notes
SSD file conforming to the standard. This description, as an
to the data points you define in your language and then export
extension of the SCD file, represents the primary system for
them for data purposes in the ICD and SCD description.
technical data purposes. In the future, the objects of the device
with which processes of the primary system are controlled can
be adapted flexibly to reflect the customer's specifications. Flex-
ible engineering is the key to bringing the system view into
harmony with the IEC 61850 structure of the device.
[DIGSI_catalog, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/13 Creating an IEC 61850 station
Flexible engineering offers IEC 61850 experts a wide range of

freedom to design their own IEC 61850 structure, including with
user-defined functions and objects. Flexible object modeling,
freedom in addressing objects and flexible communication serv-
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.10
[structure_editor, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.10/14 Editor for adapting the IEC 61850 structure in the
SIPROTEC 5 view
[One IEC 61850, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.10/15 An IEC 61850 system configurator for all devices in the station
IEC 61850 system configurator SIPROTEC Compact, Reyrolle, SICAM RTUs, SICAM IO/AI/P85x/
Q100 – but also devices from other areas (such as SITRAS PRO)
The IEC 61850 system configurator is the manufacturer-neutral
or from third parties.
solution for the interoperable engineering of IEC 61850
products and systems and supports all devices with IEC 61850, The tool supports the SCL (substation configuration description
not just Siemens products - like SIPROTEC 5, SIPROTEC 4, language) configuration files from the IEC 61850-6 through
SIPROTEC 5 System
Engineering – Effective fault analysis with SIGRA
import or export of all formats (ICD/IID/CID/SCD/SSD/SED). Thus,

IEC 61850 devices can be added and a complete IEC 61850
station is available for the substation automation technology.
3.10
IEDs from the IEC 61850 standard of Edition 1 or Edition 2 are
supported. The possible engineering therefore includes not only
the GOOSE communication and the client/server configuration
via MMS reporting but also the system topology, the process bus
communication with SMV (sampled measured values) and the
IEC 60870-5-104 addresses for the gateway to the network
control center via IEC 61850-80-1.
Simple engineering thanks to customer-friendly workflows and
the universal display of IEC 61850 addresses as well as customer
description texts. Users with IEC 61850 basic or expert knowl- [TimeSignalsDiagram, 1, en_US]
edge find the desired level of detail. For documentation
Figure 3.10/16 SIGRA time signals
purposes, the engineering can be displayed in the web browser
in a customer-friendly form.
Harmonized interfaces of the tool, such as with DIGSI 4 and
DIGSI 5, reduce the engineering effort for Siemens engineering
even more.
Effective fault analysis with SIGRA
After a protection trip following a system incident, it is impor-
tant that the fault is quickly and completely analyzed. With the
fault records saved in the SIPROTEC 5 devices, you can investi-
gate and resolve even complicated faults. The high-performance
tool SIGRA assists you in your evaluation. Besides the usual time-
signal representation of the recorded measurands, it is also
designed to display vector diagrams, locus diagrams and bar
charts in order to represent harmonics and data tables. From the [VectorDiagram, 1, en_US]
measured values recorded in the fault records, SIGRA calculates
additional values, such as missing quantities in the 3-phase Figure 3.10/17 SIGRA phasor diagram
current system, impedance, symmetrical components, etc.
Defect tracing can be evaluated simply and conveniently using Overview of functions
2 measuring cursors. • 6 diagram types:
You are also able to evaluate several fault records in parallel - Time-signal representation (standard)
with SIGRA. For example, the records from the ends of a line - Circle diagrams (for example for RX)
differential protection: You can synchronize these to a common - Vector diagrams (reading of angles)
time base, then process as usual and save as a new record - Bar chart (for example for visualizing harmonics)
(representation in a diagram). Thus, the defect trend can be well - Table (with values of several signals at the same point in
documented. time)
- Fault location determination (display of fault location)
SIGRA also has an offline fault locator. In this context, the fault
records from the line ends are evaluated. Through the precise • Calculation of additional values, such as e.g. positive
determination of the fault location you save time, which you sequence impedances, RMS values, symmetrical components,
can then use to investigate the fault on-site. phasors etc.
SIGRA can be used for all fault records present in the COMTRADE • 2 measuring cursors that are synchronized in all views
and SIPROTEC file formats. The software product is available as • High-performance panning and zoom functions (e.g. section
an optional package in addition to DIGSI 5 Standard, as a stand- enlargement)
alone variant, and is a component of DIGSI 5 Premium.
• User-friendly project engineering via drag & drop
• Innovative signal routing in a clearly structured matrix
• Time-saving user profiles, which can be assigned to individual
relay types or series
• Addition of further fault records and synchronization of
multiple fault records with a common time basis
• Simple documentation through copying of the diagrams e.g.
into MS Office programs
• Offline fault location determination
SIPROTEC 5 System
Engineering – Overview of functions
• Commenting of fault records, commenting of individual

measuring points in diagrams and free placement of these
comments in diagrams
3.10
• Application of mathematical operations to signals.
[Circle diagram new, 1, de_DE]
Figure 3.10/18 SIGRA circle diagrams
[Harmonics, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.10/19 SIGRA harmonics
DIGSI 5, IEC 61850 and SIGRA assist you in an optimal and

holistic manner for your SIPROTEC 5 project
• Powerful and effective analysis of fault records
• Integrated system and device engineering
• Graphical user interface simplifies and accelerates
project engineering
• Application templates and function groups as represen-
tations of the primary application and the primary
objects, such as the line or circuit breaker, ensure a user-
oriented working method and perspective
• Test and simulations tools offer optimal plausibility
checks
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware – Hardware building blocks - flexible and modular
The SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks offer:

The SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks offer a freely
configurable device. You have the choice: Either you use a Durability and reliability
pre-configured device with a quantity structure already
tailored to your application, or you build a device yourself
• Tailored hardware extension
3.11 from the extensive SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks to • Robust housings
exactly fit your application.
• Excellent EMC shielding in compliance with the most recent
The flexible hardware building blocks offer you: standards and IEC 61000-4
• Base modules and expansion modules, each with • Extended temperature range: -25°C to +70°C.
different I /O modules
Modular device technique
• Various on-site operation panels
• Freely configurable and extendable devices
• A large number of modules for communication, meas-
ured value conversion • Large process data range (up to 40 current and voltage trans-
formers for protection applications and up to 80 for central
Hardware building blocks - flexible and modular busbar protection; more than 200 inputs and outputs for
recording applications possible)
With SIPROTEC 5, Siemens has also taken a new path with the
design. Proven elements have been improved and innovative • Operation panel that is freely selectable for all device types
ideas have been added. When looking at the new devices, their (for example, large or small display, with or without key
modular structure is evident. In this way, the scope of the switches, detached operation panel)
process data can be adapted flexibly to the requirements in the • Identical wiring of flush-mounting and surface-mounting
switchgear. You can choose: Either you use a pre-configured housings.
device with a quantity structure already tailored to your applica- User-friendly operation panel
tion, or you build a device yourself from the SIPROTEC 5 hard-
ware building blocks to exactly fit your application. Pre-config- • 9 freely assignable function keys for frequently required oper-
ured devices can be extended or adapted as needed. ator control actions
For the SIPROTEC devices 7xx85, 7xx86 and 7xx87, you can also • Separate control keys for switching commands
combine different base and expansion modules, add communi-
cation modules and select an installation variant that fits the
• Context-sensitive keys with labeling in the display
space you have available. The 7xx82 devices cannot be • Complete numeric keypad for simple entry of setting values
expanded with expansion modules. and easy navigation in the menu
With this modular principle, you can realize any quantity struc- • Up to 80 LEDs for signaling, 16 of which are in two colors.
tures you desire. In this way, hardware that is tailored to the
User-friendly design
application can be selected. Figure 3.11/1 shows a modular
device consisting of a base module and 4 expansion modules. • No opening of device necessary for installation and servicing
– Easy battery replacement on the back of the device
– Simple replacement of communication modules with plug-
in technology
– Electronically settable (no jumpers) threshold for binary
inputs
– Rated current (1 A/5 A) of current transformer inputs
configurable electronically
• Removable terminal blocks
– Pre-wiring of terminals is possible
– Simple replacement of current transformers, for example
with sensitive ground-current transformers for network
conversions
– Increased safety, since open current-transformer circuits are
[SIP5 GD_SS_LED_LED_oLED_W3, 1, --_--]
no longer possible (safety CT plug).
Figure 3.11/1 SIPROTEC 5 device built in modules Base and expansion modules
A SIPROTEC 5 device consists of a base module, up to 9 expan-
SIPROTEC 5 - the use of the modular building block sion modules and a power supply module for the optional
The SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks provide the cumula- second row. Base and expansion modules are distinguished
tive experience of Siemens in digital protection devices and bay firstly by their width. The base module is 1/3 x 19" wide. Located
controllers. In addition, specific innovations were realized that on the rear panel are process connections and space for up to
make the application easier for you, such as recorder and PQ two plug-in modules. The expansion modules and the power
functionalities. supply for the second row are each 1/6 x 19” wide. Expansion
modules can provide either additional process connections or
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware – On-site operation panel
communication connections and are available for the devices On-site operation panel
7xx85, 7xx86, 7xx87 and 6MD8.
The on-site operation panel is a separate component of the
Figure 3.11/2 shows the rear panel of a device consisting of a SIPROTEC 5 modular system. This allows you to combine a base
base module in which the power supply, the CPU board and an or expansion module with a suitable on-site operation panel,
input/output CPU module are permanently installed, as well as according to your requirements. The modular system offers 3.11
4 expansion modules for extending the input/output quantity 3 different on-site operation panels for selection for base
structure, and communication modules. Each expansion module modules and also for expansion modules.
contains an input/output module. The components are The following variants are available for basic modules:
connected by bus connector plugs and mechanical interlock-
ings. • With a large display, keypad and 16 two-colored LEDs
Such a device can be ordered pre-configured from the factory. In • With a small display, keypad and 16 two-colored LEDs
this context, you can choose between the standard variants
predefined by Siemens and the devices you have combined • 16 two-colored LEDs
yourself. Every SIPROTEC 5 device can also be converted or
extended according to your wishes. The modular concept abso-
lutely ensures that the final device meets all standards, particu-
larly with regard to EMC and environmental requirements.
[E_CC_SIP5_19Zoll_KomMod, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/2 Rear view of base module with 4 expansion modules
[Bedieneinheiten, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/3 Operation panels with (from left) large and small display, and operation panel without display
SIPROTEC 5 System
The following variants are available for extension modules:

• Without operating or control elements
• With 16 LEDs (single-colored)
3.11 • With 16 LEDs (single-colored) and key switch
[Erweiterungsmodule, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.11/4 Designs of the expansion modules
The SIPROTEC 5 module is flexible regarding selection of the on-

site operation panel. You can order any device type with a large
graphical display or with a smaller economical standard display.
For applications without device control, an operation panel
without display is also available. The operation panel with a
small display provides seven rows for measured values or menu
texts and the graphical representation of, for example, a single
busbar. All operation and control keys are available to the user,
that is, he can also control switching devices.
Elements of the on-site operation panels
The operator elements are illustrated with the example of the
on-site operation panel with a large display.
The central element is the generously sized display for text and
graphics. With its high resolution, it has ample space for icons in [Display, 1, en_US]
graphical representations. Figure 3.11/5 Display images - measured value and control display
Below the display there is a 12-key block. In combination with 4
navigation keys and 2 option keys, you have everything you The operation panel with large display can also show a complex
need to navigate conveniently and quickly through all informa- control display and thus offers more room for measured values
tion that is shown in the display. 2 LEDs on the upper border of and the display of event lists. This operation panel is therefore
the operation panel inform you about the current device oper- the first choice for bay controllers, busbar protection or
ating state. combined protection and electronic control units.
16 additional LEDs, to the left of the keypad, ensure quick, As a third option, an economical variant is available without
targeted process feedback. The USB interface enables fast data keypad and display. This variant is appropriate for devices that
transfer. It is easily accessible from the front and well protected are seldom or never used by the operational crew.
with a plastic cover. The keys O and I (red and green) for the direct control of equip-
ment, a reset button for the LEDs, and the CTRL key for acti-
vating the system diagram complete the operation panel.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Options The construction of the flush-mounting devices will be recogniz-

able from the previous sections. We would like to briefly intro-
You can order any SIPROTEC 5 device, regardless of its individual
duce you to the two other variants here.
configuration, in 3 different installation variants:
• As a flush-mounting device
3.11
• As a surface-mounting device with integrated on-site opera-
tion panel
• As a surface-mounting device with the on-site operation panel
detached
[Bedienfront, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.11/6 SIPROTEC 5 operation panel
A surface-mounting device with integrated on-site operation

panel
For wall-installation, the SIPROTEC 5 devices can be ordered in
the surface-mounting housing. Thanks to a new concept, these
devices have terminal connection diagrams that are identical to
the corresponding flush-mounting devices. This is achieved by
installing the devices using the principle "with the face to the
wall" and then attaching the operation panels to the terminal
side. With the distance frames that are used, sufficient space
remains for the wiring, which can be routed away upward and
downward.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware – Integrated interfaces
7xx82 7xx85, 86, 87, 6MD8

Binary outputs 9/16 Flexible
Analog measuring 0-4 Flexible, 0-12
transducer inputs
(20 mA)
3.11
Current inputs 4/8 Flexible
Voltage inputs 4/0 Flexible
Housing (x 19 in) 1/3 1/3 to 2/1
Flush mounting device yes yes
Surface-mounted Yes, with assembly yes
device with integrated frame
on-site operation
panel
Surface-mounted no yes
device with detached
on-site operation
panel
Small display (rows) 8 8
Large display (pixels) 320x240 320x240
Function Keys 9 9
Key switch no Optional
LEDs 16 Flexible 16-82
[Aufbaugehäuse, 1, --_--]
Power Supply DC 24-48 and DC 24-48 and
Figure 3.11/7 Device in the surface-mounting housing with integrated DC 60-250 / AC DC 60-250 / AC
operation panel 115-230 115-230
A surface-mounting device with the on-site operation panel Table 3.11/1 Hardware properties
detached
Integrated interfaces
If the operation panel is to be installed detached from the
device, it can be installed as a separate part and connected to USB connections on the front side
the device with a 2.5 m or 5 m long connecting cable. In this The device can be accessed with the operating program DIGSI 5
way, the SIPROTEC 5 device can be situated, for example, in the by plugging a standard USB cable into the USB-B socket on the
low-voltage fixture and the operation panel can be installed front side of the base module. The complete configuration and
precisely at the correct working height in the cabinet door. In setting of the device can be carried out via this point-to-point
this case, the device is fastened like a surface-mounting device connection.
to the cabinet wall. An opening must be provided in the door for
the operation panel. Integrated interfaces on the rear panel of the base module
The base module offers various, permanently installed interfaces
on the rear panel. For even greater flexibility, 2 slots are avail-
able for plug-in modules. For this, please observe the connec-
tion diagrams in the attachment.
[abgesetztes_display, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/8 Device with detached operation panel
7xx82 7xx85, 86, 87, 6MD8

Hardware expandable no yes
Binary inputs 11/23 Flexible
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware – The SIPROTEC 5 terminals
and is connected with the RJ45 on the base module. The CB202
has its own wide-range power supply unit. A great advantage
here is that the switch integrated in an Ethernet module can
execute its data forwarding function for neighboring devices
even if the power supply of the base device is switched off,
3.11
provided the CB202 is still powered. Thus, an Ethernet ring is
not broken when one device is in service.
Via plug-in modules, the devices can be extended with protocol
interfaces and analog inputs. The devices can be ordered with
assembled modules or be extended with modules retroactively.
An expansion module CB202 (right photo in Figure 3.11/9) can
also be assembled with plug-in modules. The modules are easy
to service and can be plugged in without having to open the
device. Since the modules have their own processor, the basic
functions of the device, for example, the protection functions
and the protocol application, are largely independent.
Modules are delivered without configured protocols or applica-
tions. One or more appropriate modules are suggested in the
order configurator corresponding to the desired protocol on a
module. There are serial modules with 1 or 2 electrical and
optical interfaces. Different applications can run on both inter-
[Rückansicht_Basis_CB202, 1, --_--]
faces, for example, synchronous protection communication of a
Figure 3.11/9 Rear view of the device with integrated interfaces and differential protection on one interface and an IEC 60870-5-103
module slots (left: base module, right: CB202) protocol on the second interface. Electrical and optical modules
for Ethernet are still available. For example, the IEC 61850
Integrated Ethernet interface (RJ45) protocol as well as auxiliary services may be executed for each
This electrical RJ45 interface serves to connect DIGSI 5 via a local module.
Ethernet network. In this way, several devices can be operated The SIPROTEC 5 terminals
from DIGSI 5 via one external switch. DIGSI 5 detects the devices
Innovative terminals were developed for the SIPROTEC 5 family .
even without an IP configuration on the local network and can
ll terminals are individually removable (Figure 3.11/11). This
then assign them network addresses.
enables prewiring of the systems, as well as simple device
Optionally, the protocol IEC 61850 can be activated on this replacement without costly re-wiring.
interface for connections up to 6 clients. With the 7Sx82 devices
A
and SIPROTEC 5 with CP300, GOOSE messages are also
supported on this interface.
Time-synchronizing interface (port G)
Via the 9-pole Sub-D socket (connection compatible with
SIPROTEC 4), the time in the device can be synchronized. The set
clock telegram IRIG-B005 (007) of a GPS receiver can be fed with
5 V, 12 V or 24 V levels. In addition, the Central European DCF77
format with summer and winter time changes is supported. An
additional second pulse input enables microsecond-precise
synchronization of the device from a highly precise time source,
e.g. a special GPS receiver. This accuracy is needed for special
protection and measuring tasks. In this way, devices can be
precisely synchronized to the microsecond supra-regionally. For
this, Siemens provides a pre-fabricated complete solution with
time receiver, optical fi ber converters and appropriate connec-
tion cables.
Connecting a detached operation panel (port H)
A detached operation panel provided together with the connec-
tion cable can be connected to this interface. The maximum [terminal blocks, 1, --_--]
distance is 2.5 or 5 meters. Figure 3.11/10 Voltage and current terminal block with jumpers
Connecting the expansion unit CB202 (RJ45)
The base module offers slots for 2 plug-in modules. If more
plug-in modules are needed, these can be provided via a special
expansion module CB202. This module is connected via RJ45.
The expansion module is delivered with an appropriate cable
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware – Modules
In the module there are connections for:

• 4 voltage transformers
• 4 current transformers, optional protection-class current
transformer, sensitive protection transformer or instrument
3.11
transformer
• 8 binary inputs (BI)
• 6 binary outputs (BO), designed as 4 fast speed (type F) make
contacts and 2 fast speed change-over contacts.
The connections are distributed over:
• 1 x 8-pole current terminal block
• 3 x 14-pole voltage terminal blocks
Select the modules suitable for your purposes so that you can
build the SIPROTEC 5 device that precisely matches your applica-
[E_CC_Close_up_AB-03_sRGB, 1, --_--]
tion. An overview of the modules that are available and their
Figure 3.11/11 Removed current terminal block quantity structures can be found in Table 3.11/3.
Current terminals
The 8-pole current terminal with 4 integrated current trans-
formers is available in 3 designs:
• 4 protection-class current transformers
• 3 protection-class current transformers + 1 sensitive protec-
tion-class transformer
• 4 instrument transformers
The terminal design provides the following advantages for the
connection of currents:
• Exchange of the current transformer type also possible retro-
actively on-site (for example, protection-class current trans-
formers for instrument transformer, sensitive for normal
ground-current transformers in cases of network conversions)
• Additional safety during tests or device replacement since the [IO202, 1, --_--]
secondary current transformer circuits always remain closed Figure 3.11/12 Rear view of an expansion module IO202
Voltage terminal
Second device row
The voltage transformers and the binary input and output
signals are connected via the 14-pole voltage terminal. The Should the quantity structure of a device with 4 expansion
cable route away from the device enables clear terminal wiring. modules not suffice, it can be expanded by a second row. A
Jumpers precisely matching the current and voltage terminals PS203 power supply is required for this in the first mounting
are available for connecting contacts to common potential (see position of the second row. The remaining 5 positions can be
spare parts/accessories, chapter Attachment). filled with expansion modules from the SIPROTEC 5 building
blocks. Exception: The CB202 must always be positioned in the
Modules
first row and can only be used once per device.
Selection of the input/output modules
Module CB202
Which and how many process connections a base or expansion
Module CB202 represents a special case. The CB202 provides
module has depends on the choice of a particular input/output
3 plug-in module positions for up to 2 communication modules
module. The modular building block concept includes different
or up to 3 measuring-transducer modules. Combinations are
input/output modules.
also possible, for example, 2 communication modules and one
The IO202 input/output module is used, for example, as a base measuring-transducer module.
measuring module. By equipping several modules with this, you
The power supply is integrated, so that the CB202 can be
can achieve up to 40 measuring channels per SIPROTEC 5
powered independently of the master unit. Communication
device.
with the master unit is assured via an RJ45 connector and the
bus connection on the front of the module.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware – Measuring ranges of current-transformer modules
Measuring ranges of current-transformer modules

The measuring range (full modulation) of the current trans-
formers can be set to different values electronically – depending
on the field of application. In all cases, you can choose between
protection and instrument transformers. Due to the wide 3.11
dynamic range, only protection-class current transformers
should be considered for busbar protection. The possible meas-
uring ranges according to rated current are shown in Table
3.11/2 "Measuring ranges according to rated current".
A large dynamic range is necessary for network protection appli-
cations, so that short circuit currents can be recorded without
distortion. A value of 100 × Irated has proven optimal. For 5 W
transformers, this corresponds to a transformer rated current
setting of 500 A, and consequently of 100 A for 1 A trans-
formers. For applications in generator protection, while it is true
that there are very large primary currents, a dynamic range of
[CB202, 1, --_--]
20 × Irated is still quite sufficient. Thus, a measuring range of
Figure 3.11/13 Expansion module CB202 100 A is obtained for a setting of Irated = 5 A and a measuring
range of 20 A for Irated = 1 A.
Process bus module PB201
A smaller dynamic range means that greater measuring accu-
The SIPROTEC 5 expansion module PB201 makes it easy to
racy is achieved in the rated current range. Consequently, the
extend SIPROTEC 5 devices. The module provides 24 channels
dynamic range for instrument transformers and sensitive protec-
for measured values (sampled measured values) for communi-
tion-class current transformer input for ground fault currents is
cation according to IEC 61850-9-2 with a merging unit. Inte-
extremely limited. In this case, limited means that the input
grated resampling makes it possible to connect merging units
current is truncated on the analog side. Of course, the inputs in
having different sampling frequencies. To ensure network
this case are protected against overdriving.
redundancy, IEC 62439 redundancy protocols PRP and HSR are
integrated. Moreover, PB201 has an integrated web server for
Rated current Measuring Measuring range
expanded diagnostic functions.
Irated range
7xx82 devices
Interfaces:
Protection- 5A 500 A 250 A
• A: 2 LC Duplex interfaces channel A class current 1A 100 A 50 A
transformers
• B: 2 LC Duplex interfaces channel B Instrument 5A 8A 8A
• C: 2 LC Duplex interfaces channel C transformers 1A 1.6 A 1.6 A
Sensitive 5A 8A 8A
• Service: 1 LC duplex interface service port ground-current 1A 1.6 A 1A
input
Table 3.11/2 Measuring ranges according to rated current
Plug-In Modules
Plug-in modules are available for communication or analog
inputs and arc protection. The communication modules are
described in the "Communication" chapter.
Measuring-transducer module ANAI-CA-4EL
The module has four 20 mA inputs. It can be plugged into one
of the slots in the PS201 or CB202. Multiple measured value
modules can be used with each device (one in each available
slot). The connections are created via an 8-pole screw terminal
block Figure 3.11/15).
The technical data for the measuring transducer module is
provided in the Attachment "Summary of Technical Data".
[PB201, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/14 Process module PB201
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware – Plug-In Modules
3.11
[ANAI-CA-4EL, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/15 ANAI-CA-4EL Measuring-Transducer Module
[ARC-CD-3FO, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.11/16 Arc protection module ARC-CD-3FO
Arc protection module ARC-CD-3FO

Up to 3 optical point sensors per arc protection plug-in module
(Figure 3.11/16) can be connected. This yields a maximum
number of up to 15 sensors for modular SIPROTEC 5 devices.
The point sensors can be ordered with connection cable lengths
from 3 m to 35 m.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware – Quantity structure of the modules for 7xx82 devices
Quantity structure of the modules for 7xx82 devices
Fast measuring transducer 20 mA/10 V

BI (connected to common potential)
Number of slots for plug-in modules
Available in the expansion module

BO, change-over contact type F*
3.11
BO make contact type HS**

BO, make contact type F*
Available in base module

BO, change-over contact
Usable in module row

BO, make contact
BO power relay
Power Supply
BI (isolated)
Description
Description
V input
I input
PS101 Power supply module for all 7xx82 devices 3 1 2 1) 2 ■ ■ 1
IO101 Base module for all 7xx82 devices that require 4 1 7 4 2 ■ - 1
current measurement
IO102 Base module for all 7xx82 devices that require 4 4 1 7 4 2 ■ - 1
current and voltage measurement
IO110 Base module for additional binary inputs and 12 7 ■ - 1
outputs for all 7xx82 devices
*Type F - fast relay with monitoring (response time < 5 ms) / **Type HS - high-speed relay (contact with solid-state bypass) with monitoring (response time < 0.2 ms)
1) Of these, 1 life contact
The connection diagrams of the individual modules are included in the Attachment
Table 3.11/3 Quantity structure of the modules for 7xx82 devices
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware – Quantity structure of the modules for all 7xx85, 7xx86, 7xx87 and 6MD8 devices
Quantity structure of the modules for all 7xx85, 7xx86, 7xx87 and 6MD8 devices


3.11



BO, make contact
BO power relay
Power Supply
BI (isolated)
Description
Description
V input
I input
PS201 Power supply module for first module row 3 1 2 1) 2 ■ ■ 1
PS203 Power supply module for second module row ■ ■ 2
CB202 Module with 3 additional slots for modules 3 ■ ■ 1
and an independent power supply
PB201 Process-bus module ■ 1
IO201 Base module for protection applications that 4 8 4 2 ■ ■ 1.2
do not require voltage measurement
IO202 Base module for all devices that require 4 4 8 4 2 ■ ■ 1.2
current and voltage measurement
IO203 Module for devices that require numerous 8 4 4 ■ ■ 1.2
current inputs
IO204 This module contains 4 power relays for direct 10 4 4 ■ 1.2
control of the operating mechanism motors of
grounding switches and disconnectors
IO205 For applications with binary inputs and binary 12 16 ■ 1.2
outputs
IO206 For applications with binary inputs and binary 6 7 ■ 1.2
outputs
IO207 Geared toward bay controllers due to the 16 8 ■ 1.2
predominant number of binary inputs
IO208 Typical module for protective applications. In 4 4 4 3 6 2 ■ ■ 1.2
contrast to the IO202, it is equipped with
more relay outputs
IO209 This module is used when extremely fast trip- 8 4 ■ 1.2
ping times (4 make contacts, 0.2 ms pickup
time) are required, such as in extra-high
voltage protection
IO211 This module is for devices that require 8 8 8 ■ 1.2
numerous voltage inputs
IO212 Module for very fast detection of measuring 8 8 1.2
transducer signals (20 mA or 10 V) with a
main field of application for the recording of
interference signals and monitoring
IO214 Typical module for protective applications. In 4 4 2 4 4 ■ ■ 1.2
contrast to the IO202, it has a reduced quan-
tity structure
IO215 Special module for connection of special high- 42) 4 8 4 2 ■ 1.2
impedance voltage dividers via 10-V voltage
inputs
1) Of these, 1 life contact / 2) 10 V voltage inputs for RC dividers with high impedance
SIPROTEC 5 System
Hardware – Standard variants


3.11


BO, make contact
BO power relay
Power Supply
BI (isolated)
Description
Description
V input
I input
IO230 Module for receiving large volumes of infor- 48 ■ 1.2
mation, such as in the bay controllers or
busbar protection. The process connection is
made via special terminals
IO231 Module for receiving and the output of large 24 24 ■ 1.2
volumes of information, such as in the bay
controllers or busbar protection. The process
connection is made via special terminals
1) Of these, 1 life contact / 2) 10 V voltage inputs for RC dividers with high impedance
Table 3.11/4 Quantity structure of the modules for all 7xx85, 7xx86, 7xx87 and 6MD8 devices
Standard variants Figure 3.11/17 shows one possible standard variant for
To make it easier to select the correct devices, Siemens offers SIPROTEC 7SL87. This variant describes a 2/3 x 19" wide device
you pre-configured devices called standard variants. These having the following quantity structure.
combinations of a base module and one or more expansion • 15 binary inputs
modules are intended for specific applications. In this way, you
can order exactly the right device with a single order number. • 20 binary outputs
The standard variants can also be modified easily and quickly • 8 current inputs
with additional expansion modules. Thus, it is just as easy to add
modules as it is to replace certain modules with others. The • 8 voltage inputs.
available standard variants are listed in the order configurator.
The modules used in the device can be seen on the results page
of the SIPROTEC 5 configurator (see chapter Engineering for
more details).
In our example, the following modules are used in positions 1 to
3:
• Position 1: IO208
• Position 2: PS201
• Position 3: IO202.
The individual terminals are defined by the mounting position of
the module and the terminal designations of the module (see
the Attachment, Connection variations).
As an example, the terminals of the first 4 current inputs, which
are on the IO208 at position 1, are designated as follows:
• I1: 1A1 and 1A2
• I2: 1A3 and 1A4
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 1, --_--]
• I3: 1A5 and 1A6
Figure 3.11/17 Standard variant for SIPROTEC 7SL87
• I4: 1A7 and 1A8.
SIPROTEC 5 System
The additional 4 current inputs are at the 3rd mounting position Regardless of whether you choose a standard variant or
on the IO202 module and are designated as follows: configure your devices freely – you always receive a thoroughly
tested, complete device.
• I1: 3A1 and 3A2
3.11
• I2: 3A3 and 3A4
• I3: 3A5 and 3A6
• I4: 3A7 and 3A8.
[dwbgrpos-170713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.11/18 Terminal designations and counting method
(1) Current terminal A

(2) Voltage terminal A, B, C, D
(3) Terminal for time synchronization G
(4) Plug-in module E, F
SIPROTEC 5 System
(5) Terminal for detached on-site operation panel H

(6) Battery compartment
(7) Terminal for integrated Ethernet interface J
3.11
(8) Terminal for COM link K
(9) 2-pole terminal to connect power supply
(10) Base module 1/3 of 19”
(11) Expansion module 1/6 of 19”
(12) Connecting cable between 1st and 2nd Device Row
Advantages of the flexible hardware module:

• With the flexible hardware module, you conveniently
configure the optimal hardware scope for your applica-
tion
• For many applications, the appropriate device specifica-
tion is already pre-defined as a standard variant
• The hardware design is appropriate for your switching
cell
• The innovative SIPROTEC 5 terminal with integrated
current transformers offers increased safety in systems
testing and flexibility when exchanging the transformer
type
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.11
Appendix
Appendix
Chapter
DIGSI 5 – Variants and system requirements 4.1
Spare parts and accessories 4.2

4 Connection diagrams 4.3
Dimension drawings 4.4
Grouping of measured values 4.5
Technical data 4.6
Appendix
DIGSI 5 – Variants and system requirements – Description
Description • DVD ROM drive

DIGSI 5 is the versatile engineering tool for parameterizing, • Keyboard and mouse
commissioning, and operating all SIPROTEC 5 devices. Its inno-
vative user interface includes context-sensitive user instructions. • USB port
Simple connection to the device via USB enables you to work
Software requirements
with a device easily and efficiently. The full capabilities of
DIGSI 5 are revealed when you connect it to a network of The following operating systems are supported:
protection devices: Then you can work with all of the devices in
a substation in one project.
• MS Windows 7
DIGSI 5 offers superior usability and is optimized for your work • MS Windows 8.1 4.1
processes. Only the information you actually need to carry out • MS Windows Server 2012 R2
your tasks is shown. These can be reduced further via expanded
filter mechanisms. Consistent use of sophisticated and standar- • VMware support for virtual machines running under one of
dized mechanisms in the user interfaces requires less training. the operating systems listed above
Overview of functions A complete list of supported operating systems is included in the

product information for DIGSI 5. The delivered equipment
DIGSI 5 is tailored to specific requirements. The free software contains device templates and an online manual, including
variant DIGSI 5 Compact offers everything that is required for a service (download of updates via the Internet, hot line).
single device. The DIGSI 5 Standard Version is suitable for
complex scenarios with several devices. DIGSI 5 Premium
contains the full functionality you need to raise your produc-
tivity to a new level. The functionalities of the various DIGSI 5
variants are listed in table "Overview of functions of the various
DIGSI 5 variants".
The available DVD contains all components in English, German,
French, Portuguese, Spanish, Turkish, Russian and Italian. More
languages will be added in the future. The delivered package
includes a USB cable for connecting directly to the PC and a
memory stick with the licenses for installing the program.
[dw_engineering, 2, en_US]
Figure 4.1/1 Structure of the engineering process
Hardware requirements
• Intel® Celeron® Dual Core 2.2 GHz (Ivy/Sandy Bridge)
• 5 GB available hard-disk space (Solid state disk (SSD) recom-
mended)
• 4 GB RAM (8 GB recommended)
• HD-ready graphic display ready with a resolution of
1280x1024 or 1376x768
Appendix
DIGSI 5 – Variants and system requirements – Order data for DIGSI 5 variants
Order data for DIGSI 5 variants
DIGSI 5 Compact DIGSI 5 Standard DIGSI 5 Premium with SIGRA

Description Software for configuration and Like DIGSI 5 Compact, but without constraint with regard to the As for DIGSI 5 Standard, but with
operation of individual SIPROTEC number of supported SIPROTEC 5 devices per project. Includes integrated test and startup func-
5 devices including the acquisi- system configurator for IEC 61850. tionality, including the option to
tion of process data from the create test sequences and run
Additional graphical editors for single line diagrams and device
device. them in the protection device
display pages are also included.
without external test equipment.
An editor for continuous func-
SIGRA 4 for professional fault-record analysis is available as an
4.1 tions charts (CFC) is also IEC 61850 also supports flexible
option.
included. engineering and functional
naming.
Projects are limited to only
contain a single device.
Features All features are listed in the table All features are listed in the table "Overview of functions of DIGSI 5 All features are listed in the table
"Overview of functions of variants". "Overview of functions of
DIGSI 5 variants". DIGSI 5 variants".
Authorization No license key necessary Authorization required using the license key on the USB stick; can Authorization required using the
be used on one computer per license. license key on the USB stick; can
be used on one computer per
license.
Available oper- German, English, Portuguese, German, English, Portuguese, Spanish, Russian, Italian, French and German, English, Portuguese,
ating Spanish, Russian, Italian, French Turkish (selectable) Spanish, Russian, Italian, French
languages and Turkish (selectable) and Turkish (selectable)
Included in the • Program, device driver and • Program, device driver and online documentation on DVD-ROM • Program, device driver and
scope of online documentation on • USB stick with the number of licenses ordered. The program can online documentation on
delivery DVD-ROM be used on one computer per license. DVD-ROM
• USB stick including a test • Includes a test license valid for 30 days for free testing of DIGSI 5 • USB stick with the number of
license valid for 30 days, for Premium licenses ordered. The program
free testing of DIGSI 5 • Product information can be used on one computer
Premium per license.
• Product information • USB cable for connecting a PC/laptop computer and all • Product information
SIPROTEC 5 device types
• USB cable for connecting a PC/ • USB cable for connecting a PC/
laptop computer and all laptop computer and all
SIPROTEC 5 device types SIPROTEC 5 device types
Order number PV178 Without SIGRA With SIGRA PV123 (1 license)
P1V24 P1V246 (1 license) PV185 (5 licenses)
P1V48 P1V31 (5 licenses) PV130 (10 licenses)
P1V376 P1V253 (10 licenses) For additional order numbers,
For additional order numbers, for example for updates and for example for updates and
upgrades, please refer to the order configurator. upgrades, please refer to the
order configurator.
Appendix
DIGSI 5 – Variants and system requirements – Overview of functions for DIGSI 5 variants
Overview of functions for DIGSI 5 variants
Compact Standard Premium

Project processing
Maximum number of devices per project 1 unlimited unlimited
Copy and paste ■ ■ ■
Multilingualism is supported ■ ■ ■
Single lines and device displays
Single-line Editor with ANSI and IEC standard icons available - ■ ■
4.1
Device display editor enables creation of user-defined displays and symbols - ■ ■
Setting parameters and routing
Information allocations including filtering and sorting ■ ■ ■
Graphical visualization of protection parameters - ■ ■
Comparison of devices (offline/offline - offline/online) - ■ ■
Continuous function charts (CFC)
Graphical function chart (CFC) editor included ■ ■ ■
Communication
Assignment of communications to system interface ■ ■ ■
Assignment of communications to various protocols ■ ■ ■
Graphical network view of devices - ■ ■
Inter-device communication - ■ ■
IEC 61850
IEC 61850 Edition 2 is fully supported - ■ ■
IEC 61850 – Structure editor for flexible engineering and functional naming - - ■
Access and communication
Via USB and Ethernet ■ ■ ■
Access to communication partners via system interface ■ ■ ■
Online
Measured values (current values, minimum, maximum, average values) and storage in ■ ■ ■
the project as snapshots
Messages (and storage in the project as snapshots) ■ ■ ■
Logs and records Predefined only ■ ■
Display fault records ■ ■ ■
1) SIGRA available as optional package COMTRADE Viewer COMTRADE viewer 1) SIGRA

Loading settings for the selected device ■ ■ ■
Commissioning and testing
Creating and running multistage test sequences, no external equipment necessary - - ■
Test views for testing the device configuration - ■ ■
Offline function chart (CFC) analysis (debugging) - - ■
Export and import
SCL formats (IEC 61850 formats) - ■ ■
Devices (full and partial) ■ ■ ■
Topology, settings, information routing and communication assignments ■ ■ ■
Single Lines/Topology - ■WMF export only ■
Displays - ■ ■
Test object definition (XRIO) ■ ■ ■
Documentation
Printing and exporting project documentation ■ ■ ■
Creation of user-defined print formats ■ ■ ■
Safeguarding and security
Authorization of access to devices with NERC CIP-compatible password ■ ■ ■
Secure connection to the device ■ ■ ■
Configuration data protected from alteration ■ ■ ■
Confirmation codes for safeguarding critical activities (e.g. switching) ■ ■ ■
Appendix
Spare parts and accessories
Group Accessories Article per packaging unit Order no. (short designa-
tion)
Terminal Voltage terminal, terminal block, 14-pole 8 P1Z499
Terminal Voltage input (power supply) 2 P1Z505
Terminal block, 2-pole1
Terminal Type A current terminal, 4 x protection 1 P1Z512
(for modular devices)
Terminal Type A current terminal, 3 x protection and 1 x measurement 1 P1Z529
4.2 Terminal Type A current terminal, 4 x measurement 1 P1Z536
Terminal Type B current terminal, 4 x protection 1 P1Z1869
(for non-modular devices)
Terminal Type B current terminal, 3 x protection and 1 x measurement 1 P1Z1647
(for non-modular devices)
Terminal 2-pole cross connector for current terminal 3 P1Z543
Terminal Module terminal pair IO1102 2 P1Z1656
Terminal Terminal set only for IO230/2313 1 P1Z1841
Terminal 2-pole cross connector for voltage terminal 6 P1Z550
Terminal Cover for current terminal block 1 P1Z567
Terminal Cover for voltage terminal block 8 P1Z574
Accessories Cable, integrated operation panel, 0.43 m 1 P1Z666
Accessories Cable, detached operation panel, 2.50 m (for retrofitting surface- 1 P1Z1878
mounting housing with integrated operation panel in surface-
mounting housing with detached operation panel)
Accessories Cable, detached operation panel, 5.00 m (for retrofitting surface- 1 P1Z2132
mounting housing with integrated operation panel in surface-
mounting housing with detached operation panel)
Accessories Cable set, COM link cable 1 P1Z673
Accessories Set of angle brackets 2 P1Z1850
Accessories Labeling strips for LEDs/keypad 10 P1Z697
Accessories Set of part for mounting bracket 1/2 2 P1Z703
Accessories Set of parts for mounting bracket 2/3 2 P1Z710
Accessories Screw cover 1/3, type C11 4 P1Z901
Accessories Screw cover 1/3, type C12 4
Accessories Screw cover 1/6, type C21 4 P1Z1281
Accessories Bus termination plate 2 P1Z1496
Accessories Panel surface mounting assembly frame (for mounting a device 1 P1X73
7xx82 in the panel surface mounting)
Accessories SDHC memory card for 7KE85 1 P1Z2530
Sensors for arc protection Point sensor with line length of 3 m 1 P1X19
Table 4.2/1 Accessories
Appendix
Connection diagrams
4.3
[tdcb202x-100713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 4.3/3 Connection diagram for the CB202
[tdps101x-210513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.3/1 Connection diagram for the PS101
[tdps203x-030713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
[tdio101x-220513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.3/5 Connection diagram for the IO101
[tdps201x-270812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Appendix
Connection diagrams
4.3
[tdio201x-290812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio102x-220513-01.tif, 1, en_US] Figure 4.3/8 Connection diagram for the IO201

[tdio110x-220513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Appendix
Connection diagrams
4.3
[tdio203x-110313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio202x-240812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.3/9 Anschlussplan der IO202
[tdio204x-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Appendix
Connection diagrams
4.3
[tdio205x-240812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio207x-300812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio206x-050313-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Appendix
Connection diagrams
4.3
[tdio208x-300812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio211x-211112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio209x-270812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.3/16 Connection diagram for the IO209 (HS: Highspeed Relay)
Appendix
Connection diagrams
4.3
[tdio212x, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.3/18 Connection diagram IO212
[dwtdio230x-211013, 1, en_US]
[tdio214x-270812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.3/19 Anschlussplan der IO214
The connection diagram is identical to the input and output

module IO202 in the expansion module.
Appendix
Connection diagrams
4.3
[td_tdio231x, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.3/21 Connection diagram IO231
Appendix
Dimension drawings – Flush-Mounting Device
Flush-Mounting Device
4.4
[dw_z1_2-3, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.4/3 Cut-Out Widths and Drilling Pattern - 2/3 Device, First Row
[dw_z1_1-3, 1, en_US]
[dw_z1_5-6, 1, en_US]
[dw_z1_1-2, 1, en_US]
[dw_z1_1-1, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.4/5 Cut-Out Widths and Drilling Pattern - 1/1 Device, First
Device Row
Appendix
Dimension drawings – Flush-Mounting Device
All drillings in the area of the specific device cut-out widths must
comply with the dimensions in the corresponding figures.
4.4
[dw_z2_4-6, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.4/8 Cut-Out Widths and Drilling Pattern - 2/3 Device, Second
Device Row
[dw_z2_2-6, 1, en_US]
Device Row
[dw_z2_5-6, 1, en_US]
Device Row
[dw_z2_3-6, 1, en_US]
Device Row
Appendix
Dimension drawings – Surface-Mounting Devices with Detached On-Site Operation Panel
4.4 [dw_z2_6-6, 1, en_US]

[dw_surface_mounting_in, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.4/11 Flush-Mounting Devices, Dimensions from the Side and
Device Row
Front Views
Width of the Assembly Opening in

mm (in Inches)
Surface-Mounting Devices with Detached On-Site Operation
Panel
1/3 device (base module) 146+2 mm (5.75 +0.08)
1/2 device (base module with one 221+2 mm (8.7 +0.08)
expansion module)
2/3 device (base module with 2 296+2 mm (11.65 +0.08)
expansion modules)
expansion modules)
expansion modules)
Table 4.4/1 Cut-Out Widths
Dimension a
Housing Widths in mm (in Inches)
(Total Width: Housing Width +
4.6 mm (0.18 in))
1/3 device 145 (5.71)
1/2 device 220 (8.66)
2/3 device 295 (11.61)
5/6 device 370 (14.57)
1/1 device 445 (17.52)
Table 4.4/2 Variable Housing Widths

[dw_z1_osop_1-3, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.4/12 Drilling Pattern of the On-Site Operation Panel of the 1/3
Device
Appendix
Dimension drawings – Surface-Mounting Devices with Detached On-Site Operation Panel
Device 4.4
Device
[dwosopab-070211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 4.4/17 Surface-Mounting Device with Detached On-Site Opera-

tion Panel, Dimensions in the Side and Front Views
The drilling patterns correspond to the following graphics

Figure 4.4/20 to Figure 4.4/29.
The cable length for the detached operation panel is up to 5 m
(196.85 in).
Device
Device
Appendix
Dimension drawings – Surface-Mounting Devices with Integrated On-Site Operation Panel (Non-Modular
Device)
Surface-Mounting Devices with Integrated On-Site
Operation Panel (Non-Modular Device)
4.4
[dw_console side view.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 4.4/18 Non-Modular Surface-Mounting Device with Integrated

On-Site Operation Panel, Dimensions from the Side and
Front Views
Surface-Mounting Devices with Integrated On-Site

Operation Panel (Modular Device) [dwbohrge-1_3.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.4/20 Drilling Pattern of a 1/3 Surface-Mounting Device – First

Device Row
[dwosopin-070211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 4.4/19 1/3-Surface-Mounting Device with Integrated On-Site

Operation Panel, Dimensions from the Side and Front
Views
[dwbohrge-1_2.vsd, 1, en_US]

Device Row
Appendix
Dimension drawings – Surface-Mounting Devices with Integrated On-Site Operation Panel (Modular
Device)
4.4
[dwbohrge-070211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Device Row

Device Row

Device Row [dw_z2_bohr_1-3.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.4/25 Drilling Pattern of a 1/3 Surface-Mounting Device –

Second Device Row
Appendix
Dimension drawings – Surface-Mounting Devices with Integrated On-Site Operation Panel (Modular
Device)
4.4
[dw_z2_bohr_5-6.vsd, 1, en_US]

Second Device Row

Second Device Row

Second Device Row

Second Device Row
Appendix
Grouping of measured values
Measured value Description

Grouping of base measured values
Operational measured values RMS value calculation and power calculation as per the definition
Phase currents IA, IB, IC
Ground current IN, INS (sensitive)
Phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, VC
Phase-to-phase voltages V12, V23, V31
Residual voltage VNG
Frequency f
Power P, Q, S (three-phase, phase-specific)
Power factor f
Fundamental and symmetrical components Calculation of phasor variables with Fourier filter or according to transformation rule
Phase currents IA, IB, IC
4.5
Ground current IN, INS (sensitive)
Phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, VC
Phase-to-phase voltages V12, V23, V31
Residual voltage VNG
Symmetrical components I0, I1, I2, V0, V1, V2

Protection-Specific Measured Values Measured values that are especially calculated for individual protection functions, such as:
Distance protection (reactances and resistances of conductor loops)
Differential protection (differential and restraint current, charging currents per phase)
…
Energy Values Metered values are determined for active and reactive energy. Restore time, restore interval and
counting mode are adjustable. Restoring can also be initiated via a binary input. The following
metered values are available:
Active energy Wp+ (release), Wp– (uptake)
Reactive energy Wq+ (release), Wq– (uptake)

Statistic Values The following statistic values are formed as follows:
Total number of initiated trippings of the circuit breaker
Number of initiated trippings of the circuit breaker, separated per switch pole
Total sum of primary breaking currents
Sum of the primary breaking currents, separated for each switch pole
Grouping of advanced measured values
Mean Values Mean values can be calculated on the basis of the operational measured values and the symmetrical
components. The time slot for mean value generation and the output interval are parameterizable.
Minimum values and maximum values The minimum/maximum values can be generated on the basis of operational measured values,
symmetrical components and selected measured values (for example, from mean values). The display
of minimum and maximum values contains the time of their occurrence. The calculation is stabilized
against smaller value fluctuations in currents and voltages.
Appendix
Technical data – Current Inputs
Current Inputs Measuring-Transducer Inputs (via Module ANAI-CA-4EL)
All current, voltage, and power data are specified as RMS values. Connector type 8-pin multiple contact strip
Rated frequency frated 50 Hz, 60 Hz Differential current 4
input channels
16.7 Hz (for rail protection devices only)
Measuring range DC -24 mA to +24 mA
Protection-class Rated current Measuring Measuring
current transformers Irated range of the range of the Fault < 0.5 % of measuring range
modular non-modular Input impedance 140 Ω
devices devices Conversion principle Delta-sigma (16 bit)
5A 0 A to 500 A 0 A to 250 A Permissible potential DC 20 V
1A 0 A to 100 A 0 A to 50 A difference between
Instrument trans- 5A 0 A to 8 A 0 A to 8 A channels
formers Galvanic separation DC 700 V
1A 0 A to 1.6 A 0 A to 1.6 A
from ground/housing
Power consumption Approx. 0.1 VA
Permissible overload DC 100 mA continuously
per current circuit at
rated current Measurement repeti- 200 ms
tion
Thermal rating 500 A for 1 s
(protection and instru- 150 A for 10 s
Voltage Input
4.6 ment transformers) 20 A continuously
25 A for 3 min
All current, voltage, and power data are specified as RMS values.
30 A for 2 min
Rated frequency frated 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Dynamic load-carrying 1250 A one half wave
capacity 16.7 Hz (for rail-protection devices only)
Input and output IO202/IO208/IO211/ IO215
modules IO214
Measuring-Transducer Inputs (via Module ARC-CD-3FO)
Measuring range 0 V bis 200 V 0 V bis 7,07 V
Connector type AVAGO AFBR-4526Z Input impedance 200 kΩ 7 kΩ
Number of trans- 3 Thermal rating 230 V continuously 20 V continuously

ceivers
Fiber type Polymer Optical Fiber (POF) 1 mm Integrated Power Supply
Receiver For modular devices, the following printed circuit-board assemblies
have a power supply:
Maximum -10 dBm ± 2 dBm
Minimum -40 dBm ± 2 dBm PS201 – Power supply of the base module and of the 1st device row
Spectrum 400 nm to 1100 nm PS203 – Voltage supply of 2nd device row
Attenuation In the case of plastic optical fibers, you can CB202 – Plug in module assembly with integrated power supply, for
expect a path attenuation of 0.2 dB/m Addi- example, to accommodate communication modules
tional attenuation comes from the plug and Permissible DC 19 V DC 48 V to DC 300 V
sensor head. voltage ranges to DC 60 V
AC 80 V to AC 265 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Optical budget 1 Minimal 25 dB
(PS201, PS203,
Analog sampling rate 16 kHz CB202)
ADC type 10-bit successive approximation Auxiliary rated DC 24 V/DC 48 V DC 60 V/DC 110 V/DC 125 V/
Transmitter voltage VH DC 220 V/
Type LED (PS201, PS203, DC 250 V or
Wavelength λ = 650 nm CB202) AC 100 V/AC 115 V/AC 230 V,
Transmit power Minimum 0 dBm 50 Hz/60 Hz
Maximum 2 dBm Permissible DC 19 V DC 48 V to 150 DC 88 V
Numerical aperture 0.5 2 voltage ranges to DC 60 V V to DC 300 V
(PS101)
Signal rate connection 1 pulse per second AC 80 V to
test AC 265 V, 50 Hz/
60 Hz
Pulse duration connec- 11 μs
tion test
Comment:
1 All values in combination with sensors approved by Siemens.
2 Numerical aperture (NA = sin θ (launch angle))
Appendix
Technical data – Power Relay (for Direct Control of Motor Switches)
Integrated Power Supply Integrated Power Supply

Auxiliary rated DC 24 V/DC 48 V DC 60 V/DC DC 110 V/ DC Stored-energy time for auxiliary For V „ DC 24 V „ 50 ms
voltage VH 110 V/ 125 V/ voltage outage or short circuit,
For V „ DC 110 V „ 50 ms
(PS101) modular devices
DC 125 V DC 220 V/DC
For V „ AC 115 V „ 50 ms
250 V
Stored-energy time for auxiliary For V „ DC 24 V „ 20 ms
or voltage outage or short circuit,
For V „ DC 60 V/DC 110 V „ 50 ms
AC 100 V/AC non-modular devices
115 V/ For V „ AC 115 V „ 200 ms
AC 230 V, 50 Hz/
60 Hz Rated voltage range DC 24 V to 250 V
Superimposed alternating voltage, ≤ 15% of the DC auxiliary rated The binary inputs of SIPROTEC 5 are bipolar
peak-to-peak, IEC 60255-11 voltage (applies only to direct with the exception of the binary inputs on the
voltage) IO230 and on the IO231.
Inrush current ≤ 18 A Current consumption, Approx. DC 0.6 mA to 1.8 mA (independent of
Recommended external protection Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, char- excited the operating voltage)
acteristic C according to IEC 60898 Power consumption, 0.6 VA
Internal fuse max.
– DC 24 V DC 60 V DC 24 V Pickup time Approx. 3 ms

to DC 48 V to DC 125 V to DC 48 V Dropout time Approx. 4 ms
4.6
AC 100 V to AC Switching thresholds Adjustable with DIGSI 5
230 V Range 1 for 24 V, 48 Vlow ≤ DC 10 V
PS101 4 A intert, 2 A time-lag, AC 250 V, DC 300 V, V, and 60 V
Vhigh „ DC 19 V
AC 250 V, UL recognized Operating voltage
DC 150 V,
SIBA type 179200 or Schurter Range 2 for 110 V and Vlow ≤ DC 44 V
UL recognized type SPT 5x20 125 V
Vhigh „ DC 88 V
SIBA Operating voltage
type 179200 or Range 3 for 220 V and Vlow ≤ DC 88 V
Schurter 250 V
type SPT 5x20 Vhigh „ DC 176 V
Operating voltage
PS201, PS203, 2 A time-lag, AC 250 V, DC 300 V, UL recognized
CB202 Maximum permitted DC 300 V
SIBA type 179200 or Schurter type SPT 5x20 voltage
Power consumption (life relay active) The binary inputs contain interference suppression capacitors. In order
– DC AC 230 V/50 Hz AC 115 V/50 Hz to ensure EMC, use the terminals shown in the terminal diagrams/
1/3 base 7.0 W 16 VA 12.5 VA connection diagrams to connect the binary inputs to the common
module, non- potential.
modular
Without plug-in Power Relay (for Direct Control of Motor Switches)
modules
1/3 base 13 W 33 VA 24 VA Switching capacity for permanent and periodic operation
module, 250 V/4.0 A 1000 W In order to prevent any damage,
modular the external protection circuit
220 V/4.5 A 1000 W
Without plug-in must switch off the motor in case
110 V/5.0 A 550 W the rotor is blocked.
modules
1/6 expansion 3W 6 VA 6 VA 60 V/5.0 A 300 W
module 48 V/5.0 A 240 W
1/6 plug-in 3.5 W 14 VA 7 VA 24 V/5.0 A 120 W
module
assembly Turn on switching power for 30 s, recovery time until switching on
without plug-in again is 15 minutes.
modules For short-term switching operations, an impulse/pause ratio of 3 %
(modules must be considered.
CB202) 100 V/9.0 A 1000 W Continuous and inching operation
Plug-in module < 5 W < 6 VA < 6 VA is not permitted.
60 V/10.0 A 600 W
for base module
In order to prevent any damage,
or plug-in 48 V/10.0 A 480 W
the external protection circuit
module
24 V/10.0 A 240 W must switch off the motor in case
assembly (for
the rotor is blocked.
example,
communication AC and DC contact voltage 250 V
module) Permissible continuous current per 5 A
contact
Appendix
Technical data – High-Speed Relay with Semiconductor Acceleration (Type HS)
Permissible current per contact 30 A for 1 s Short-time current across closed 250 A for 30 ms
(switching on and holding) contact
Short-time current across closed 250 A for 30 ms Total permissible current for 5A
contact contacts connected to common
Total permissible current for 5A potential
contacts connected to common Switching time OOT (Output Closing time, typical: 4 ms
potential Operating Time)
Opening time, typical: 2 ms
Switching time OOT (Output ≤ 16 ms Additional delay of the output
Operating Time) Maximum: ≤ 5 ms
medium used
Additional delay of the output Rated data of the output contacts AC 120 V, 8.5 A, General Purpose
medium used in accordance with UL certification
AC 277 V, 6 A, General Purpose
Rated data of the output contacts DC 300 V, 10 A, Resistive
in accordance with UL certification AC 277 V, 0.7 hp
DC 250 V, 1 hp motor - 30 s ON,
15 min OFF AC 347 V, 4.5 A, General Purpose
DC 110 V, 3/4 hp motor - 30 s ON, B300

15 min OFF R300
DC 60 V, 1/2 hp motor - 30 s ON, Interference suppression capaci- 4.7 nF, ± 20 %, AC 250 V
15 min OFF tors across the contacts
DC 48 V, 1/3 hp motor - 30 s ON, Supervision 2-channel activation with cyclic
4.6 15 min OFF testing (only for make contact)
DC 24 V, 1/6 hp motor - 30 s ON,

15 min OFF Standard Relay (Type S)
Interference suppression capaci- 4.7 nF, ± 20 %, AC 250 V
tors across the contacts Switching capacity On: 1000 W/VA
The power relays operate in interlocked mode, that is, only one relay of Off: 30 VA; 40 W ohmic;
each switching pair picks up at a time thereby avoiding a power-supply
30 W/VA at L/R ≤ 40 ms
short circuit.
AC and DC contact voltage 250 V
Permissible current per contact 5A
High-Speed Relay with Semiconductor Acceleration (Type
(continuous)
HS)
Permissible current per contact 30 A for 1 s (make contact)
(switching on and holding)
Switching capacity On/Off: 1000 W/VA
Short-time current across closed 250 A for 30 ms
Contact voltage AC 200 V, DC 250 V contact
Permissible current per contact 5A Total permissible current for 5A
(continuous) contacts connected to common
Permissible current per contact 30 A for 1 s (make contact) potential
(switching on and holding) Switching time OOT (Output ≤ 10 ms
Short-time current across closed 250 A for 30 ms Operating Time)
contact
Additional delay of the output
Total permissible current for 5A medium used
contacts connected to common
Max. rated data of the output DC 24 V, 8 A, General Purpose
potential
contacts in accordance with UL
Switching time OOT (Output Closing time, typical: 0.2 ms DC 48 V, 0.8 A, General Purpose
certification
Operating Time) DC 240 V, 0.1 A, General Purpose
Opening time, typical: 6 ms
Additional delay of the output AC 240 V, 5 A, General Purpose
Maximum: ≤ 9 ms
medium used
AC 120 V, 1/3 hp
Rated data of the output contacts B150
in accordance with UL certification AC 250 V, 1/2 hp
Q300
B300
Fast Relay (Type F) R300

Interference suppression capaci- 4.7 nF, ± 20 %, AC 250 V
Switching capacity On: 1000 W/VA tors across the contacts
Off: 30 VA; 40 W ohmic;

Expansion Module
30 W/VA at L/R ≤ 40 ms
AC and DC contact voltage 250 V Status Color Quantity
Permissible current per contact 5A Routable Red 16 optional
(continuous)
Permissible current per contact 30 A for 1 s (make contact)
(switching on and holding)
Appendix
Technical data – Base Module
Base Module EMC Electromagnetic Emission Tests (Type Tests, Test under
Mounting Conditions)
Status Color Quantity
RUN Green 1 Standards IEC 60255-26 (product
ERROR Red 1 standard)
Routable (adjustable 2-colored: red or green 16 IEC 61000-6-4

with DIGSI 5) (generic standard)
Only the defined color Conducted emission on auxiliary-voltage lines 150 kHz to 30 MHz
can be used in opera- limit class A
CISPR 22
tion. Radiated emission CISPR 11 30 MHz to 1 000 MHz
limit class A
Signal Signal Rated Input Voltage, DC CISPR 22 1 GHz to 6 GHz limit
Levels/ class A
Burdens Loading effect in electricity-supply systems, Does not apply!
5V 12 V 24 V harmonics
(see EN 61000-3-2,
VIHigh 6.0 V 15.8 V 31.0 V Harmonic current emissions section 7, power
consumption < 75 W)
VILow 1.0 V at 1.4 V at 1.9 V at
Loading effect in electricity-supply systems, Does not apply!
IILow = 0.25 mA IILow = 0.25 mA IILow = 0.25 mA voltage fluctuations
(see EN 61000-3-3,
IIHigh 4.5 mA to 9.4 mA 4.5 mA to 9.3 mA 4.5 mA to 8.7 mA 4.6
Flicker section 6, no signifi-
RI 890 Ω at VI = 4 V 1930 Ω at VI = 8.7 3780 Ω at VI = 17 cant voltage fluctua-
tions)
V V
640 Ω at VI = 6 V 1700 Ω at VI = 3560 Ω at VI = 31
EMC Immunity Tests (Type Tests, Test under Mounting
15.8 V V
Conditions)
Standards IEC 60255-1 and -26 (product standards)

Pin Signal Signal Description
EN 61000-6-2 (generic standard)
1 P24-TSIG DC 24 V input
Electrostatic discharge Contact discharge:
test
3 M-TSIG Return line Pxx-TSIG • Front-side modular and non-modular
IEC 61000-4-2 devices 8 kV
4 M-TSYNC 4 Return line for P-TSYNC
• Back-side modular devices 8 kV
5 Screen Shield potential
• Back-side non-modular devices 6 kV
6 – –
Air discharge 15 kV
Both polarities
8 P-TSYNC DC 24 V input
150 pF
9 Screen Shield potential
Ri = 330 Ω
Table 4.6/1 Time-Synchronization Connection Radiated electromag- 20 V/m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz
netic field immunity
10 V/m, 1 GHz to 2.7 GHz
Time-Synchronization Interface (Port G) Frequency sweep
80 % AM
IEC 61000-4-3
1 kHz
Time Synchronization External synchronization sources, for example,
DCF77 Radiated electromag- 20 V/m, 80 MHz/160 MHz/380 MHz/450 MHz/
netic field immunity 900 MHz
IRIG-B signal
Spot frequencies 10 V/1.85 GHz/2.15 GHz
Internal RTC (real time)
IEC 61000-4-3 80 % AM
Connection Rear
1 kHz
D-sub 9
Dwell time „ 10 s
Rated signal voltages DC 5 V, DC 12 V, or DC 24 V (optional)

Test voltage AC 500 V at 50 Hz
Appendix
Technical data – Insulation and Safety Tests
Electrical fast tran- 4 kV Damped oscillatory 1 MHz, 2.5 kV (peak value)

sient/ wave immunity test
5 ns/50 ns 3 MHz, 10 MHz, 30 MHz, 2 kV (peak value)
burst immunity IEC 61000-4-18
5 kHz Test duration „ 60 s
IEC 61000-4-4 Power-frequency Zone A
Burst length 15 ms
disturbance test
Repetition rate 300 ms 150 V (differential mode)
IEC 61000-4-16
Both polarities 300 V (common mode)
Ri = 50 Ω
Insulation and Safety Tests
Test duration „ 5 min
High-energy surge Pulse: 1.2 µs/50 µs
Standards IEC 60255-27
voltages Auxiliary voltage Common mode: 4 kV,
Voltage test (routine test), current measure- AC 2.5 kV
IEC 61000-4-5 12 Ω, 9 µF
ment inputs, voltage measurement inputs,
50 Hz
Differential mode: relay outputs
1 kV, 2 Ω, 18 µF Voltage test (routine test), DC 3.5 kV
Measuring inputs, Common mode: 4 kV,
Auxiliary voltage, binary inputs
binary inputs, and 42 Ω, 0.5 µF
Voltage test (routine test), only isolated DC 700 V
relay outputs (no Differential mode: communication and time-synchronization
differential mode 1 kV, 42 Ω, 0.5 µF interfaces and analog inputs (module position
4.6 testing) E, F, M, N, and P)
or varistor
Conducted RF, amplitude-modulated 10 V, 150 kHz to Surge immunity test (type testing), all circuits 5 kV (peak value)
80 MHz, 80 % AM, except communication and time-synchroniza-
IEC 61000-4-6 1.2 µs/50 µs
1 kHz tion interfaces and analog inputs, class III
0.5 J
Conducted RF, amplitude-modulated 27 MHz/68 MHz at 10
V, dwell time „ 10 s 3 positive and 3 nega-
IEC 61000-4-6
tive impulses at inter-
80 % AM, 1 kHz
Spot frequencies vals of 1 s
Power frequency 100 A/m (continuous) Insulation resistance > 100 MΩ @ DC 500 V
magnetic field Resistor of protective-equipotential-bonding < 0.1 Ω @ DC 12 V,
1000 A/m for 3 s
immunity test 30 A after 1 min.
IEC 61000-4-8
Pulsed magnetic field IEC 61000-4-9 Installation Requirements
1500 A/m, 6.4 µs/16 µs
Standard for Surge 2.5 kV (peak value) Overvoltage category III
Withstand Capability Degree of pollution 2
1 MHz
(SWC) Protection class 1
τ = 15 µs
IEEE Std C37.90.1
400 impulses per s Standards
Test duration „ 10 s IEC 60255 (product standard)
Ri = 200 Ω
IEEE Std C37.90
Common mode and differential mode test
UL 508
Standard for Fast Tran- 4 kV
sient Surge Withstand Additional standards are listed for the individual tests.
5 ns/50 ns
Capability
5 kHz Vibration and Shock Stress During Transport
IEEE Std C37.90.1
Burst length 15 ms
Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
Repetition rate 300 ms Vibration Test (sinusoidal) Sinusoidal 5 Hz to 8 Hz: ± 7.5 mm ampli-
Both polarities tude
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 1
Ri = 50 Ω and 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 20 m/s2 acceleration
Test duration 60 s IEC 60068-2-6 Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
Common mode and differential mode test 20 cycles in 3 axes perpendicular to one
Standard for With- 20 V/m another
stand Capability or Shock Test Semi-sinusoidal
80 MHz to 1 GHz
Relay Systems to Radi-
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 and Acceleration 150 m/s2
ated Electromagnetic Pulse modulation
Interference from IEC 60068-2-27 Duration 11 ms
Transceivers (Keying 3 shocks each in both directions of the
test) 3 axes
IEEE Std C37.90.2
Appendix
Technical data – Vibration and Shock Stress in Stationary Use
Continuous shock Semi-sinusoidal Humidity

IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 and Acceleration 100 m/s2
Permissible humidity stress ≤ 75 % relative humidity on the
IEC 60068-2-27 Duration 16 ms annual average
(according to IEC 60068-2-30)
1000 shocks each in both directions of the Up to 93 % relative humidity on
3 axes 56 days a year
Comment: Devices subjected to condensation
1 The non-modular devices in the assembly frame meet class 1. are not to be operated!
Arrange the devices so that they
Vibration and Shock Stress in Stationary Use are not exposed to direct sunlight
or extreme temperature changes.
This will prevent condensation in
Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
the device.
Vibration Test (sinusoidal) Sinusoidal 10 Hz to 60 Hz: ± 0.075 mm
Constant humid heat, 56 days 40 °C, 93 % relative humidity
amplitude
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 1 Humid heat, cyclical 12 h + 12 h cycles
and 60 Hz to 150 Hz; 10 m/s2 acceleration
25 °C/55 °C/95 % relative humidity
IEC 60068-2-6 Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
20 cycles in 3 axes perpendicular to one Temperatures
another
Shock Test Semi-sinusoidal Type test, in operation -25 °C to +85 °C 4.6
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 50 m/s2 (in compliance with IEC 60068-2-1
Duration 11 ms and IEC 60068-2-2, test Ad for
16 h and test Bd for 16 h)
3 shocks each in both directions of the
3 axes Temporarily permissible during -20 °C to +70 °C
operation (tested for 96 h)
Seismic Tests Sinusoidal 3 Hz 2 to 35 Hz: Load conditions for the non-
modular devices: With surrounding
IEC 60255-21-3, class 2 and Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
temperatures above 55 °C, no
IEC 60068-3-3 1 cycle in 3 axes perpendicular to one more than 50 % of the binary
another inputs and relay outputs per
assembly are allowed to be contin-
3 Hz to 8 Hz: ± 7.5 mm amplitude (hori-
uously active.
zontal axes)
Readability of the display may be
3 Hz to 8 Hz: ± 3.5 mm amplitude (vertical
impaired below -10 °C and above
axis)
+55 °C.
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 20 m/s2 acceleration (hori- Recommended for uninterrupted -10 °C to +55 °C
zontal axes) duty
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 10 m/s2 acceleration (in compliance with IEC 60255-1)
(vertical axis)
Temperatures for continuous -25 °C to +55 °C
Comment: storage
1 The non-modular devices in the assembly frame meet class 1. Type test, transport and storage -40 °C to +70 °C
2 for 96 h
For technical reasons, the frequency range is raised from 1 Hz to 3 Hz
at the lower limit.
Heat-related limitations for the binary inputs on the IO230 input
module (modular devices)
Other Environmental Information
Switching Up to 40 °C Up to 55 °C Up to 70 °C
thresholds
Maximum altitude above sea level 2000 m (6561.68 ft)
Range 1 for All 48 binary All 48 binary All 48 binary
Minimum admissible atmospheric 783.8 hPa
24 V, 48 V, and inputs usable for inputs usable for inputs usable for
pressure
60 V operating uninterrupted uninterrupted uninterrupted
voltage duty duty duty
Appendix
Technical data – Degree of Protection to IEC 60529
Range 2 for 110 All 48 binary All 48 binary 36 binary inputs Minimum Bending Radii of the Connecting Cables Between
V and 125 V inputs usable for inputs usable for usable for unin- the On-Site Operation Panel and the Base Module
operating uninterrupted uninterrupted terrupted duty
voltage duty duty
(max. 3 in each Fiber-optic cable R = 50 mm
group of 4 at the
Pay attention to the length of the
same time)
cable protection sleeve, which you
Range 3 for 220 36 binary inputs 24 binary inputs 12 binary inputs must also include in calculations.
V and 250 V usable for unin- usable for unin- usable for unin-
D-Sub cable R = 50 mm (minimum bending
operating terrupted duty terrupted duty terrupted duty
radius)
voltage
(max. 3 in each (max. 2 in each (max. 1 in each
group of 4 at the group of 4 at the group of 4 at the
Plug-In Module Dimensions
same time) same time) same time)
Type of Construction (Maximum Width x Height x Depth (in Inches)

NOTE Dimensions)
i At an ambient temperature of 55 °C to 70 °C, a

maximum of 36 relays per row may be switched
USART-Ax-xEL, ETH-Bx-xEL
USART-Ax-xFO, ETH-Bx-xFO
61 mm x 45 mm x 120.5 mm (2.4
x 1.77 x 4.74)
61 mm x 45 mm x 132.5 mm (2.4
on simultaneously. (without protection cover) x 1.77 x 5.22)
ANAI-CA-4EL 61 mm x 45 mm x 119.5 mm (2.4
4.6 x 1.77 x 4.7)
Heat-related limitations for the binary inputs on the IO231 input
module (modular devices) ARC-CD-3FO 61 mm x 45 mm x 120.5 mm (2.4
x 1.77 x 4.74)
Switching Up to 40 °C Up to 55 °C Up to 70 °C
thresholds
Range 1 for All 24 binary All 24 binary All 24 binary
Expansion Module Dimensions
24 V, 48 V, and inputs usable for inputs usable for inputs usable for
60 V operating uninterrupted uninterrupted uninterrupted Type of Construction (Maximum Width x Height x Depth 5 (in
voltage duty duty duty Dimensions) Inches)
Range 2 for 110 All 24 binary All 24 binary 18 binary inputs
Flush-mounting device 75 mm x 268 mm x 229 mm (2.95
V and 125 V inputs usable for inputs usable for usable for unin-
x 10.55 x 9.02)
operating uninterrupted uninterrupted terrupted duty
voltage duty duty Surface-mounted device with inte- 75 mm x 314 mm x 337 mm (2.95
(max. 3 in each grated on-site operation panel x 12.36 x 13.27)
group of 4 at the
Surface-mounted device with 75 mm x 314 mm x 230 mm (2.95
same time)
detached on-site operation panel x 12.36 x 9.06)
Range 3 for 220 18 binary inputs 12 binary inputs 6 binary inputs
V and 250 V usable for unin- usable for unin- usable for unin-
operating terrupted duty terrupted duty terrupted duty Dimensions of Device Rows
voltage
(max. 3 in each (max. 2 in each (max. 1 in each
Type of Width over all x Height over all x Depth 6(in Inches)
group of 4 at the group of 4 at the group of 4 at the
Construc-
same time) same time) same time)
tion
Degree of Protection to IEC 60529 (Maximu

m Dimen-
sions)
For equipment in the surface- IP50
Type of 1/3 1/2 2/3 5/6 1/1
mounting housing
construc-
For equipment in the flush- Front IP51 tion
mounting housing
Back side of the modular devices Flush- 150 mm x 225 mm x 300 mm x 375 mm x 450 mm x
IP50 mounting 268 mm x 268 mm x 268 mm x 268 mm x 268 mm x
Back side of the non-modular device 229 mm 229 mm 229 mm(1 229 mm 229 mm
devices IP40 (5.91 x (8.86 x 1.81 x (14.76 x (17.72 x
10.55 x 10.55 x 10.55 x 10.55 x 10.55 x
For operator protection IP2x for current terminal (installed 9.02) 9.02) 9.02) 9.02) 9.02)
removed)
IP1x for voltage terminal
(removed/without cover)
IP2x for voltage terminal
(removed/with cover)
IP2x for voltage terminal (installed)
Degree of pollution, IEC 60255-27 2
Maximum altitude above sea level 2000 m (6561.68 ft)
Appendix
Technical data – Dimensions of the Basic and 1/3 Modules
Type of Width over all x Height over all x Depth 6(in Inches) Device Size
Construc-
Weight of the Non-Modular Devices 7xx82
tion
Type of construction 1/3
(Maximu
Flush-mounting device 3.7 kg
m Dimen-
sions) Bracket for non- 1.9 kg
modular surface-
Surface- 150 mm x 225 mm x 300 mm x 375 mm x 450 mm x
mounting variant
mounted 314 mm x 314 mm x 314 mm x 314 mm x 314 mm x
device 337 mm 337 mm 337 mm 337 mm 337 mm
with inte- (5.91 x (8.86 x (11.81 x (14.76 x (17.72 x UL Note
grated on- 12.36 x 12.36 x 12.36 x 12.36 x 12.36 x
site opera- 13.27) 13.27) 13.27) 13.27) 13.27) Type 1 if mounted into a door or front cover of an enclosure.
tion panel
When expanding the device with the 2nd device row, then they must
Surface- 150 mm x 225 mm x 300 mm x 375 mm x 450 mm x
be mounted completely inside an enclosure.
mounted 314 mm x 314 mm x 314 mm x 314 mm x 314 mm x
device 230 mm 230 mm 230 mm 230 mm 230 mm
with (5.91 x (8.86 x (11.81 x (14.76 x (17.72 x
detached 12.36 x 12.36 x 12.36 x 12.36 x 12.36 x
on-site 9.06) 9.06) 9.06) 9.06) 9.06)
operation
panel
4.6
Dimensions of the Basic and 1/3 Modules
Type of Construction (Maximum Width over all x Height over all x

Dimensions) Depth 7(in Inches)
Flush-mounting device 150 mm x 268 mm x 229 mm
(5.91 x 10.55 x 9.02)
Surface-mounted device with inte- 150 mm x 314 mm x 337 mm
grated on-site operation panel (5.91 x 12.36 x 13.27)
Surface-mounted device with 150 mm x 314 mm x 230 mm
detached on-site operation panel (5.91 x 12.36 x 9.06)
Masses
Device Size
Weight of the Modular Devices
Type of construction 1/3 1/2 2/3 5/6 1/1
Flush-mounting device 4.8 kg 8.1 kg 11.4 kg 14.7 kg 18.0 kg
Surface-mounted 7.8 kg 12.6 kg 17.4 kg 22.2 kg 27.0 kg
device with integrated
on-site operation
panel
Surface-mounted 5.1 kg 8.7 kg 12.3 kg 15.9 kg 19.5 kg
device with detached
on-site operation
panel
Size Weight
Detached on-site oper- 1/3 1.9 kg
ation panel
Detached on-site oper- 1/6 1.1 kg
ation panel
Appendix
Technical data – UL Note
4.6
Appendix
Legal notice
Indication of conformity Copyright

This product complies with the directive of © Siemens Industry, Inc. All rights reserved.
the Council of the European Communities The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this
on harmonization of the laws of the Member document, or utilization and communication of the content
States relating to electromagnetic are not permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights,
compatibility (EMC Council Directive including rights created by patent grant or registration of a
2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment utility model or a design, are reserved.
for use within specified voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive
Registered trademarks
2006/95/EC).
SIPROTEC®, DIGSI®, SIGUARD®, SIMEAS®, and SICAM®
This conformity has been proved by tests performed according
are registered trademarks of Siemens Industry, Inc.
to the Council Directive in accordance with the generic stan-
Any unauthorized use is illegal. All other designations in this
dards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 (for EMC directive) and
document can be trademarks whose use by third parties for
with the standard EN 60255-27 (for Low Voltage Directive) by
their own purposes can infringe the rights of the owner.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
The device is designed and manufactured for application in an
industrial environment.
The product conforms with the international standards of IEC
60255 and the
German standard VDE 0435.
Disclaimer of liability
This document has been subjected to rigorous technical
review before being published. It is revised at regular intervals,
and any modifications and amendments are included
in the subsequent issues. The content of this document
has been compiled for information purposes only. Although
Siemens Industry, Inc. has made best efforts to keep the
document
as precise and up-to-date as possible, Siemens Industry, Inc.
shall not assume any liability for defects and damage which
result through use of the information contained herein.
This content does not form part of a contract or of business
relations; nor does it change these. All obligations of
Siemens Industry, Inc. are stated in the relevant contractual
agreements. Siemens Industry, Inc. reserves the right to revise
this documentfrom time to time.
Document Edition: 04
Release status: 01.2016
Version of the products described: V7.00
SIPROTEC 5 · Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring · Catalog SIPROTEC 5.01 - Edition 4 4
Published by
Siemens Industry Inc. 2016
Digital Grid Business Unit
PRO & SYS Group
7000 Siemens Drive
Wendell, NC 27591
www.siemens.com/protection
For more information,

please contact our
Customer Support Center.
Phone: +1 877-217-4943
(Charges depending on provider)
E-mail: support.siprotec.us@siemens.com
Article No. EMDG-C10028-00-4AUS

Dispo 06200
KG 01.16 330 En
Subject to changes and errors.

The information given in this document only contains
general descriptions and/or performance features which
may not always specifically reflect those described, or
which may undergo modification in the course of further
development of the products. The requested performance
features are binding only when they are expressly agreed
upon in the concluded contract. www.siemens.com/protection
For all products using security features of OpenSSL

the following shall apply:
This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(www.openssl.org).
This product includes cryptographic software written
by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).

Emdg-C10028-00-4aus - Siprotec 5 - Us

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Emdg-C10028-00-4aus - Siprotec 5 - Us

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIPROTEC 5 for Every Application and Requirement

Catalogs Manuals Software

SIPROTEC 5 Device Hardware Operating

Online help DIGSI 5

SIPROTEC 5 catalog Product information

2 SIPROTEC 5 · Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring · Siemens Catalog · Edition 4

Devices Protection, Introduction 1.1

Automation and Innovation Highlights 1.2

Monitoring SIPROTEC 5 Devices and Fields of Application 2

Device Types 2.1

Catalog SIPROTEC 5.01 - Edition 4 Relay Selection Guide 2.2

Application Examples 2.3

Line Protection 2.5

Distance Protection 2.6

Line Differential Protection 2.7

Differential and Distance Protection 2.8

Circuit-Breaker Management 2.9

Overcurrent Protection as Backup Protection for Line Protec-

Transformer Differential Protection 2.11

Motor Protection 2.12

Generator Protection 2.13

Busbar Protection 2.14

Bay Controllers 2.15

Fault Recorder 2.16

Functional Integration 3.1

Safety and Security Concept 3.8

4.1 DIGSI 5 – Variants and system requirements

4.2 Spare parts and accessories

4.3 Connection diagrams

4.4 Dimension drawings

4.5 Grouping of measured values

4.6 Technical data

Figure 1.1/1 SIPROTEC family

[SIPROTEC5 Historie_dt, 1, en_US]

Figure 1.1/2 SIPROTEC – pioneer for generations

The new benchmark for protection, automation and

and staff Figure 1.1/3 SIPROTEC 5 – Modular hardware

• Individually configurable devices save money on the initial

bility Figure 1.1/4 SIPROTEC 5 - Modular process connection

Figure 1.2/2 SIPROTEC 5 - innovation highlights

[IEC61850 Symbol, 1, --_--]

[IEC61850 Edition 2 Certificate Level A, 1, --_--]

Figure 1.2/5 First IEC 61850 certificate Edition 2 worldwide

SIPROTEC 5 Devices and Fields of

Device Types 2.1

Relay Selection Guide 2.2

2 Application Examples 2.3

Feeder and Overcurrent Protection 2.4

Line Protection 2.5

Distance Protection 2.6

Line Differential Protection 2.7

Differential and Distance Protection 2.8

Circuit-Breaker Management 2.9

Overcurrent Protection as Backup Protection 2.10

Transformer Differential Protection 2.11

Motor Protection 2.12

Generator Protection 2.13

Busbar Protection 2.14

Bay Controllers 2.15

Fault Recorder 2.16

Figure 2.1/1 Fields of application of the SIPROTEC 5 devices

The graphic gives an overview of the utilization of SIPROTEC 5

Main function Device types